Home

Navigator

Contents

1. TIRE CARE Information About Uniform Tire Quality Grading Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires The Tire Quality Grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example e Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires They do not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires light truck or LT type tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575 104 c 2 U S Department of Transportation Tire quality grades The U S Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it Wheels and Tires 295 Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear 115 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in drivi
2. 16 Utilizing the Changing a tire auinseniciieiad 315 Mediation Arbitration o Progra rore 247 Changing the air filter 274 Child safety seats D automatic locking mode retractor 37 Daytime running lamps TAM er Saxton resus EAE 23 see Lamps TUM EE POETE 89 Child safety seats Defrost aupiendisismistaid Um 122 booster Seats xoc es 30 rear WindOW esses 126 Cleaning the touchscreen 351 Dipstick Cleaning your vehicle 281 automatic transmission engine compartment 283 PLUG raara petente ERRORS 268 instrument panel 287 engine OL citt ciet pe 263 MENO eersten ee tiep redo 285 286 plastic parts oo cece 282 PAP lay RUE MM EE 999 Washing o 281 Driving under special WARING GM TREE 283 Conditions 177 182 183 wheels oocccccccccccccccccceccecccesceeseeees 288 sand D 182 wiper blades 284 snow and ice sss 184 Gate voice commands saa 412 through wareg Ra 183 235 iea 398 Dual automatic temperature CIOGK 45e ioi t pe oov control DATO A 122 Console overliead iuisssosos 97 155 E 1 m T P RE 132 Electronic stability control 191 Coolant sisisi 264 Emergencies roadside checking and adding 264 jump starting se 240 refill capacities 324 running out of fuel 164 specifications s 324 Emission control system
3. 169 Cross Traffic Alert 204 End user license agreement 425 464 Index Engine eehed innia 323 g uality sorpi retai 163 cleaning pessier merni 283 running out of fuel 164 COOLANG secerneren 264 safety information relating to fail safe cooling 267 automotive fuels 162 idle speed control 270 lubrication specifications 324 Fuel flex fuel veki le PEV ae refill GCAPAGIUICS sirsie eem enses 324 USOS cete eR 251 256 Service Dolnts i5 esee 262 Engine block heater 160 G Engine oil Garage door opener 147 checking and adding 263 CiDSUCR x25 sessili eri terea 263 Gas cap see Puel cap sis 167 filter specifications 328 Gauges EA tu dede ERE 100 refill capacities 324 specifications ss 324 H Event data recording l Hazard flashers 239 Exhaust fumes 160 HD Radio s 361 F Headlamps 87 AMINE spinacie nenii aas e 276 Fail safe cooling 267 S E s TEE E specifications Fleet MyKey programming 60 checking alignment 276 Floor mats 235 daytime running lights 89 Fluid capacities 324 flash to pass 87 f High beam 42 erede tete 87 Forwar
4. 54 doors veecccsesesecsesesseseseseseseesesesesees 67 J Lubricant specifications 324 Lug nuls ien tetra 322 Jack eise EL TS 315 positioning ooo 315 M Stora S pear eran Ee eee EIn 315 Jump starting your vehicle 240 Making and receiving calls 381 MAP DVD Loading and K Unloading eme 381 Map ICONS accede dtes tes cte dents 421 Keyless entry system autolock Qin 69 Map mode sss 419 keypad 1i teste teh ates 74 Map preferences 417 locking and unlocking doors 75 Map updates 353 422 programming entry code 74 Master lighting switch 87 L Message center warning messages 111 Lamps eerte 87 Mi 94 96 autolamp system 88 89 Mirrors jure SUETON E bulb replacement a uas le memory 2 specifications chart 280 jns ae mirrors power 96 daytime running light 89 SISTIAN 5 cessio tee i De ee ie headlamps eeeee 87 Moon POOF neussHenieinie 98 headlamps flash to pass 87 Motorcraft amp parts 281 328 instrument panel dimming 89 interior lamps 91 MyFord Touch system 347 replacing bulbs 278 279 MyKey eene 60 466 Index N fluid specifications 324 Navigation features 414 Power Windows sesese 93 Navigat
5. 330 ik E aE a irae l park plugs Satellite Radio 366 323 328 Scheduled Maintenance Guide Special i Normal Scheduled pecia notice Maintenance and Log 449 ambulance conversions 15 SD card ee 346 373 414 Specification chart lubricants 324 Seat belts Stability system 191 see Safety restraints 36 Starting your vehicle 157 Seats jump starting 240 child safety seals luces 19 push button start system 156 craig ML EUER 2s Steering wheel 79 ae Fe Oe ee te 144 COMUPOIS 1 esses ec pectet eren 80 memory seat oaoa 56 133 Una rm 79 SecuriCode keyless entry Sun VISO cceecccscceesseeeeesseeeeeeeees 98 SS DBIVE caesa O totale tele 74 Supplemental Restraint System SecuriLock passive anti theft SRS see airbags 45 SYSTE acean ea 76 Supported media file types 376 468 Index Supported player media formats and metadata information seen 376 Suspension sseseeese 210 SYNC customer support 351 SYNC Services sssss 386 System settings ssss 401 T Temperature control see Climate control 122 410 Text messaging 382 Third row power fold seat 146 Tilt steering wheel 79 TIKES asmoei 294 2
6. NBA scores forecast Baseball headlines MLS headlines NFL headlines Baseball schedule MLS schedule NFL schedule Baseball scores headlines schedule College basketball Motor sports scores schedule headlines schedule scores WNBA headlines Golf headlines NBA headlines WNBA schedule Golf leaderboard NBA schedule WNBA scores MyLincoln Touch 393 Alerts If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation touch the i 2 Information button to access these features If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation touch the corner of the touchscreen with the green tab Press Alerts and then choose from any of the following services e View the message e Delete the message e Delete All messages This screen displays any system messages such as an SD card fault Note The system alerts you to any messages by turning the information icon yellow After you read or delete the messages the icon returns to white Calendar If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation touch the i 2 Information button to access these features If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation touch the corner of the touchscreen with the green tab Press Calendar You can view the current calendar by day week or month 911 Assist If Equipped WARNING Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on before a crash the
7. e The engine oil and filter should be changed prior to storage as used engine oil contains contaminates that may cause engine damage e Start the engine every 15 days Run at fast idle until it reaches normal operating temperature e With your foot on the brake shift through all the gears while the engine is running Fuel system e Fill the fuel tank with high quality fuel until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel pump nozzle Cooling system e Protect against freezing temperatures e When removing vehicle from storage check coolant fluid level Confirm there are no cooling system leaks and fluid is at the recommended level Battery e Check and recharge as necessary Keep connections clean e f storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the battery it may be advisable to disconnect the battery cables to ensure battery charge is maintained for quick starting Note If battery cables are disconnected it will be necessary to reset memory features Brakes e Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully released Tires e Maintain recommended air pressure Miscellaneous e Make sure all linkages cables levers and pins under vehicle are covered with grease to prevent rust e Move vehicles at least 25 feet 8 meters every 15 days to lubricate working parts and prevent corrosion Vehicle Care 291 Removing Vehicle from Storage When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage do the
8. When washing e Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine The high pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage e Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine block or other engine components 284 Vehicle Care e Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean In Canada use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo e Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running water in the running engine may cause internal damage e Never wash or rinse any ignition coil spark plug wire or spark plug well or the area in and around these locations e Cover the battery power distribution box and air filter assembly to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES The windows and wiper blades should be cleaned regularly If the wipers do not wipe properly substances on the vehicle s glass or the wiper blades may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades and streaking and smearing of the windshield To clean these items follow these tips e The windows may be cleaned with a non abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner U S or Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner Canada e The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl rubbing alcohol or Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrates in the U S or Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Wa
9. mediation and arbitration During mediation a representative of the BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of the claim If an agreement is not reached during mediation or you do not want to participate in mediation and if your claim is eligible you may participate in the arbitration process An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before an impartial person The arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided within 40 days after you file your claim with the BBB You are not bound by the decision and may reject the decision and proceed to court where all findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute and decision are admissible in the court action Should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision Ford is then bound by the decision and must comply with the decision within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance letter BBB AUTO LINE Application Using the information provided below please call or write to request a program application You will be asked for your name and address general information about your new vehicle information about your warranty concerns and any steps you have already taken to try to resolve them A Customer Claim Form will be mailed that will need to be completed signed and returned to the BBB along with pro
10. 45 mph 72 km h 50 mph 80 kmn In order to prevent the engine from running at too low an RPM which may cause it to stall the SST will still automatically make some downshifts if it has determined that you have not downshifted in time Although the SST will make some downshifts for you it will still allow you to downshift at any time as long as the SST determines that the engine will not be damaged from over revving The SST will not automatically upshift even if the engine is approaching the RPM limit It must be shifted manually by pressing the button Engine damage may occur if excessive engine revving is held without shifting 176 Transmission PRS Progressive Range Selection With the gearshift lever in D Drive press the button to active PRS The available and selected gears will be indicated on the instrument cluster All available gears will be displayed with the current gear indicated Press the button again to lock out gears beginning with the highest gear Example press the button twice to lock out 6th and 5th gears Only the available gears will be displayed and the transmission will automatically shift between the available gears Press the button to unlock gears to allow the transmission to shift to higher gears The transmission will shift automatically within the gear range you select Automatic Transmission Adaptive Learning This feature is designed to increase durability and provide
11. In order to playback video from your iPod or iPhone if compatible you MUST have a special combination USB RCA composite video cable which you can buy from Apple When the cable is connected to your iPod or iPhone plug the other end into both the RCA jacks and the USB port MyLincoln Touch 377 Bluetooth Audio Your system allows you to stream audio over your vehicle s speakers from your connected Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To access press the lower left corner on the touchscreen then J select the BT Stereo tab Bluetooth Audio Voice Commands EM If you are listening to a Bluetooth audio device press the voice us button on the steering wheel control When prompted say Next song Pause Play or Previous song If you are not listening to a Bluetooth audio device press the voice button and after the tone say Bluetooth Audio then Next song Pause Play or Previous song Line In Auxiliary Input Jack WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any hand held device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws tha
12. Never place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible WARNING Depending on where you secure a child restraint and depending on the child restraint design you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies or LATCH lower anchors rendering those features potentially unusable To avoid risk of injury occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained When installing a child safety seat with combination lap shoulder belts e Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position e nsert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle 20 Child Safety e Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat with the tongue between the child seat and the release button to prevent accidental unbuckling e Place the vehicle seat upon which the child seat will be installed in the upright position e Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode See Step 5 This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with
13. Note This feature may not function properly if you have enabled caller ID blocking on your mobile phone Before running a report review the Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice Note In order to allow a break in period for your vehicle you may not be able to create a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle odometer has reached 200 miles Note Cellular phone and SMS charges may apply when making a report Register for Vehicle Health Report and set your report preferences at www SYNCMyRide com After registering you can request a Vehicle Health Report inside your vehicle Return to your account at www SYNCMyRide com to view your report You can also choose for SYNC to remind you automatically to run reports at specific mileage intervals Cellular phone airtime usage may apply when reporting MyLincoln Touch 397 The system allows you to check your vehicle s overall health in the form of a diagnostic report card The Vehicle Health Report contains valuable information such as e Vehicle Diagnostic Information Scheduled maintenance Open Recalls and Field Service Actions Items noted during vehicle inspections by your authorized dealer that still need servicing Making a Report If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation touch the i Information button to access these features If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation touch the corner of the touchscreen with the green tab If you want to run a rep
14. Off Road Status Pitch Roll Wheel Angle Settings In this mode you can configure different driver setting choices Note Some items are optional and may not appear Settings Blindspot check enabled or uncheck disabled Cross Traffic Alert check enabled or uncheck disabled Driver Select Sport Normal or Comfort Suspension DTE Normal or Towing Front Park Aid check enabled or uncheck disabled Rear Park Aid check enabled or uncheck disabled 110 Information Displays Settings Easy Entry Exit check enabled or uncheck disabled Lighting Autolamp Delay Locks Autolock check enabled or uncheck disabled Autounlock check enabled or uncheck disabled Remote Unlock All Doors or Driver Oil Life Remaining Life XXX Hold OK to reset Vehicle Power Liftgate Enable or Disable switch Pwr Running Auto Off or Out Boards Climate Control Auto or Last Setting Auto or Off Remote St rt 5 10 or 15 minutes System check enabled or uncheck disabled Courtesy Wipe check enabled or uncheck disabled Rain Sensing check enabled or uncheck disabled Number of Admin Keys MyKeys and MyKey Status MyKey Mileage Traction Control Max Speed 65 MPH 105 km h 70 MPH 110 km h 75 MPH 120 km h 80 MPH 130 km h or Off Speed Minder 45 mph 72 km h 55 mph 89 km h 65 mph 105 km h or Off Temperature Fahrenheit or Celsius Some MyKey items will only appear if a MyKey is set Advanc
15. Roadside Emergencies 239 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The hazard flasher control is located on the instrument panel A by the radio Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists e Press the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will flash e Press the flasher control again to turn them off Note With extended use the flashers may run down your 12 volt battery FUEL SHUTOFF WARNING Failure to inspect and if necessary repair fuel leaks after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious injury Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected by an authorized dealer after any collision In the event of a moderate to severe collision this vehicle includes a fuel pump shut off feature that stops the flow of fuel to the engine Not every impact will cause a shut off Should your vehicle shut off after a collision you may restart your vehicle by doing the following 1 Switch off the ignition 2 Switch on the ignition 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to re enable the fuel pump For vehicles equipped with a push button start system 1 Press the START STOP button to switch off the ignition 2 Press the brake pedal and press the START STOP button to start the vehicle 3 Remove your foot from the brake pedal and press the START STOP button to switch off the ignition 4 You can either attempt to start the engine by pressing the brake pedal
16. When you are viewing more information for hotels cityseekr also tells you if the hotel has certain services and facilities using icons Hotel services and facilities e Restaurant amp 24 Hr Room Service amp Business Center i Fitness Center amp Handicap Facilities e Internet Access Laundry ei Pool E Refrigerator Wi Fi For restaurants cityseekr can provide information such as star rating average cost review handicap access hours of operation and website address For hotels cityseekr can provide information such as star rating price category review check in and check out times hotel service icons and website address Setting Your Navigation Preferences Select settings for the system to take into account when planning your route Press the Settings icon gt Settings gt Navigation Map Preferences Breadcrumbs displays your vehicle s previously traveled route with white dots Turn this feature ON or OFF Turn List Format allows you to choose to have the system display your turn list Top to Bottom or Bottom to Top 418 MyLincoln Touch Parking POI Notification sets the automatic parking points of interest notification Turn this feature ON or OFF When parking points of interest notification is on the icons display on the map when you get close to your destination This may not be very useful in dense areas and may clutter the map when other points of interest display Route
17. MFD t BY F FORD MC MOTOR CC Q DATE xx xx n nr T AUR er PNBE AR p KG o001 B XXXX WITIVAVEC TtS PNEUS XXXX XOOXXX XXXX XXXXX XXXXXX AT A kPa PSI LPC oxx xx VIN 2000000000000000 TYPE 004 COMPLIES000 500x xxx ELIT ll yis TW PS TR T AXLE mi SPR X XX X XXXX XXX P QUOODOUODUDE XXX OO00X000000CXX RIMS TANTES XXxXXX COLD A FROID Xxx xx JUMELEES E WARNING Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance engine transmission and or structural damage serious damage to the vehicle loss of control and personal injury 216 Load Carrying GCW Gross Combined Weight is the weight of the loaded vehicle GVW plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer including all cargo and passengers that the vehicle can handle without risking damage Important The towing vehicle s braking system is rated for operation at GVWR not at GCWR Separate functional brakes should be used for safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle The GCW must never exceed the GCWR Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight is the highest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow
18. Park on a level surface set the parking brake and activate the hazard flashers Place the transmission in park P and turn the engine off Location of the Spare Tire and Tools The spare tire and tools for your vehicle are stowed in the following locations Under the vehicle just forward of the rear bumper Jack tools Under the access panel located in the floor compartment behind the rear seat Removing the Jack and Tools 1 Open the liftgate then locate the nes access panel on the floor behind the third row seat Unlatch and remove TM the panel SS 2 Remove the jack and tools assembly tray from the compartment by turning the wing nut counterclockwise Remove the bag from the jack and tool assembly tray by loosening the strap Wheels and Tires 319 Note Pay close attention to the orientation of the bag because it will have to be reinstalled after changing the tire 3 Unsnap the wheel lug nut wrench jack extension and handle from the plastic tray 4 Remove the jack from the tray assembly Removing the Spare Tire lt a 1 Remove the jack handle and winch extension from the tray and assemble them 2 Open the spare tire winch access plug in the bottom of the compartment for the jack and tools tray 3 Insert the winch extension tool assembly through the access hole in the floor and engage the winch 4 To remove the spare tire turn the handle counterclockwise until the tire is lower
19. Press the heated seat symbol to cycle through the various heat settings and off Warmer settings are indicated by more indicator lights Cooled Seats The cooled seats will only function when the engine is running To operate the cooled seats A C Press the cooled seat symbol to cycle through the various cooling settings and off Cooler settings are indicated by more indicator lights If the engine falls below 350 RPM while the cooled seats are on the feature will turn itself off You will need to reactivate it 136 Seats Climate Controlled Seats Air Filter Replacement If Equipped The climate controlled seat system includes air filters You must replace them periodically See scheduled maintenance information for more information There is a filter located under each front seat You can access the filter from the second row seat Move the front seats all the way forward and up to ease access To remove a filter 1 Remove the key from the ignition 2 Press up on the outside rigid edge of the filter and rotate counterclockwise once the tabs are released 3 Remove the filter 1 First position the filter in its housing making sure that the far forward end is all the way up in the housing 2 Then push in on the center of the outside edge of the filter and rotate up into the housing until it clips into position Seats 137 REAR SEATS Folding Down the Second Row 40 Seat System A WARNING
20. can easily exceed the price of your Lincoln Extended Service Plan With Lincoln ESP you minimize your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs Up to 1000 Covered Vehicle Components There are four Extended Service Plans with different levels of coverage Ask your authorized dealer for details 1 PremiumCARE Our most comprehensive coverage With over 1000 covered components this plan is so complete that we generally only discuss what s not covered 2 ExtraCARE Covers 113 components and includes many high tech items 3 BaseCARE Covers 84 components 4 PowertrainCARE Covers 29 critical components Lincoln Extended Service Plan is honored by all authorized Lincoln and Ford dealers in the U S and Canada It is the only extended service plan authorized and backed by Lincoln Motor Company That means you get e Reliable quality service at any Lincoln or Ford dealership e Repairs performed by factory trained technicians using genuine parts Rental Car Reimbursement 1st Day Rental Benefit You take advantage of replacement transportation if your vehicle is at your authorized dealer for same day covered repairs Extended Rental Benefits If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs you are eligible for rental car coverage including bumper to bumper warranty repairs and Field Service Actions 334 Extended Service Plan Roadside Assistance Exclusive 24 7 roadside assistance inc
21. combination lap and shoulder belts Note Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat 1 Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together Child Safety 21 3 While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted 4 nsert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it b To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is pulled out Note The automatic locking mode is available on the front passenger and rear seats This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip 6 Allow the belt to retract to remove slack The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode 7 Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode you should not be able to pull more belt out If the retractor is not locked unbuckle t
22. uonevogroods pIo SNOILIVOIJIO3dS 1VOINHO3 L 325 1898 TeS eee TT JOje8IAEN ue ron CI0 90D eS 086 TH piepuejg i5 merma c ZV 9TASN ASM ym ojemuoouor Q 8 C 07 TOUSEA PLOMUSPULM PRMDRSESENIS DINE Jeqsen proniput t UNTU LIION o NT NOONAN wn 5 epeueg AT NOONAN eee D GIAT OTALXO 10 Xe191030 K Q CSM ONIO 0L LX THs SA POUM Od si CILBESD 381 91 PESE H 99TOZIN dSa Ald GI TX aseg J9jsueJ 3J 134030 X ay UC JUS IUA D UA Aq oou MOA o V GPGOZIN SSAN aqny 199r prod y a s KE your G16 o TO S8MGLAX SB MGL AVS YEDI uns ping orxe 1vogy Q VIGIDGW dSM 9qTory 109g ummuoiq anaes GA Po INO TO O6MOS AX 06 08 AVS YeI ping ojxe quo NT NOONAN epeueg AT NOOUGIN TF D 3b VET op PMY CIAT 0T4LXO 10 3je191010 N 0839 UOISSTUISUI 2reurojny CSN ON1O 0T4LX uorjeogioods pIo Capacities and Specifications 326 egeurep uorsstursuer osneo ABUL prng popueuruioood y Uey Joyo ping Aue JO BSP TeAI9 ur 92IAIes 221100 JY euruuojep 0 WOUDWLOf UL aowouaquyw Paynpayos 0 Jejoy PMY AT NOOUAIN sn Aquo pmoys AT NOOISIIA 9xImbo1 yey Suorssmusue oreuroqny AjueireA PO INOA Aq pa19400 30u ST Jey ogeurep sUIsUS 0 pes pjnoo pue Axessooouun ore L L SUSU INOA UT seAnpppe po eurgue ejueure ddns sn you oq OVS ID 9e eAouddy pue uoneziprepuejg jueormqnr peuoreuroqu oY JO sprepuejs ooueurioj1od urouooo peny pue urojs s uorssrure SUSU JUALIN 0 SULIOJUOD x1epy uoneog
23. If Equipped USING FOUR WHEEL DRIVE 4WD if equipped WARNING For important information regarding safe operation of this type of vehicle see General Information in the Wheels and Tires chapter Note Do not use 4X4 mode on dry hard surfaced roads Doing so will produce excessive noise increase tire wear and may damage drive components 4X4 mode is only intended for consistently slippery or loose surfaces Your 4x4 features the heavy duty Control Trac 4WD system which includes a computer operated transfer case This unique system is interactive with the road continually monitoring and adjusting torque delivery to the front and rear wheels to optimize vehicle control 4WD Indicator Lights The indicator lights illuminate in the message center in the reconfigurable telltale RTT location under the following conditions Refer to Warning Lamps and Indicators in the Instrument Cluster chapter Note When a 4X4 system fault is present the system will typically remain in whichever 4X4 mode was selected prior to the fault condition occurring It will not default to 4X2 in all circumstances When this warning is displayed have your vehicle serviced by an authorized dealer DP 4X2 Momentarily illuminates when 2H is selected ETA 4X4 AUTO Continuously illuminates when 4A is selected a 4X4 Continuously illuminates when 4H is selected CHECK 4X4 Displays when a 4X4 fault is present Four Wheel Drive If Equipped 179
24. If you want to have only one real key as a MyKey or do not want to have any MyKeys then you need to use your remote start to clear all MyKeys In that case follow these steps e Enter the vehicle and close all doors e Remote start the vehicle using your remote start fob e See Clearing All MyKeys Follow Steps 1 3 After clearing your MyKeys you can create a new MyKey See Creating a MyKey 64 MyKey Vehicles With Non Ford approved Aftermarket Remote Start Systems MyKey is not compatible with non Ford approved aftermarket remote start systems If you choose to install a remote start system please see a Ford authorized dealer for a Ford approved system The following information may help customers who choose to install a non Ford approved remote start system The actions provided below do not make MyKey compatible with non Ford approved remote start systems but may help you retain some MyKey functions When using a non Ford approved remote start system the vehicle may recognize the remote start system as an additional admin key with its associated privileges If you restart the vehicle by inserting a key into the ignition cylinder and recycling the ignition completely then you may retain some MyKey functions This action forces your vehicle to read the traditional key instead of the remote start fob and then uses the key s associated privileges Note The MyKey system status menu display may include the remote start syste
25. Off Rotate and hold the control to either the top or bottom position to activate the rear washer The control will return to the 2 or 0 position when you release it Lighting 87 LIGHTING CONTROL A Off B Parking lamps instrument panel lamps license plate lamps and rear lamps C Headlamps High Beams Headlamp Flasher e Push the lever toward the instrument panel to switch on the high beams e Pull the lever toward you to switch of the high beams Pull the lever toward you slightly and release it to flash the headlamps 88 Lighting AUTOLAMPS WARNING The daytime running lamps system does not activate the rear lamps and may not provide adequate lighting during low visibility driving conditions Also the autolamps switch position may not activate the headlamps in all low visibility conditions such as daytime fog Always ensure that your headlamps are switched to auto or on as appropriate during all low visibility conditions Failure to do so may result in a collision When the lighting control is in the autolamps position the headlamps will automatically turn on in low light situations or when wipers are activated The headlamps remain on for a period of time after you switch the ignition off Use the information display controls to adjust the period of time that the headlamps remain on Note If your vehicle is equipped with autolamps A it will have the windshield wiper activ
26. Park Brake Engaged Displays when the parking brake is set the vehicle is in ready to drive and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph 5 km h If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible not completely closed Liftgate Ajar Displays when the luggage compartment is not completely closed Factory Keypad Code XXXXX Displays the factory keypad code after the keypad has been reset 114 Information Displays Engine Messages Action Description Power Reduced To Lower Engine Displays when the engine has Temp reduced power to help reduce high engine temperature Engine On Informs you that you are exiting your vehicle and the engine is on Fuel Messages Action Description Check Fuel Fill Inlet Displays when the fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed Fuel Level LOW Displays as an early reminder of a low fuel condition Keys and Intelligent Access Naiioareccrioricn Messages No Key Detected Displayed if the intelligent access key is not detected by the system in the following three scenarios eWhen the start stop button is pressed in an attempt to either start the engine or cycle through the ignition states eWhen the engine is running and a door is opened then closed e When the vehicle s speed exceeds 10 mph 16 km h for the first time after starting Key Programmed x Keys Total Displayed during spare key programming when an intelligent a
27. The remote control and instrument panel button still operates the liftgate regardless of the setting Opening and Closing the Power Liftgate Note You can reverse the liftgate movement direction with a second press of the instrument panel button or the button on the liftgate or a second double press of the transmitter button The liftgate only operates with the vehicle in P Three tones sound as the liftgate begins to power close A single tone indicates a problem with the close request caused by any of the following e The ignition is on and the transmission is not in P e The battery voltage is below the minimum operating voltage 72 Locks e The vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph 5 km h If the liftgate reverses and starts to close after an open request a fast continuous tone indicates excessive load on the gate or a possible strut failure Have the system checked by an authorized dealer if you still have a fast tone after removing the load To open or close from the instrument panel Press the CURE instrument panel liftgate button 9 ZB To open or close with the remote control Press the remote X control liftgate decklid button twice within three seconds To open with the liftgate control button in the liftgate handle 1 Unlock the doors using either the remote control or power door unlock button 2 Press the control button A located on the inside of the liftgate pull handle Note Allow the power sy
28. Tire and Wheel Assembly Information under Changing a Road Wheel in this chapter Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label 6 Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak 7 Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges cuts or bulges Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve Stems Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and remove objects such as stones nails or glass that may be wedged in the tread grooves Check the tire and valve stems for holes cracks or cuts that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace the valve stem Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking cuts bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear If internal damage to the tire is suspected have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced For your safety tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely to blow out or fail Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally Inspect all your tires including the spare frequently and replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist Tire Wear When the tread is worn down to 1 16th of an inch 2 millimeters tires must be replaced to help prevent your vehicle from skiddi
29. and the START STOP button or switch on the ignition only by pressing the START STOP button without pressing the brake pedal Both ways re enable the fuel system 240 Roadside Emergencies Note When you try to restart your vehicle after a fuel shutoff the vehicle makes sure that various systems are safe to restart Once your vehicle determines that the systems are safe then the vehicle will allow you to restart Note In the event that your vehicle does not restart after your third attempt contact an authorized dealer JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE WARNING The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames sparks or lit cigarettes An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage WARNING Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin eyes and clothing if contacted Do not attempt to push start your automatic transmission vehicle Automatic transmissions do not have push start capability Attempting to push start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause transmission damage When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy As a result the transmission may exhibit a combination of firm and soft shifts This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission Over time the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation Preparing Your Vehicle Note Use only
30. e Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin If fuel is splashed on the skin or clothing promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism Breathing gasoline vapors or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction In sensitive individuals serious personal injury or sickness may result If fuel is splashed on the skin promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction FUEL QUALITY Note Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause powertrain damage and a loss of vehicle performance repairs may not be covered under warranty Choosing the Right Fuel Gasoline Vehicles Use only UNLEADED gasoline or UNLEADED gasoline blended with a maximum of 15 ethanol in your gasoline vehicle If your vehicle is a Flex Fuel Vehicle FFV it will have a yellow bezel placed over the fuel fill inlet Do not use e Fuels containing more than 1596 ethanol or E 85 fuel e Fuels containing methanol e Fuels containing metallic based additives including manganese based compounds 164 Fuel and Refueling e Fuels containing the octane booster additive methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT e Leaded fuel The use
31. ignition on and start the engine Note When locking your vehicle any remote controls left inside the vehicle may become disabled A message may appear in the information display indicating that there is no key detected if you try to start the engine Press the unlock button on the remote control to enable it and then start the engine Starting and Stopping the Engine 157 Ignition Modes ENGINE START STOP Off Turns the ignition off e Without applying the brake pedal press and release the button once when the ignition is in the on mode or when the engine is running but the vehicle is not in motion Accessory Allows some electrical accessories to operate while the engine is not running e Without applying the brake pedal press and release the button twice On All electrical circuits are operational Warning lamps and indicators are illuminated e Without applying the brake pedal press and release the button once from accessory mode e Without applying the brake pedal press and release the button twice from off mode Start Starts the engine e Press the brake pedal and then press the button for any length of time An indicator light on the button illuminates when then ignition is on and when the engine starts STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE When you start the engine the idle speed increases this helps to warm up the engine If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically have your vehicle chec
32. is activated 2 To increase descent speed press the accelerator pedal until the desired speed is reached To decrease descent speed press the brake pedal until the desired speed is reached Whether accelerating or decelerating once the desired descent speed is reached remove your feet from the pedals and the chosen vehicle speed will be maintained 194 Terrain Response Note Noise from the ABS pump motor may be observed during hill descent control operation This is a normal characteristic of the ABS and should be no reason for concern Hill descent modes At speeds below 20 mph 32 km h When the HDC button is pressed and HDC is active HILL DESCENT CONTROL ACTIVE will appear in the message center for several seconds At speeds below 20 mph 32 km h When the HDC button is pressed and conditions are not correct for hill descent activation the HDC system will be enabled the light on the button will be on solid and HILL DESCENT CONTROL READY will be displayed in the message center for several seconds At speeds above 20 mph 32 km h When the HDC button is pressed the HDC system will be enabled the light on the button will be illuminated and FOR HILL CNTRL 20 MPH OR LESS will be displayed in the message center for several seconds For HDC to enable the vehicle must be in a drive gear or R Reverse If the vehicle is in P Park or N Neutral and the HDC button is pressed FOR HILL CNTRL SELECT GEAR will be displa
33. mat eyelet over the retention post and press down to lock in position To remove the floor mat reverse the installation procedure Roadside Emergencies 237 ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Vehicles Sold in the United States Getting Roadside Assistance If you ever need help on the road the Lincoln Motor Company is there for you with nationwide 24 hours a day seven days a week assistance The service is available e Throughout the life of the vehicle for original owners e For six years or 70000 miles 112655 kilometers whichever comes first within the extended powertrain warranty coverage period for subsequent owners e For the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card included in your Owner s Manual portfolio This complimentary Roadside Assistance program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty and includes e A flat tire change with a good spare except vehicles supplied with a tire inflation kit Battery jump start e Lock out assistance key replacement cost is the customer s responsibility e Fuel delivery independent service contractors if not prohibited by state local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2 0 gallons 7 5 liters of gasoline or 5 0 gallons 18 9 liters of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle Roadside Assistance limits fuel delivery service to two no charge occurrences within a 12 month period e Winch out available within 100 feet 80 5 meters of a paved or
34. or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash WARNING Do not use accessory seat covers The use of accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident WARNING Do not lean your head on the door The side airbag could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag as you could be seriously injured or killed Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 48 Supplementary Restraints System WARNING If the side airbag has deployed the airbag will not function again The side airbag system including the seat must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer If the airbag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash The side airbags are located on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the front seats In certain sideways crashes the airbag on the side affected by the crash will be inflated The airbag was designed to inflate between the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided occupants in side impact crashes The system consists of the following e A label or embossed side panel indicating that side airbags are found on
35. properly wear your safety belt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death WARNING To reduce risk of injury do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the curtain airbag WARNING If the curtain airbags have deployed the curtain airbags will not function again The curtain airbags including the A B and C pillar trim and headliner must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer If the curtain airbag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash 50 Supplementary Restraints System The Safety Canopy will deploy during significant side crashes or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor The Safety Canopy is mounted to the roof side rail sheet metal behind the headliner above each row of seats In certain sideways crashes or rollover events the Safety Canopy will be activated regardless of which seats are occupied The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate between the side window area and occupants to further enhance protection provided in side impact crashes and rollover events The system consists of e Safety canopy curtain airbags located above the trim panels over the front and rear side windows identified by wording on the B pillar trim e A flexible headliner which opens above the side doors to allow air curtain deployment e Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator See Crash Sensor
36. the door latch post or the res A edge of the door near the door latch mx XX XX OX XX X XX XX iver i iti n NE GN next to the driver s seating position MED BY FORD MOTOR CO You can find a transmission code on GVWR XXXX KG XXXX LB the Safety Compliance Certification XexKeDoxu we nox wm Label The following table tells you poro E d WS which transmission each code AT XXXX kPa XXX PSICOLD AT XXXX kPa XXX Psi COLD represents THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE n Mi ene pg Ig AUI XXXXX MER TO ERIS PIR TPR s X XX XX X X POX PXXXX XX 000000000000 f 9 XXXX XXXXXXX XX Description Code Six speed automatic 6R80 6 Accessories 331 ACCESSORIES For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for your vehicle please contact an authorized dealer or visit our online store at www Accessories Lincoln com United States only Lincoln Motor Company will repair or replace any properly authorized dealer installed Lincoln Genuine Accessory found to be defective in factory supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period as well as any component damaged by the defective accessories Lincoln Motor Company will warrant your accessory through the warranty that provides the greatest benefit e 24 months unlimited mileage e The remainder of y
37. to hear a list of possible voice commands 356 MyLincoln Touch Helpful Hints e Make sure the interior of your vehicle is as quiet as possible Wind noise from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system from correctly recognizing spoken commands e After pressing the voice icon wait until after the tone sounds and Listening appears before saying a command Any command spoken prior to this does not register with the system e Speak naturally without long pauses between words e At any time you can interrupt the system while it is speaking by pressing the voice icon Accessing a List of Available Commands e f you use the touchscreen press the Settings icon Help Voice Command List e If you use the steering wheel control press the voice icon After the tone speak your command clearly USB list of commands This command is only available when your vehicle is equipped with the navigation system and the navigation system SD card is in the card slot This command is only available when you have an active Sirius satellite radio subscription MyLincoln Touch 357 Voice Settings Voice settings allow you to customize the level of system interaction help and feedback The system defaults to standard interaction that uses candidate lists and confirmation prompts as these provide the highest level of guidance and feedback Interaction Mode Novice mode provides detailed interaction and
38. uese 152 Roadside assistance 237 Power steering MERE 209 Roll stability control 191 fluid checking and Roof tack 211 adding ose reir n EDO REAE 269 COS TOUS aep a dude fluid refill capacity 324 Route preferences 417 Index 467 S Sending new text messages 383 Safety Belt Maintenance 42 Setting a destination 414 Safety belts Setting a destination by see Safety restraints NITORE 36 voice SACO mes sae Ease spi S CR EE oe rS E 414 Safety defects reporting 250 Settings ossi ere 398 Safety information 351 Setting the clock 398 Safety restraints 36 37 39 Side air curtain 49 Belt Minder 40 a extension assembly 38 Side curtain airbags system 49 for adults sees 36 37 SIRIUS satellite radio 366 Tor CHIUGTEN uten 19 safety belt maintenance 42 ee ia radio yoice 368 seat belt maintenance ennaa 42 COMMMANGS 5 eite ierit ots warning light and chime 40 SIRIUS Travel Link 390 Safety restraints SIRIUS Travel Link voice LATCH anchors nsss 23 COMMANGS arenen 391 Safety seats for children 19 Snowplowing eeeeees 15 Safety Compliance SOS Post h Alert 45 Certification Label
39. vehicle is moving This may result in sudden seat movement causing loss of control of your vehicle The control is located on the outboard side of the seat Move the switch in the direction of the arrow to raise or lower the seat cushion or to move the seat forward backward up or down Power Recline ru 1a Move the switch to recline the seatback forward or rearward Note On vehicles with memory seats to prevent damage to the seat the power seats are designed to set a stopping position just short of the end of the seat track If the seat encounters an object while moving forward or backward a new stopping position will be set To reset the seat to its normal stopping position 1 After encountering the new stopping position press the power seat control again to override 2 Continue pressing the control until it reaches the end of the seat track 3 Continue pressing the control for about two seconds You will feel the seat bounce back slightly Seats 133 Power Lumbar ss 9 The control is located on the outboard side of the seat Press the forward or rearward side of the control for more or less support MEMORY FUNCTION This feature will save and recall the positions of the driver seat power mirrors adjustable pedals and steering column The memory seat control is located on left side of the driver seat Programming Memory Positions 1 Turn the ignition on 2 To program pos
40. 2 and FM AST SIRIUS CD USB Touch this button to scroll down for more options such as SD Card BT Stereo A V In These buttons change with the media mode you are in Radio memory presets and CD controls Teesi Note Some features may not be available in your area Contact an authorized dealer for more information You can access these options using the touchscreen or voice commands MyLincoln Touch 359 Browsing Device Content When listening to audio on a device you can browse through other devices without having to change sources For example if you are currently listening to audio on an SD card you can browse all the artists that are stored on your USB device Press the voice icon on the steering wheel When prompted i you can say Browse Sirius channel guide Browse SD card Browse USB If you have said Browse you can then say any commands in the following chart This command is only usable if you have an active subscription to Sirius satellite radio BROWSE Sirius category channels Li SD card Sirius channel guide USB This command is only usable if you have an active subscription to Sirius satellite radio For more commands in SD card or USB mode see the SD card and USB Port section of this chapter For a complete list of Browse voice commands see USB and SD card voice commands and Bluetooth audio v
41. 4WD switch positions WARNING Utility and four wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles Note The AdvanceTrac with RSC stability enhancement system can be turned off manually by pressing the AdvanceTrac button see the Traction Control chapter for more information This will disable the engine management feature allowing the vehicle to maintain full power and enhanced momentum through the obstacle Note The Control Trac selector switch should not be changed while the rear wheels are slipping The Control Trac system functions in i Au ae four modes a e 2H 4X2 delivers power to the rear wheels only The message center will momentarily display 4x2 when this mode is selected This mode is appropriate for normal on road driving on dry pavement and provides the best fuel economy 4A 4X4 AUTO provides electronic control four wheel drive with power delivered to all four wheels as required for increased traction The message center will display 4A when this mode is selected This mode is appropriate for all on road driving conditions such as dry road surfaces wet pavement snow or gravel e 4H 4X4 provides electronically locked four wheel drive power to front and rear wheels The message center will display
42. 4X4 when this mode is selected This mode is not recommended for use on dry pavement This mode is only intended for severe winter or off road conditions such as deep snow ice or shallow sand Shifting between system modes Note Do not perform these operations if the rear wheels are slipping Note Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages Press any button 4X2 4X4 AUTO or 4X4 at a stop or while driving The message center may display a message indicating a 4X4 shift is in progress Once the shift is complete the message center will then display the system mode selected 180 Four Wheel Drive If Equipped How Your Vehicle Differs From Other Vehicles WARNING Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and four wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity Utility and four wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions Avoid sharp turns excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles Your vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without getting hung up or damaging underbody components The differe
43. A Closer B Farther The Horizontal Control A Farther B Closer A B Both horizontal and vertical controls operate the same way 1 Press and hold A to move the pedals away from you 2 Press and hold B to move the pedals closer to you You can save and recall the pedal positions with the memory feature if equipped Refer to the Seats chapter Wipers and Washers 85 WINDSHIELD WIPERS Note Fully defrost the windshield before turning on the windshield wipers Note Make sure the windshield wipers are turned off before entering a car wash Note Clean the windshield and wiper blades if they begin to leave streaks or smears If that does not resolve the issue install new wiper blades Note Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield This may scratch the glass damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to bun out Always use the windshield washers before wiping a dry windshield Rotate the end of the control e away from you to increase the wiper speed e toward you to decrease the wiper speed Speed Dependent Wipers When your vehicle speed increases the interval between wipes will decrease when intermittent wipe is selected RAIN SENSING WIPERS Note Wet road conditions may result in inconsistent or unexpected wiping or smearing Lower the sensitivity switch to normal or high speed wiping or turn the wipers off to reduce smearing Note Turn off the wipers before enter
44. For your particular global region your vehicle may be equipped with features and options that are different from the features and options that are described in this owner s manual A market unique supplement may be supplied that complements this book By referring to the market unique supplement if provided you can properly identify those features recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle This owner s manual is written primarily for the U S and Canadian Markets Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built for Export See this owner s manual for all other required information and warnings Child Safety 17 GENERAL INFORMATION See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children WARNING Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their height age and weight Child safety restraints must be bought separately from your vehicle Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child WARNING All children are shaped differently The recommendations for safety restraints are based on probable child height age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety organizations or are the minimum requirements of law Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST and consulting your pediatricia
45. MYKEY WITH REMOTE START SYSTEMS MyKey is not compatible with non Ford approved aftermarket remote start systems If you choose to install a remote start system please see your Ford authorized dealer for a Ford approved remote start system Vehicles With Ford approved Aftermarket Remote Start Systems When using a Ford approved aftermarket remote start system the vehicle recognizes the remote start system as an additional admin key It is the vehicle s default setting You can also program the remote start as a MyKey As a result the MyKey system status menu display includes the remote start system as an additional key in the total count of MYKEY S PROGRAMMED or ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED See Checking MyKey System Status When you start your vehicle with a Ford approved aftermarket remote start system the system stalls the vehicle after you open the door or shift the vehicle into gear This is intentional When you restart your vehicle it reads your real key s status instead of the remote start system s status As an added precaution owners may want to program the remote start system as a MyKey if the MyKey driver uses the remote start fob That way when the MyKey driver starts the vehicle with the remote start system the MyKey restrictions remain active With a Ford approved aftermarket remote start system it is possible to program all real keys as MyKeys unintentionally If this happens then the remote start fob is the admin key
46. Memory Presets Save a station by pressing and holding one of the memory preset areas There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station Sound returns when finished HD Radio Touch this button to turn HD Radio on The light on the button illuminates when the feature is on HD Radio allows you to receive radio broadcasts digitally where available providing free crystal clear sound See HD Radio information later in this chapter MyLincoln Touch 361 Scan Touch this button to go to the next strong AM or FM radio station The light on the button illuminates when the feature is on Options Sound Settings allows you to adjust settings for Bass Midrange Treble Balance and Fade DSP Digital Signal Processing Occupancy Mode Speed Compensated Volume Note Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings Set PTY for Seek Scan allows you to select a category of music you would like to search for You can then choose to either seek or scan for the stations playing that category RDS Text Display allows you to view the information broadcast by FM stations AST allows you to have the system automatically store the six strongest stations in your current location TAG Button is available when HD Radio is on and allows you to tag a song to download later When you select On TAG appears on screen when HD Radio is active You can touch TAG to save the information of the song that is playing When you plug in you
47. MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Scheduled Maintenance 455 SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS If you operate your vehicle primarily in any of the following conditions you need to perform additional maintenance as indicated If you occasionally operate your vehicle under any of these conditions it is not necessary to perform the additional maintenance For specific recommendations see your dealership service advisor or technician Perform the services shown in the following tables when specified or within 3000 miles 4800 kilometers of the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message appearing in the information display Example 1 The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message comes on at 28751 miles 46270 kilometers perform the 30000 mile 48000 kilometer automatic transmission fluid replacement Example 2 The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message has not come on but the odometer reads 30000 miles 48000 kilometers perform the engine air filter replacement i e Intelligent Oil Life Monitor was reset at 25000 miles 40000 kilometers Towing a trailer or using a camper or car top carrier As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart Inspect frequently Insp
48. Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably e Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts it is very important that they continue to sit properly Properly seated occupants sit upright lean against the seat back and center themselves on the seat cushion with their feet comfortably extended on the floor Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event For example if an occupant slouches lies down turns sideways sits forward leans forward or sideways or puts one or both feet up the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased Supplementary Restraints System 47 Children and Airbags WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat Never place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back Children must always be properly restrained Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of injury in a crash SIDE AIRBAGS WARNING Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front seats
49. Music lt 4 kdo sc kG er CRI ROG OR RU ow Po eh eie 358 Phonefeatures 22s eee ene 379 Information M n se eaei a saapad a aae eee eee 386 DEINES acus s be musk a ee Ged A Sea v UP RH LEY ORO A I AR ues 398 Climate features ug voee deeds ew aah ey 410 Navigation System s p yrna e v ue bee eR Re ee ee ES 414 8 Table of Contents Appendices 425 Scheduled Maintenance 444 Normal scheduled maintenance andlog llis 449 Index 462 The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print In the interest of continuous development we reserve the right to change specifications design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation No part of this publication may be reproduced transmitted stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission Errors and omissions excepted O Ford Motor Company 2014 Introduction 9 ABOUT THIS MANUAL Thank you for choosing Ford We recommend that you take some time to get to know your vehicle by reading this manual The more that you know about it the greater the safety and pleasure you will get from driving it WARNING Always drive with due care and attention when using and operating the controls and features on your vehicle Note This manual describes product features and options available throughout the range of available models sometimes even before they are
50. Note Do not use any irregularly shaped discs or discs with a scratch protection film attached Always handle discs by their edges only Clean the disc with an approved CD cleaner only Wipe it from the center of the disc toward the edge Do not clean in a circular motion Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods Audio System 337 MP3 Track and Folder Structure Audio systems capable of recognizing and playing MP3 individual tracks and folder structures work as follows e There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback MP3 track mode system default and MP3 folder mode e MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc The player numbers each MP3 track on the disc noted by the mp3 file extension from T001 to a maximum of T255 Note The maximum number of playable MP3 files may be less depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio present e MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level of folders The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc noted by the mp3 file extension and all folders containing MP3 files from F001 folder T001 track to F253 T255 e Creating discs with only one level of folders helps with navigation through the disc files If you are burning your own MP3 discs it is important to understand how the system reads the structures you create While various files may be present files with extensions other than m
51. Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaustion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the seat heater The seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion because this may cause the seat heater to overheat Do not puncture the seat with pins needles or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element which may cause the seat heater to overheat An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury Note Do not do the following e Place heavy objects on the seat e Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat Allow the seat to dry thoroughly The rear seat heat controls are located on the rear of the center console The heated seats only operate when the ignition is on To operate the heated seats Press the heated seat button to cycle through the various heat settings and off Warmer settings are indicated by more indicator lights Third Row Seats Make sure that no objects are on the floor in front of the third row seats or on the seat cushion before lowering them Make sure that the head restraints are lowered and the second row seats are not reclined Seats 145 Folding Down the Third Row Seats to the Load
52. Preferences Preferred Route allows you to choose to have the system display the Shortest Fastest or most Ecological route first If you set Always Use Preferred Route to Yes the system uses the selected route type to calculate only one route to the desired destination Always Use Preferred Route bypasses route selection in destination programming The system only calculates one route based on the preferred route setting Eco Time Penalty allows you to select a low medium or high cost for the calculated Eco Route The higher the setting the longer the time allotment is for the route Avoid features allows you to choose to have the system avoid freeways toll roads ferries and car trains when planning your route Turn these features ON or OFF Use HOV Lanes allows you to choose to have the system use high occupancy vehicle lanes if available when planning your route Navigation Preferences Guidance Prompts allows you to choose to have the system use Voice amp Tones or Tone Only on your programmed route Auto Fill State Province allows you have the system automatically fill in the state and province based on the information already entered into the system Turn this feature ON or OFF Traffic Preferences Avoid Traffic Problems allows you to choose how you want the system to handle traffic problems along your route e Automatic Have the system reroute you to avoid traffic incidents that develop and impact the current rou
53. ROAD WHEEL WARNING The use of tire sealant may damage your tire pressure monitoring system and should only be used in roadside emergencies If you must use a sealant the Ford Tire Mobility Kit sealant should be used The tire pressure monitoring system sensor and valve stem on the wheel must be replaced by an authorized dealer after use of the sealant WARNING See Tire Pressure Monitoring System in this chapter for important information If the tire pressure monitoring sensor becomes damaged it will no longer function Note The tire pressure monitoring system indicator light will illuminate when the spare tire is in use To restore the full function of the monitoring system all road wheels equipped with tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted on this vehicle If you get a flat tire while driving do not apply the brake heavily Instead gradually decrease your speed Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the system sensors See Tire Pressure Monitoring System earlier in this chapter Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as possible During repairing or replacing of the flat tire have the authorized dealer inspect the tire pressure monitoring system sensor for damage Dissimilar Spare Tire and Wheel Assembly Information WARNING Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an incr
54. TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY EVEN IF HERE OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES Some States Territories and Countries do not allow certain liability exclusions or damages limitations so to that extent the above may not apply to you Export Control You agree not to export from anywhere any part of the Data or any direct product thereof except in compliance with and with all licenses and approvals required under applicable export laws rules and regulations including but not limited to the laws rules and regulations administered by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the U S Department of Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and Security of the U S Department of Commerce To the extent that any such export laws rules or regulations prohibit HERE from complying with any of its obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute Data such failure shall be excused and shall not constitute a breach of this Agreement Entire Agreement These terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement between HERE and its licensors including their licensors and suppliers and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof and supersedes in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter Severability You and HERE agree that if any portion of this agreement is found illegal or unenforceable that portion shall be severed and the remainder of the Agr
55. To program additional buttons repeat Steps 1 4 For questions or comments please contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Erasing the Function Button Codes Note You cannot erase individual buttons 1 Press and hold the outer two function buttons simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the indicator lights above the buttons flash rapidly 2 When the indicator lights flash release the buttons The codes for all buttons are erased Reprogramming a single button To program a device to a previously trained button follow these steps 1 Press and hold the desired button Do NOT release the button 2 The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds Without releasing the button follow Step 1 in the Programming section For questions or comments contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 150 Universal Garage Door Opener If Equipped Programming HomeLink to a Genie Intellicode 2 garage door opener Note The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter must already be programmed to operate with the garage door opener Programing the transmitters To program HomeLink to the transmitter you must first put the transmitter into programming mode To do this A Red LED B Green LED 1 Press and hold one of the buttons on the hand held transmitter for 10 seconds The LED light will change from green to green and red 2 Press the same button twice to confirm the change t
56. When driving through water determine the depth avoid water higher than the bottom of the hubs if possible and proceed slowly If the ignition system gets wet the vehicle may stall Once through water always try the brakes Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes Drying can be improved by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you are driving in mud Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud As when you are driving over sand apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning your wheels If the vehicle does slide steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle If the transmission transfer case or front axle are submerged in water their fluids should be checked and changed if necessary If the front or rear axle is submerged in water the axle lubricant should be replaced After driving through mud clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an imbalance that could damage drive components Tread Lightly is an educational program designed to increase public awareness of land use regulations and responsibilities in our nations wilderness areas Ford Motor Company joins the U S Forest Service and the Bureau of Land Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and other publ
57. adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement For example if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner sharply or the vehicle receives an impact of about 5 mph 8 km h or more the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers In addition the retractor is designed to lock if the webbing is pulled out too quickly If this occurs let the belt retract slightly and pull webbing out again in a slow and controlled manner 38 Safety Belts Automatic Locking Mode In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode This mode should be used any time a child safety seat except a booster is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible See the Child Safety chapter How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is pulled out 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the com
58. and cluster lens with a clean damp white cotton cloth then use a clean and dry white cotton cloth to dry these areas e Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection e Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces e Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument panel interior trim and cluster lens e Do not allow air fresheners and hand sanitizers to spill on interior surfaces If a spill occurs wipe off immediately Damage may not be covered by your warranty If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on interior trim surfaces clean as follows 1 Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth 2 Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available leather cleaning product for automotive interiors Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous area 3 Alternatively wipe the surface with a damp clean white cotton cloth and a mild soap and water solution Dry the area with a clean soft cloth 4 f necessary apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product to a clean white cotton cloth
59. and light trucks Note If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either the European Tire and Rim Technical Organization or the Japan Tire Manufacturing Association B 215 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire C 65 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width D R Indicates a radial type tire 298 Wheels and Tires E 15 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter F 95 Indicates the tire s load index It is an index that relates to how much weight a tire can carry You may find this information in your owner s manual If not contact a local tire dealer Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law G H Indicates the tire s speed rating The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation pressure These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference in conditions The ratings range from 81 mph 130 km h to 186 mph 299 km h These ratings are listed in the following chart Note You
60. and others who may use the vehicle Read Steps 1 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the programming procedure Before following the procedure make sure that e The parking brake is set e The transmission is in park P 42 Safety Belts e The ignition is off e All vehicle doors are closed e The driver safety belt is unbuckled 1 Switch the ignition on Do not start the vehicle 2 Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off about 1 to 2 minutes e You must complete Steps 3 and 4 within 60 seconds or you will have to repeat the procedure 3 Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times ending with the safety belt unbuckled The safety belt warning light will turn on 4 Within seven seconds of the safety belt warning light turning off buckle then unbuckle the safety belt The safety belt warning light will flash This will switch the feature off if it is currently on This will switch the feature on if it is currently off CHILD RESTRAINT AND SAFETY BELT MAINTENANCE Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged Inspect the vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks tears or cuts Replace if necessary All vehicle safety belt assemblies including retractors buckles front safety belt buckle assemblies buckle support assemblies slide bar if equipped shoulder belt height adjusters i
61. and steering assistance The steering will not lock but higher effort will be required When the ignition is switched off some electrical circuits including air bags warning lamps and indicators may also be off If the ignition was turned off accidentally you can shift into Neutral and restart the engine 1 Move the transmission selector lever to position N and use the brakes to bring your vehicle to a safe stop 2 When your vehicle has stopped move the transmission selector lever to position P and switch the ignition off by pressing and holding the button for one second or pressing it three times within two seconds 3 Apply the parking brake Your vehicle may have remote start capability Refer to Remote start in the Keys and Remote Control chapter 160 Starting and Stopping the Engine Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes WARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have this checked immediately Do not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust fumes Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects Important Ventilating Information If you stop your vehicle and leave the engine idling for long periods we recommend that you do one of the following e Open the windows at least 1 inch 2 5 centimeters e Set your climate control to outside air ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED WARNING Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in property dama
62. backup slot See Starting and Stopping the Vehicle e SecuriLock passive anti theft system is disabled or in unlimited mode e The vehicle has been started using a remote start system that is not programmed with admin privileges See Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems e The key or fob used to start the vehicle does not have admin privileges e No MyKeys are created See Creating a MyKey e The vehicle has been started using a remote start system that is not programmed with admin privileges See Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems e The key or fob used to start the vehicle does not have admin privileges e No MyKeys are created See Creating a MyKey e The vehicle has been started using a remote start system that is not programmed with admin privileges See Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems 66 MyKey dealer Security chapter I accidentally e The vehicle has a remote start system that programmed all keys is recognized as an admin key Clear all as MyKeys MyKeys by using the remote start See Us ng MyKey With Remote Start Systems e Your vehicle s system does not recognize any programmed MyKeys See Creating a MyKey MyKey total includes e An unknown key has been created as a one additional key MyKey e The vehicle has a remote start system See Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems Admin key total e An unknown key has been programmed to includes one additional the vehicle as an admin key key e The vehicl
63. be strong enough to hold two child safety seat attachments and may break causing serious injury or death The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points two lower anchors located where the vehicle seatback and seat cushion meet called the seat bight and one top tether anchor located behind that seating position LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH equipped seating positions in your vehicle This type of attachment method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat For forward facing child seats the top tether strap must also be attached to the proper top tether anchor if a top tether strap has been provided with your child seat Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether strap See Using Tether Straps in this chapter Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for child seat installation at the seating positions marked with the child seat symbol 24 Child Safety The LATCH anchors are located at the rear section of the rear seat between the cushion and seatback below the locator symbols on the seatback Follow the child seat manufacturer s instructions to properly install a child seat with LATCH attachments EL oc m The
64. before attempting these operations Let Your Judgment Prevail Any navigation features are provided only as an aid Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations Any such feature is not a substitute for your personal judgment Any route suggestions made by this system should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices Route Safety Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver if you would be placed in an unsafe situation or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions 432 Appendices Potential Map Inaccuracy Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads traffic controls or driving conditions Always use good judgment and common sense when following the suggested routes Emergency Services Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency services Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for these locations Not all emergency services such as police fire stations hospitals and clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such navigation features TeleNav Software End User License Agreem
65. call or reject an incoming call See the Steering Wheel chapter for more information MyLincoln Touch 351 Cleaning the Touchscreen Display Use a clean soft cloth such as one used for cleaning glasses If dirt or fingerprints are still visible apply a small amount of alcohol to the cloth Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the display Do not use detergent or any type of solvent to clean the display Support The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you cannot answer on your own Monday Saturday 8 30am 9 00pm EST Sunday 10 30am 7 30pm EST In the United States call 1 800 392 3673 In Canada call 1 800 565 3673 Times are subject to change due to holidays Safety Information WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving When using SYNC e Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are broken split or damaged Place cords and cables out of the way so they do not interfere with the operation of pedals seats com
66. carried by the tire See the Safety Compliance Certification Label affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle L Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades e Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 175 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 e Traction The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance e Temperature The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel 300 Wheels and Tires M Maximum Inflation Pressure Indicates the tire manufacturer s maximum permissible pressure or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found o
67. chips or pits Half shaft dust boots Washer spray and wiper operation Brake coolant recovery reservoir automatic transmission power steering if equipped and window washer If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit check the tire sealant expiration Use By date on the canister Replace as needed Be sure to ask your dealership service advisor or technician about the multi point vehicle inspection It is a comprehensive way to perform a thorough inspection of your vehicle It is your checklist that gives you immediate feedback on the overall condition of your vehicle You will know what has been checked what is okay as well as those things that may require future or immediate attention The multi point vehicle inspection is one more way to keep your vehicle running great 448 Scheduled Maintenance fc ay TSS ee mene PARTE E ENETVENI Advonfagi nsi Senis Babna Multi Point Inspection Report Card as Recommended by Ford Motor Company Tek s Sab poc Mare ng Fag unt Ebbi diy Web Model Spark Page mac mi Wade Tes El J tuta ja niter Cieta rvi Hz Lh Tre fi rbd 7 nmnso 3 Hber Torttiutes in vohida a d ari hason 1 dines hoss gab ay bras Pam Mal cH Luise rexsAsranca hana and ke WOT ence ni pour Cereri Miis OF WK wera gonasesansioLcon ior wtadie Lake lee ato Ci Coni re e
68. cleaning For cleaning Alcantara microfiber cloth refer to the following chart ketchup by dabbing with clean water Use cold water and rinse by dabbing with clean water Blood egg excrement or urine Avoid warm water because it makes these substances coagulate Use lukewarm water If the color remains treat with lemon juice and then rinse Indelible pencil cocoa chocolate se lukewarm water and rinse pastry with cream or chocolate y dabbing with clean water ice cream or mustard Vinegar hair gel tomato sauce or se lemon juice wipe with coffee with sugar lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with clean water Dye transfer and all other stains Use ethyl alcohol then dab with water CLEANING THE CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS IF EQUIPPED Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broom or a vacuum cleaner Remove fresh spots immediately Clean the seat with a damp cloth using a mild soap and water solution if necessary Liquor alcoholic beverages wine beer cola and tea Vehicle Care 287 CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER LENS WARNING Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the airbag system Note Follow the same procedure as cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather instrument panels and leather interior trim surfaces See Cleaning Leather Seats in this chapter Clean the instrument panel
69. consistent shift feel over the life of the vehicle A new vehicle or transmission may have firm shifts soft shifts or both This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission Over time the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation Additionally whenever the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed the strategy must be relearned Brake Shift Interlock Floor Shifter Assembly WARNING Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps are working WARNING When doing this procedure you will be taking the vehicle out of park which means the vehicle can roll freely To avoid unwanted vehicle movement always fully set the parking brake prior to doing this procedure Use wheel chocks if appropriate WARNING If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer This vehicle is equipped with a brake shift interlock feature that prevents the gearshift lever from being moved from P Park when the ignition is in the on position unless the brake pedal is pressed Transmission 177 If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P Park with ignition in the on position and the brake pedal pressed it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle s brake lamps are not operating properly Refer to the Fuses chapter for more information
70. control 1 Switch on the ignition 2 Press and hold the desired memory button for five seconds You will hear two chimes 3 Within three seconds press the unlock button on the remote control that you wish to unlink You will hear a confirmation chime Repeat this procedure for each remote control you wish to deactivate Keys and Remote Control 57 Car Finder Press the button twice within three seconds The horn will sound A and the turn signals will flash We recommend you use this method to locate your vehicle rather than using the panic alarm Sounding a Panic Alarm Press the button to activate the alarm Press the button again 0 or switch the ignition on to deactivate Note The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is off Remote Start If Equipped WARNING To avoid exhaust fumes do not use remote start if your vehicle is parked indoors or areas that are not well ventilated Note Do not use remote start if your vehicle is low on fuel x The remote start button is on the transmitter This feature allows you to start your vehicle from outside your vehicle The transmitter has an extended operating range Vehicles with automatic climate control can be configured to operate when the vehicle is remote started See the Climate Control chapter for more information A manual climate control system will run at the setting it was set to when your vehicle was last turned off Many states and provinces have
71. fill rate low medium high each time the tank is filled e Allow no more than two automatic click offs when filling Results are most accurate when the filling method is consistent Calculating Fuel Economy Do not measure fuel economy during the first 1000 miles 1600 kilometers of driving this is your engine s break in period a more accurate measurement is obtained after 2000 miles 3000 miles 3200 kilometers 4800 kilometers Also fuel expense frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readings are not accurate ways to measure fuel economy 1 Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading 2 Each time you fill the tank record the amount of fuel added 3 After at least three to five tank fill ups fill the fuel tank and record the current odometer reading 4 Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading 5 Calculate fuel economy as follows Standard Divide miles traveled by gallons used Metric Multiply liters used by 100 then divide by kilometers traveled Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving city or highway This provides an accurate estimate of the vehicle s fuel economy under current driving conditions Additionally keeping records during summer and winter show how temperature impacts fuel economy In general lower temperatures mean lower fuel economy Fuel and Refueling 169 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARNING Do not park idle or dri
72. following Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or grease film build up on window surfaces Check windshield wipers for any deterioration Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected during storage mice squirrel nests Check the exhaust for any foreign material that may have collected during storage Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label Check brake pedal operation Drive the vehicle 15 feet 4 5 meters back and forth to remove rust build up Check fluid levels including coolant oil and gas to make sure there are no leaks and fluids are at recommended levels If the battery was removed clean the battery cable ends and inspect Contact your authorized dealer if you have any concerns or issues 292 Wheels and Tires GENERAL INFORMATION Notice to Utility Vehicle Van and Truck Owners WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must e Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers e Drive at safe speeds for the conditions e Keep tires properly inflated e Never overload or improperly load your vehicle e Make sure every passenger is properly restrained WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt All occupants must wear seat belts Children and infants mu
73. generally available It may describe options not fitted to your vehicle Note Some of the illustrations in this manual may show features as used in different models so they may appear different to you on your vehicle Note Always use and operate your vehicle in line with all applicable laws and regulations Note Pass on this manual when selling your vehicle It is an integral part of the vehicle This manual may qualify the location of a component as left hand side or right hand side The side is determined when facing forward in the seat A A Right hand side B Left hand side W B Protecting the Environment You must play your part in protecting the environment Correct EJ vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps toward this aim 10 Introduction SYMBOL GLOSSARY These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle bol Description Symbol Description _ Symbol Safety alert See Owner s Anti lock pee t Manual braking system Brake fluid Battery EN Battery acid non Brake system E Cabin air filter petroleum base FW Check fuel WI Child Safety Child seat cap Door Lock lower anchor and Unlock Gu Child seat E Cruise KE Do not open tether anchor control mu when hot Engine Engine coolant coolant temperature ez Engine oil EN Explosive gas Fan warning E LA Fasten safety If J3IM Front airbag ED Front
74. guidance while the advanced mode has less audible interaction and more tone prompts Confirmation Prompts The system uses these short questions to confirm your voice request If turned off the system simply makes a best guess as to what you requested The system may still occasionally ask you to confirm settings Phone Media Candidate Lists Candidate lists are lists of possible results from your voice commands The system creates these lists when it has the same confidence level of several options based on your voice command To access these settings using the touchscreen 1 Press the Settings icon gt Settings gt Voice Control 2 Select from Interaction Mode Confirmation Prompts Media Candidate Lists Phone Candidate Lists Voice Control Volume To access these settings using voice commands EE Press the voice icon Wait for the prompt Please say a command ie Another tone sounds to let you know the system is listening 358 MyLincoln Touch Using Voice Commands with the Touchscreen Options Your voice system has a dual mode feature which allows you to switch between using voice commands and making on screen selections This is available only when the system displays a list of candidates generated during a voice session For example when entering in a street address or trying to call a contact from the phone you paired to the system ENTERTAINMENT nmo ouv gt AM 1 and AM AST FM 1 FM
75. ia ste LIE o es LI Dm De OO O ae mee Dp DIET State af Health Cenditinnd Oo Vus lote m Factory spac cad ceaban ans istmo g boarded per blades ang E wirt vi cmo craps sat p El 1000 yn sod eas aces bos mio deme E imi cong sten in sk asos nt cage LL sosy dier be Bey E tre i ram ane E hi Promar xd to icy creed Pa 7 retra E m ot nopia m 5 m vea ram ta 1E mein tto ict powanie Pa L1 IE eae tray C Coe J tectae race I tre west eaim o n m LEITET 1E morem t orc erm ea ete to m ar bbe Dis sector wal 3 r Corr Service Adviser 00000 LLL CustemerSignstur Tochnicion 89 12 XXX j Customer Copy Scheduled Maintenance 449 NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE AND LOG Intelligent Oil Life Monitor amp Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Oil Life Monitor that determines when the engine oil needs to be changed based on how your vehicle is used By using several important factors in its calculations the monitor helps reduce the cost of owning your vehicle and reduce environmental waste at the same time This means you won t have to remember to change the oil on a m
76. information for the replacement intervals Capacities and Specifications 329 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX The vehicle identification number is located on the driver s side instrument panel Please note that in the graphic XXXX is representative of your vehicle identification number The Vehicle Identification Number VIN contains the following information XXX P i XXXXXX A B CDEFG H G Assembly plant H Production sequence number A World manufacturer identifier B Brake system Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Restraint Devices and their location C Make vehicle line series body type D Engine type E Check digit F Model year 330 Capacities and Specifications VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO The National Highway Traffic Safety DATE E GVWR XK KG XXNKLB Administration Regulations require XXX KG XXXX LB wr xxx KG KKK Ls wm that a Safety Compliance XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TIRES XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TIRES XXX i Certification Label be affixed to a RIMS XXXXXXX RIMS AT XXXX kPa XXX PSICOLD AT XXXX kPa XXX PSICOLD vehicle and prescribe where the THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR T VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN Safety Compliance Certification Label EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE may be located The Safety TPE I AX ex Compliance Certification Label shall niu llr
77. installed Sirius satellite radio system includes hardware and a limited subscription term which begins on the date of sale or lease of your vehicle See an authorized dealer for availability SATELLITE RADIO For more information on extended subscription terms a service fee is required the online media player and a complete list of Sirius satellite radio channels and other features please visit www siriusxm com in the United States www sirius ca in Canada or call Sirius at 1 888 539 7474 Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number ESN You need your ESN to activate modify or track your satellite radio account When in satellite radio mode you can view this number by pressing SIRIUS and memory preset 1 at the same time To access your ESN press the bottom left corner of the touchscreen then SIRIUS gt Options Audio System 345 Troubleshooting Radio display Possible action Acquiring Sat Fault SIRIUS system failure Invalid Channel Unsubscribed Channel No Signal Call SIRIUS 1 888 539 7474 Radio requires more than two seconds to produce audio for the selected channel There is an internal module or system failure present The channel is no longer available Your subscription does not include this channel The signal is lost from the Sirius satellite or Sirius tower to your vehicle antenna Update of channel programming in progress Your satellite service is no longer available No
78. is an HD Radio station it shifts to the digital version Depending on the station quality you may hear a slight sound change when the station changes from analog to digital Blending is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound In order to provide the best possible experience use the contact form to report any station issues found while listening to a station broadcasting with HD Radio technology Independent entities own and operate each station These stations are responsible for making sure all audio streams and data fields are accurate Potential station issues Isue Cause Actin Echo stutter skip or This is poor time No action required repeat in audio alignment by the radio This is a broadcast Increase or decrease broadcaster issue in audio volume 342 Audio System Potential station issues Isue Cause Action Sound fading or The radio is shifting No action required blending in and out between analog and The reception issue digital audio may clear up as you continue to drive There is an audio The digital multicast is No action required mute delay when not available until the This is normal selecting HD2 or HD3 HD Radio broadcast is behavior Wait until multicast preset or decoded Once the audio is available Direct Tune decoded the audio is available Cannot access HD2 or The previously stored No action required HD3 multicast c
79. license agreement is strictly prohibited and may subject you to legal action Read and follow instructions Before using your Windows Automotive based system read and follow all instructions and safety information provided in this end user manual User s Guide Not following precautions found in this User s Guide can lead to an accident or other serious consequences Keep User s Guide in Vehicle When kept in the vehicle the User s Guide will be a ready reference for you and other users unfamiliar with the Windows Automotive based system Please make certain that before using the system for the first time all persons have access to the User s Guide and read its instructions and safety information carefully WARNING Operating certain parts of this system while driving can distract your attention away from the road and possibly cause an accident or other serious consequences Do not change system settings or enter data non verbally using your hands while driving Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting these operations This is important since while setting up or changing some functions you might be required to distract your attention away from the road and remove your hands from the wheel General Operation Voice Command Control Functions within the Windows Automotive based system may be accomplished using only voice commands Using voice commands while driving allows you to operate the system without removin
80. locator symbols are on round plastic buttons for the center seat and on rectangular tags for the outboard seats Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps See Using Tether Straps in this chapter Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors shown Each time you use the safety seat check that the seat is properly attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor if applicable Tug the child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to the vehicle The seat should move less than one inch when you do this for a proper installation If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases Combining Safety Belt and LATCH Lower Anchors for Attaching Child Safety Seats When used in combination either the safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors may be attached first provided a proper installation is achieved Attach the tether strap afterward if included with the child seat Child Safety 25 Using Tether Straps ae Many forward facing child safety seats include a tether strap RAL which extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a tether strap or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether s
81. may need to reset it if any of the following conditions occur e A low voltage or dead battery e Disconnected battery e The liftgate is manually closed and left ajar unlatched To reset the power liftgate Disconnect the battery for 20 seconds and then reconnect the battery Manually close and fully latch the liftgate Power open the liftgate by using the remote control or the instrument panel button ah 74 Locks SECURICODE KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD IF EQUIPPED The keypad located near the driver window is invisible until touched and then it lights up so you can see and touch the appropriate buttons Note If you enter your entry code too fast on the keypad the unlock function may not work Enter your entry code again more slowly You can use the keypad to e lock or unlock the doors e recall memory features e enable or disable the autolock and autounlock e arm and disarm the anti theft alarm You can operate the keypad with the factory set 5 digit entry code This code is located on the owner s wallet card in the glove box and is available from an authorized dealer You can also create up to three of your own 5 digit personal entry codes Programming a Personal Entry Code To create your own personal entry code 1 Enter the factory set code 2 Press the 1e2 on the keypad within five seconds 3 Enter your personal 5 digit code You must enter each number within five seconds of each other 4 For
82. memory recall feature enter the sixth digit 1e2 to store driver 1 settings or 3e4 to store driver 2 settings Note Pressing 596 7 8 or 9e0 keypad numbers as a sixth digit will not recall a driver memory setting Note The factory set code cannot be associated with a memory setting 5 The doors will lock and then unlock to confirm that programming is complete You may also program a personal entry code through the MyFord Touch system Refer to the MyFord Touch chapter Tips e Do not set a code that uses five of the same number e Do not use five numbers in sequential order e The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal code Locks 75 Erasing a Personal Code 1 Enter the factory set 5 digit code 2 Press and release 1e2 on the keypad within five seconds 3 Press and hold 192 for two seconds This must be done within five seconds of completing Step 2 All personal codes are now erased and only the factory set 5 digit code will work Anti Scan Feature The keypad will go into an anti scan mode if you enter the wrong code seven times 35 consecutive button presses This mode disables the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash The anti scan feature will turn off after e one minute of keypad inactivity e pressing the unlock button on the remote control e switching the ignition on e unlocking the vehicle using intelligent access Unlocking and Locking the Doors To unlock
83. mph 5 km h Note Downloading and sending text messages using Bluetooth are phone dependent features 1 Touch the top left corner of the display to access the Phone menu 2 Touch Messaging Send Text 3 Enter a phone number or choose from your phone book 4 You can select from the following options e Send which sends the message as it is e Edit Text allows you to customize the pre defined message or create a message on your own You can then preview the message verify the recipient as well as update the message list TII call you when I get there H 2 2 Oo Receiving a Text Message When a new message arrives an audible tone sounds and the screen displays a pop up with the caller name and ID if supported by your phone You can press e View to view the text message e Listen for SYNC to read the message to you e Dial to call the contact 384 MyLincoln Touch e Ignore to exit the screen Note If you select View and your vehicle is traveling over 3 mph 5 km h the system offers to read the message to you instead of allowing you to view it while driving Phone Settings Press Phone gt Settings Bluetooth Devices Touch this tab to connect disconnect add or delete a device as well as save it as a favorite Bluetooth Touch this tab to turn Bluetooth off or on Do Not Disturb Touch this tab if you want all calls to go directly to your voice mail and not ring in the vehic
84. networks Videos Photos and Playing video wallpaper Text Messages Navigation Adding or Editing Address Book entries or Avoid Areas MyLincoln Touch 353 Privacy Information When a cellular phone is connected to SYNC the system creates a profile within your vehicle that is linked to that cellular phone This profile is created in order to offer you more cellular features and to operate more efficiently Among other things this profile may contain data about your cellular phone book text messages read and unread and call history including history of calls when your cell phone was not connected to the system In addition if you connect a media device the system creates and retains an index of supported media content The system also records a short development log of approximately 10 minutes of all recent system activity The log profile and other system data may be used to improve the system and help diagnose any problems that may occur The cellular profile media device index and development log remain in the vehicle unless you delete them and are generally accessible only in the vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected If you no longer plan to use the system or the vehicle we recommend you perform a Master Reset to erase all stored information System data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to the vehicle s SYNC module Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access the
85. news weather traffic and entertainment programming Your factory installed Sirius satellite radio system includes hardware and a limited subscription term that begins on the date of sale or lease of your vehicle See your authorized dealer for availability For more information on extended subscription terms a service fee is required the online media player and a list of Sirius satellite radio channels and other features please visit www siriusxm com in the United States www sirius ca in Canada or call Sirius at 1 888 539 7474 Potential satellite radio reception issues Antenna For optimal reception performance keep the obstructions antenna clear of snow and ice build up and keep luggage and other materials as far away from the antenna as possible Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings bridges tunnels freeway overpasses parking garages dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception SATELLITE R A Dio 370 MyLincoln Touch Potential satellite radio reception issues Station overload When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio system may mute Satellite radio signal Your display may show ACQUIRING to interference indicate the interference and the audio system may mute Sirius troubleshooting tips Radio display Possible action Acquiring Radio requires more No action required than two seconds to This
86. of Santa Clara California The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply 7 Assignment You may not resell assign or transfer this Agreement or any of your rights or obligations except in totality in connection with your permanent transfer of the Telenav Software and expressly conditioned upon the new user of the Telenav Software agreeing to be bound by the terms and conditions of this Agreement Any such sale assignment or transfer that is not expressly permitted under this paragraph will result 436 Appendices in immediate termination of this Agreement without liability to Telenav in which case you and all other parties shall immediately cease all use of the Telenav Software Notwithstanding the foregoing Telenav may assign this Agreement to any other party at any time without notice provided the assignee remains bound by this Agreement 8 Miscellaneous 8 1 This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between Telenav and you with respect to the subject matter hereof 8 2 Except for the limited licenses expressly granted in this Agreement Telenav retains all right title and interest in and to the Telenav Software including without limitation all related intellectual property rights No licenses or other rights which are not expressly granted in this Agreement are intended to or shall be granted or conferred by implication statute inducement estoppel or otherwise and
87. of all available stations This feature still works when HD Radio reception is on although it does not scan for HD2 HD7 channels You may see the HD logo appear if the station has a digital broadcast To save a multicast When the channel is active on screen press station as a preset and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station Sound returns when finished When recalling a HD2 or HD3 memory preset there is a mute before the digital audio plays as the system must once again acquire the digital signal As with any saved radio station you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is outside the station s reception area Audio System 341 HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting Potential reception issues Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area the station may mute due to weak signal strength If you are listening to HD1 the system switches back to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again However if you are listening to any of the possible HD2 through HD7 multicast channels the station mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal again Station blending When the system first receives a station aside from HD2 HD7 multicast stations it first plays the station in the analog version Once the receiver verifies the station
88. of leaded fuel is prohibited by law Note Use of any fuel other than recommended fuel can cause powertrain damage impair the emission control system or cause loss of vehicle performance Any damage to the vehicle that is caused by the use of fuel not recommended will not be covered under warranty Octane Recommendations Regular unleaded gasoline with a pump R M 2 octane rating of 87 is recommended Some stations offer fuels posted as Regular with an octane rating below 87 particularly in high altitude areas Fuels with octane levels below 87 are not recommended Premium fuel will provide improved performance and is recommended for severe duty usage such as trailer tow Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly However if it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel with the recommended octane rating see your authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage RUNNING OUT OF FUEL Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse effect on powertrain components If you have run out of fuel e You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine On restarting cranking time will take a few seconds longer than normal e Normally adding 1 gallon 3 8L of fuel is enough to restart the engine If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade more than 1 gallon 3
89. oil change service interval this interval may be up to one year or 10000 miles 16000 kilometers When ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE REQUIRED appears in the information display it is time for an oil change the oil change must be done within two weeks or 500 miles 800 kilometers of the ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message appearing The Intelligent Oil Life Monitor must be reset after each oil change see the Information Displays chapter If your information display is prematurely reset or becomes inoperative you should perform the oil change interval at six months or 5000 miles 8000 kilometers from your last oil change Never exceed one year or 10000 miles 16000 kilometers between oil change intervals Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple complex performance systems Every manufacturer develops these systems using different specifications and performance features That is why it is important to rely upon your dealership to properly diagnose and repair your vehicle Ford Motor Company has recommended maintenance intervals for various parts and component systems based upon engineering testing Ford Motor Company relies upon this testing to determine the most appropriate mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you and recommends against maintenance schedules that deviate from the scheduled maintenance information Ford strongly rec
90. position Safety Belts 41 SAFETY BELT MINDER This feature supplements the safety belt warning function by providing additional reminders that intermittently sound a tone and illuminate the safety belt warning light when you are in the driver seat and the safety belt is unbuckled You buckle your safety belt before you switch the ignition on or less than 1 2 minutes elapse after you switch the ignition on You do not buckle your safety belt before your vehicle reaches at least 6 mph 9 7 km h and 1 2 minutes elapse after you switch the unbuckled for about one minute while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph 9 7 km h and more than 1 2 minutes elapse after you switch the ignition on The Belt Minder feature will not activate The Belt Minder feature activates the safety belt warning light illuminates and a warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds repeating for about 5 minutes or until you buckle your safety belt The Belt Minder feature activates the safety belt warning light illuminates and a warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds repeating for about 5 minutes or until you buckle your safety belt Deactivating and Activating the Belt Minder Feature WARNING While the system allows you to deactivate it this system is designed to improve your chances of being safely belted and surviving an accident We recommend you leave the system activated for yourself
91. radio frequency signal to communicate with your vehicle and authorize your vehicle to unlock when one of the following conditions is met e You touch any button on the keypad e You press a button on the transmitter If excessive radio frequency interference is present in the area or if the transmitter battery is low it may be necessary to mechanically unlock your door You can use the mechanical key blade in your intelligent access key to open the driver door in this situation Refer to Remote Control in this chapter for more information on the location and use of the mechanical key blade REMOTE CONTROL Intelligent Access Key Your intelligent access keys operate the power locks and the remote start system The key must be in your vehicle to activate the push button start system The intelligent access key also contains a removable mechanical key blade that you can use to unlock the driver door Slide the release on the back of the transmitter to release the key blade and then pull the blade out Note Your vehicle s back up keys came with a security tag that place for future reference Keys and Remote Control 55 Replacing the Battery Note Refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries Note Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals or on the back surface of the circuit board Note Replacing the battery will not delete the transmitter from your vehicle The transmi
92. rental trailer follow the instructions the rental agency gives you For load specification terms found on the tire label and Safety Compliance label and for instructions on calculating your vehicle s load refer to Load limit in the Load Carrying chapter Remember to account for the trailer tongue weight as part of your vehicle load when calculating the total vehicle weight Trailer Towing Connector Vehicles with a Trailer Towing Package and 7 Pin Connector s When attaching the trailer wiring connector to your vehicle only use a proper fitting connector that works with the vehicle and trailer functions If your vehicle has a trailer towing package it may have a T pin connector Some connectors may have the SAE J2863 logo which confirms that it is the proper wiring connector and works correctly with your vehicle 226 Towing Trailer Hitch Cover Your vehicle is equipped with a removable trailer hitch trim cover To remove the trim cover 1 Loosen the two quarter turn fasteners in the bottom of the cover mcm CR by turning them counterclockwise Pull the cover downward to remove it The fasteners remain attached to the cover 2 To reinstall the cover insert the four plastic tabs on top of the cover into the corresponding slots as shown in the illustration and push the cover up into the bumper trim 3 Hold the cover against the bumper trim and reinstall the two quart
93. restrictions for the use of remote start Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding remote start systems The remote start system will not work if e the ignition is on e the alarm system is triggered e you disable the feature e the hood is open e the transmission is not in P e the vehicle battery voltage is too low e the service engine soon light is on 58 Keys and Remote Control Remote Starting the Vehicle Note You must press each button within three seconds of each other Your vehicle will not remote start and the horn will not sound if you do not follow this sequence The label on your transmitter details the starting procedure To remote start your vehicle 1 Press the lock button to lock all the doors 2 Press the remote start button twice The exterior lamps will flash twice The horn will sound if the system fails to start unless quiet start is on Quiet start will run the blower fan at a slower speed to reduce noise You can switch it on or off in the information display See the Information Displays chapter Note If you remote start your vehicle with an integrated keyhead transmitter you must switch the ignition on before driving your vehicle If you remote start your vehicle with an intelligent access transmitter you must have a programmed intelligent access key inside your vehicle and press the START STOP button on the instrument panel once while applying the
94. rotated until the courtesy lamps come on e any of the remote entry controls are pressed and ignition is off and switch is in the middle position With the ignition key in the accessory or on position the rear cargo lamp can be turned on or off by sliding the control Battery saver The battery saver will shut off the exterior lamps and interior lamps except the hazard warning lamps if activated 10 minutes after the ignition control has been turned off The system will not turn off the parking lamps if the lighting control is in the parking lamps on position Windows and Mirrors 93 POWER WINDOWS WARNING Do not leave children unattended in your vehicle and do not let them play with the power windows They may seriously injure themselves WARNING When closing the power windows you should verify they are free of obstructions and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of the window openings Note You may hear a pulsing noise when just one of the windows is open Lower the opposite window slightly to reduce this noise Press the switch to open the window Lift the switch to close the window One Touch Down If Equipped Press the switch fully and release it Press again or lift it to stop the window One Touch Up If Equipped Lift the switch fully and release it Press or lift it again to stop the window Bounce Back If Equipped The window will stop automatically while closing and re
95. smart unlock feature and intentionally lock the intelligent access key inside your vehicle To do this lock your vehicle after you have closed all the doors by e using the keyless entry keypad e pressing the lock button on another intelligent access key e touching the locking area on the handle with another intelligent access key in your hand When you open one of the front doors and lock your vehicle using the power door lock control all doors will lock then unlock if e the ignition is on or e the ignition is off and the transmission is not in P Locks 69 Autolock Feature If Enabled The autolock feature will lock all the doors when e all the doors are closed e the ignition is on e you shift into any gear putting your vehicle in motion and e your vehicle reaches a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h The autolock feature repeats when e you open then close any door while the ignition is on and the vehicle speed is 9 mph 15 km h or lower and e your vehicle then reaches a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h Autounlock Feature If Enabled The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when e the ignition is on all the doors are closed and your vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h your vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is switched off or to accessory and the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being switched off or to accessory
96. system Rather it means the restraints control module determined the accident conditions for example crash severity belt usage were not appropriate to activate these safety devices The design of the front airbags is to activate only in frontal and near frontal crashes not rollovers side impacts or rear impacts unless the crash causes sufficient frontal deceleration The design of the safety belt pretensioners is to activate in frontal near frontal and side crashes and in rollovers The design of the side airbags is to inflate in certain side impact crashes Side airbags may activate in other types of crashes if the vehicle experiences sufficient sideways motion or deformation The design of the Safety Canopy is to inflate in certain side impact crashes or rollover events The Safety Canopy may activate in other types of crashes if the vehicle experiences sufficient sideways motion or deformation or a certain likelihood of rollover AIRBAG DISPOSAL Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Airbags must be disposed of by qualified personnel Keys and Remote Control 53 PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION The remote control allows you to e remotely lock or unlock the vehicle doors e remotely open the power liftgate e remotely start or stop the engine e arm and disarm the anti theft system e activate the panic alarm GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO FREQUENCIES This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and
97. the United States www sirius ca in Canada or call Sirius at 1 888 539 7474 Note This receiver includes the eCos real time operating system eCos is published under the eCos License Satellite Radio Reception Factors Potential satellite radio reception issues Antenna obstructions Terrain Station overload Satellite radio signal interference For optimal reception performance keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible Hills mountains tall buildings bridges tunnels freeway overpasses parking garages dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio system may mute Your display may show ACQUIRING to indicate the interference and the audio system may mute 344 Audio System Sirius Satellite Radio Service Note Sirius reserves the unrestricted right to change rearrange add or delete programming including canceling moving or adding particular channels and its prices at any time with or without notice to you Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes Sirius satellite radio is a subscription based satellite radio 4 om service that broadcasts a variety of music sports news weather traffic and entertainment programming Your factory
98. the chosen area Select Map to see the weather map which can show storms radar information charts and winds Select Area to select from a listing of weather locations Sports Info Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety of sports You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier access The score automatically refreshes when a game is in progress Ski Conditions Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area Sirius Travel Link Voice Commands Note In order to use Sirius Travel Link your vehicle must be equipped with navigation and your navigation SD card must be in the SD card slot EE Press the voice button on the steering wheel controls and when us prompted say any of the following Travel Link voice commands 5 day weather forecast Sports scores Fuel prices Traffic Movie listings Travel Link Sports headlines Sports schedule Weather map If you have said Sports headlines Sports schedule or Sports scores you may say any of the commands in the Sports headlines Sports schedules and Sports scores commands chart If you have said Travel Link you may say any of the commands in the Travel Link chart Sports headlines sports schedules and sports scores voice commands College basketball 392 MyLincoln Touch Motor spon TRAVEL LINK 5 day weather Golf schedule
99. the driver door Enter the factory set 5 digit code or your personal code You must press each number within five seconds of each other The interior lamps will illuminate Note All doors will unlock if the two stage unlocking feature is disabled Refer to Locking and Unlocking earlier in this chapter To unlock all doors Enter the factory set code or your personal code then press 3e4 within five seconds To lock all doors Press and hold 7e8 and 9e0 at the same time with the driver door closed You do not need to enter the keypad code first 76 Security SECURILOCK PASSIVE ANTI THEFT SYSTEM Note The system is not compatible with non Ford aftermarket remote start systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection Note Metallic objects electronic devices or a second coded key on the same key chain may cause vehicle starting issues if they are too close to the key when starting your vehicle Prevent these objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine Switch the ignition off move all objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart your vehicle if a problem occurs Note Do not leave a duplicate coded key in your vehicle Always take your keys and lock all doors when leaving your vehicle The system helps prevent the engine from starting unless you use a coded key programmed to your vehicle Using the wrong key may prevent your vehicle from start
100. the most fuel efficient route You can cancel the route or have the system demo the route for you Select Route Prefs to set route preferences like avoiding freeways MyLincoln Touch 415 tollroads ferries and car trains as well as to use or not use high occupancy vehicle lanes High occupancy vehicle lanes are also known as carpool or diamond lanes People who ride in buses vanpools or carpools use these lanes Note If your vehicle is on a recognized road and you do not press the Start Route button the system defaults to the Fastest Route option and begins guidance During route guidance you can press the talking bubble icon that appears in the upper right navigation corner green bar if you want the system to repeat route guidance information When the system repeats the last guidance instruction it updates the distance to the next guidance instruction since it detects when the vehicle is moving Point of Interest POI Categories Your system offers a variety of points of interest categories Main categories Food Drink amp Dining Travel amp Transportation Shopping Financial Entertainment amp Arts Community Health amp Medicine Within these main categories there are subcategories which contain more listings Emergency Recreation amp Sports To expand these listings press the in front of the point of interest listing 416 MyLincoln Touch When programming a point of interest destina
101. the smaller round LED should be on 3 Press and release the program button The larger purple LED will flash Note The next two steps must be completed in 30 seconds 4 Press and release the Genie Intellicode 2 hand held transmitter s previously programmed button Both indicator lights on the garage door opener motor unit should now flash purple 5 Press and hold the previously programmed button on the sun visor for two seconds Repeat this step up to 3 times until the garage door moves Programming is now complete Clearing a HomeLink device To erase programming from the three HomeLink buttons press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash The LED will begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds at which time both buttons should be released Programming has now been erased and the LED should blink slowly to indicate the device is in train mode when any one of the three HomeLink buttons is pressed FCC and RSS 210 Industry Canada Compliance This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications to your device not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance can void the user s authority to operate the eq
102. the use of any hand held device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving NOTE You can also set up the certain convenience features using MyLincoln Mobile over the internet or smartphone application For more information on MyLincoln Mobile and to set up your MyLincoln Mobile account visit http support lincoln com owner services mylincoln mobile app A Phone B Navigation or Information if your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation C Climate D Settings E Home F Information G Entertainment 348 MyLincoln Touch This system uses a four corner strategy to provide quick access several vehicle features and settings The touchscreen provides easy interaction with your cellular phone multimedia climate control and navigation system The corners display any active modes within those menus such as phone status or the climate temperature Note Some features are not available while your vehicle is moving Note Your system is equipped with a feature that allows you to access and control audio features for 30 minutes after you switch the ignition off and no doors open PHONE Press to select any of the following Making and Receiving Calls Quick Dial Phonebook Call History Text Messaging Settings NAVIGATION Press to select any of the following My
103. to bring the coolant level to the proper level Recycled Engine Coolant Ford Motor Company does not recommend the use of recycled engine coolant since a Ford approved recycling process is not yet available Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate manner Follow your community s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids Severe Climates If you drive in extremely cold climates e It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer increase the coolant concentration above 5096 e A coolant concentration of 6096 will provide improved freeze point protection Engine coolant concentrations above 6096 will decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage Maintenance 267 If you drive in extremely hot climates e t may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer decrease the coolant concentration to 4096 e A coolant concentration of 40 will provide improved overheat protection Engine coolant concentrations below 4096 will decrease the corrosion freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage Vehicles driven year round in non extreme climates should use prediluted engine coolant for optimum cooling system and engine protection What You Should Know About Fail Safe Cooling If the engine coolant supply is depleted this feature allows the vehicle to be driven temporarily before incr
104. to the front or rear of the vehicle For example if an obstacle is 12 inches 30 centimeters from the front of the vehicle and at the same time an obstacle is only 6 inches 15 centimeters from the rear of the vehicle the lower pitched tone sounds e An alternating warning sounds from the front and rear if there are objects at both bumpers that are closer than 10 inches 25 centimeters For specific information on the reverse sensing portion of the system refer to that section 198 Parking Aids REAR VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED WARNING The rear view camera system is a reverse aid supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with the interior and exterior mirrors for maximum coverage WARNING Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper might not be seen on the screen due to the limited coverage of the camera system WARNING Back up as slow as possible since higher speeds might limit your reaction time to stop the vehicle WARNING Use caution when using the rear video camera and the liftgate is ajar If the liftgate is ajar the camera will be out of position and the video image may be incorrect All guidelines if enabled have been removed when the liftgate is ajar WARNING Use caution when turning camera features on or off while in R Reverse Make sure the vehicle is not moving The rear view camera system provides a video image of the area behi
105. your vehicle e Side airbags located inside the seatback of the driver and front passenger seats e Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator later in this chapter The design and development of the side airbag system included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags LUZ ry Supplementary Restraints System 49 SAFETY CANOPY CURTAIN AIRBAGS WARNING Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the headliner at the siderail that may come into contact with a deploying curtain airbag Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash WARNING Do not lean your head on the door The curtain airbag could injure you as it deploys from the headliner WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the curtain airbags its fuses the A B or C pillar trim or the headliner on a vehicle containing curtain airbags as you could be seriously injured or killed Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING All occupants of your vehicle including the driver should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag supplemental restraint system and curtain airbag is provided Failure to
106. 1 Check the engine oil level 2 If the engine oil level is not within the normal range add engine oil that meets Ford specifications See Capacities amd Specifications for more information Remove the engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening 3 Recheck the engine oil level Make sure the oil level is not above the normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick 4 nstall the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated 5 Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated ENGINE COOLANT CHECK Checking the Engine Coolant When the engine is cold check the concentration and level of the engine coolant at the intervals listed in the Scheduled Maintenance Information Note Make sure that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks on the coolant reservoir Note Coolant expands when it is hot The level may extend beyond the MAX mark Note If the level is at the MIN mark below the MIN mark or empty add coolant immediately See Adding Engine Coolant in this chapter The coolant concentration should be maintained within 4896 to 50 which equates to a freeze point between 30 F 34 C and 34 F 37 C Maintenance 265 Note For best results coolant concentration should be tested with a refractometer such as Robinair Coolant and Battery Refractometer 75240 We do not recommend the use of hydr
107. 16 Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise Wheels and Tires 321 17 Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the order shown and reinstall the wheel cover See Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications later in this chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification oe e u 18 Unblock the wheels 19 Put flat tire jack lug wrench and tools away Make sure the jack bag is properly reinstalled around the jack and tools assembly tray with the strap securely fastened Be sure to tighten the wing nut sufficiently so it does not rattle when you drive Stowing the Spare Tire 1 Lay the tire on the ground near the rear of the vehicle with the valve stem side facing up 2 Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer through the wheel center If equipped you may have to remove the wheel center cap prior to pushing the retainer through the center of the wheel To remove the center cap press it off with the jack tool from the inner side of the wheel Pull on the cable to align the components at the end of the cable 3 Assemble the jack handle and winch extension as shown in illustration then insert the winch extension through the access hole behind the third row seat and engage the winch 4 Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its stowed position underneath the vehicle The wrench will become harder to turn and the spare tire wi
108. 8L may be required e The service engine soon indicator may come on For more information on the service engine soon indicator refer to the Instrument Cluster chapter See Settings in the Instrument Cluster chapter for information on calculating DTE Distance to empty Fuel and Refueling 165 Refilling With a Portable Fuel Container WARNING Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel amp system This could damage the fuel system and its seal and may cause fuel to run onto the ground instead of filling the tank which could result in serious personal injury WARNING Do not try to pry open or push open the Easy Fuel amp system with foreign objects This could damage the fuel system and its seal and cause injury to you or others With the Easy Fuel amp no cap fuel system use the following directions when filling from a portable fuel container When filling the vehicle s fuel tank from a portable fuel container use the funnel included with the vehicle 1 The white plastic funnel is located under the spare tire tool panel located in the floor compartment behind the rear seat a 2 Unlatch and remove the spare tire tool panel Remove the white plastic funnel 3 Slowly insert the funnel into the Easy Fuel system 4 Fill the vehicle with fuel from the portable fuel container 5 Clean the funnel or properly dispose of it Extra funnels can be purchased from you
109. 95 315 alignment 308 CALC us ismod estes testes 294 changing ussese 315 317 checking the pressure 304 inflat 4 4 eere 302 label i tentes 301 TeplaclDB assi terere om inech 306 rotating Lies cce oreet ehe itin 309 safety practices 308 sidewall information 297 snow tires and chains 309 Spare HTE sucer eaves 315 terminology sess 296 Ure grades exertion 295 treadwear sasori re 295 304 Touchscreen features Celimate 11 3 steterit 410 Towing seeess 222 232 233 recreational towing 233 trailer TOWING ise 222 WEGCKOE pieiet 232 Traction control 1 5 189 Traffic preferences 417 Trailer sway control 223 Transmission brake shift interlock BSD 176 fluid checking and adding AUTOMATIC iocos reet 268 fluid refill capacities 324 lubricant specifications 324 TOIT SISMAl 5 eet rt ts 91 U USB POET epres 346 373 V Vehicle health report 396 Vehicle Identification Number VIN insener 329 Vehicle loading 212 Ventilating your vehicle 160 Voice recognition 355 W Warning lights see Lights 101 Washer fluid 269 270 Water Driving through 235 Windows OWED ssscenctacisiadlasactdeddaceasteecaccncns 93 rear wi
110. Blown fuses are identified by a broken wire within the fuse Check the appropriate fuses before replacing any electrical components FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART Power Distribution Box WARNING Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses WARNING To reduce risk of electrical shock always replace the cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment It has high current fuses that protect your vehicle s main electrical systems from overloads If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected see Changing the Vehicle Battery in the Maintenance chapter 252 Fuses The high current fuses are coded as follows ae rating Rear window defroster heated mirror relay ha Electronic cooling fan Rurn start relay z Power distribution box relay Power running boards heated seats Fuses 253 location rating 39 20 1 j Electronicfan2 relay keep alive power 254
111. CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR FREE OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED GRACENOTE IS NOT OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES AT ANY TIME GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TITLE AND NON INFRINGEMENT NEITHER GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER Gracenote 2007 Appendices 443 Vehicle with SYNC only FCC ID KMHSG1G1 IC 1422A SG1G1 Vehicle with SYNC and MyFord Touch or MyLincoln Touch FCC ID KMHSYNCG2 IC 1422A SYNCG2 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation WARNING Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate
112. D and SYNC modes press and release the button to go to the next or previous track Press and hold the button to fast reverse or fast forward within that track 340 Audio System HD RADIO INFORMATION IF AVAILABLE Note HD Radio broadcasts are not available in all markets HD Radio technology is the digital evolution of analog AM FM radio Your system has a special receiver that allows it to receive digital broadcasts where available in addition to the analog broadcasts it already receives Digital broadcasts provide a better sound quality than analog broadcasts with free crystal clear audio and no static or distortion For more information and a guide to available stations and programming please visit www hdradio com When HD Radio is on and you tune to a station broadcasting HD Radio technology you may notice the HD Radio logo on your screen When this logo is available you may also see Title and Artist fields on screen The multicast indicator appears in FM mode only if the current station is broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts The highlighted numbers signify available digital channels where new or different content is available HD1 signifies the main programming status and is available in analog and digital broadcasts Other multicast stations HDZ through HD7 are only available digitally When HD Radio broadcasts are active you can access the following functions When you select Scan Hear a brief sampling
113. DATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace 460 Scheduled Maintenance EXCEPTIONS Normal vehicle axle maintenance Rear axles and power take off units with synthetic fluid and light duty trucks equipped with Ford design axles are lubricated for life do not check or change fluid unless a leak is suspected service is required or the assembly has been submerged in water During long periods of trailer towing with outside temperatures above 70 F 21 C and at wide open throttle for long periods above 45 mph 72 km h non synthetic rear axle fluids should be changed every 3000 miles 4800 kilometers or three months whichever comes first This interval can be waived if the axle is filled with 75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford specification WSL M2C192 A part number F1TZ 19580 B or equivalent Add friction modifier XL 3 EST M2C118 A or equivalent for complete refill of Traction Lok rear axles see Technical specifications in the Capacities and Specifications chapter for details Police Taxi Livery vehicle axle maintenance Change rear axle fluid every 100000 miles 160000 km Rear axle fluid change may be waived if the axle was filled with 75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford specification WSL M2C192 A part number FITZ 19580 B or equivalent Add four ounces 118 mL of additive friction modifier XL 3 EST M2C118 A or equivalent for complete refill of Traction Lok rear axles The axle fluid should be changed anytime the axle
114. Display chapter When you switch off the Blind Spot Information System you will not receive alerts and the information display will display a system off message The yellow alert indicator in the outside mirror will also flash twice The system switches back on whenever you switch the ignition on You can also have one or both systems switched off permanently at an authorized dealer Once switched off the system can only be switched back on at an authorized dealer STEERING Electric Power Steering WARNING The electric power steering system has diagnostic checks that continuously monitor the system to ensure proper operation When a system error is detected a steering message will appear in the information display WARNING The electric power steering system has diagnostic checks that continuously monitor the system to ensure proper operation of the electronic system When an electronic error is detected a message will be displayed in the information display If this happens stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the engine After at least 10 seconds reset the system by restarting the engine and watch the information display for a steering message If a steering message returns or returns while driving take the vehicle to your dealer to have it checked WARNING Obtain immediate service if a system error is detected You may not notice any difference in the feel of your steering but a serious condition may exist Fai
115. E Press the voice button on your steering wheel controls When i prompted say Call lt name gt or say Dial then the desired number To end the call or exit phone mode press this phone button t Receiving Calls During an incoming call an audible tone sounds Call information appears in the display if it is available pu Accept the call by pressing Accept on the touchscreen or by t pressing this phone button on your steering wheel controls Reject the call by pressing Reject on the touchscreen or by pressing this phone button on your steering wheel controls Ignore the call by doing nothing SYNC logs it as a missed call Phone Menu Options Press the top left corner on your touchscreen to select from the following options Phone Touch this button to access the on screen numerical pad to enter a number and place a call During an active call you can also choose to e Mute the call Put it on hold Turn on privacy returns the call to your cellular phone Join two calls End the call Quick Dial Set up favorite contacts from your phonebook or history folder 382 MyLincoln Touch Phonebook Touch this button to access and call any contacts in your previously downloaded phone book The system places the entries in alphabetical categories summarized at the top of the screen To turn on contact picture settings if your device supports this feature press Phone gt Settings gt Manage Phonebook gt D
116. Floor WARNING To prevent possible damage to the seat or safety belts make sure that the safety belts are not buckled when moving the seat to the load floor position WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seat back to its original position pull on the seatback to make sure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or crash e Before folding the third row seats A fold the head restraints down by oar pulling on the strap located at the uu bottom of the restraint Pull up on the handle located behind the seatback while pushing the seat back forward and down into the seat cushion To return the seat back to its original position lift the seat back until it latches into place 146 Seats PowerFold Third Row Seat If Equipped Note The power fold down seats will operate for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is in off The transmission must be in park P and the liftgate or liftgate glass must be open Similar to the battery saver feature the power third row seat will be disabled 10 minutes after turning the vehicle off Note Be sure that the head restraints are folded down before powering the third row seat mie The control buttons are located on w t E the right hand rear quarter trim E Aw panel accessible from th
117. Fuses location rating 429 O 30A 5A 15A 2 3 2 2 4 3 6 3 5A OA OA OA OA OA OA OA OA 2 Protected circuits Trailer tow module Not used heated mirror relay feed Powertrain control module ISP Power steering panel run start feed instrument panel valance panel center console seats Anti lock brake system valves Anti lock brake system pump Third row power fold seat Auxiliary power point cigar lighter Fuses 255 location rating quarter panel Vehicle power 1 powertrain control module control module ao Notued control module PC Notused 82 Not sed 83 Not sed 84 Not sed 85 JjNeued y 256 Fuses Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel The fuse panel is located under the right hand side of the instrument panel To remove the trim panel for access to the fuse box pull the panel toward you and swing it out away from the side and remove it To reinstall it line up the tabs with the grooves on the panel then push it shut To remove the fuse box cover press in the tabs on both sides of the cover then pull the cover off To reinstall the fuse box cover place the top part of the cover on the fuse panel then push the bottom part of the cover until you hear it click shut Gently pull on the cover to make sure i
118. Gracenote Content Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers Gracenote 442 Appendices respectively reserve all rights in Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and the Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content including all ownership rights Under no circumstances will either Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide including any copyrighted material or music file information You agree that Gracenote may enforce its respective rights collectively or separately under this agreement against you directly in each company s own name Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow Gracenote to count queries without knowing anything about who you are For more information see the web page at www gracenote com for the Gracenote Privacy Policy THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE EACH ITEM OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO YOU AS IS NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE CONTENT GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND OR CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR IN THE CASE OF GRACENOTE CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT NO WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE
119. HE VEHICLE ON FOUR WHEELS Emergency Towing If your vehicle becomes inoperable without access to wheel dollies car hauling trailer or flatbed transport vehicle it can be flat towed all wheels on the ground regardless of the powertrain and transmission configuration under the following conditions e Your vehicle is facing forward for towing in a forward direction e Place the transmission in position N See Automatic transmission in the Transmission chapter if you cannot move the transmission into N Maximum speed is 35 mph 56 km h Maximum distance is 50 miles 80 kilometers Recreational Towing Note Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust fumes from entering your vehicle See the Climate Control chapter Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational towing such as towing your vehicle behind a motorhome We designed these guidelines to prevent damage to your transmission Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels on the ground as vehicle or transmission damage may occur It is recommended to tow your vehicle with all four 4 wheels off the ground such as when using a car hauling trailer Otherwise you cannot tow your vehicle 234 Driving Hints BREAKING IN You need to break in new tires for approximately 300 miles 480 kilometers During this time your vehicle may exhibit some unique driving characteristics Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000 mile
120. Have the system display your turn list top to bottom or bottom to top Route Preferences Preferred Route allows you to choose to have the system display the Shortest Fastest or most Ecological route first If you set Always Use Preferred Route to Yes the system uses the selected route type to calculate only one route to the desired destination Always Use Preferred Route bypasses route selection in destination programming The system only calculates one route based on the preferred route setting Eco Time Penalty allows you to select a low medium or high cost for the calculated Eco Route The higher the setting the longer the time allotment is for the route Have the system avoid freeways Have the system avoid tollroads Have the system avoid ferries or car trains Have the system use high occupancy vehicle lanes Navigation Have the system use guidance prompts Preferences Have the system automatically fill in State Province information MyLincoln Touch 405 Traffic Preferences Have the system display areas where roadwork occurs Have the system display areas where difficult conditions may occur Have th system display areas where snow and ice on the road may occur Have the system display any smog alerts Have the system display weather warnings Have the system display where there may be reduced visibility Have the system turn on your radio for traffic announcements Have the system avoid traffic problems automatical
121. Home Favorites Previous Destinations Point of Interest Emergency Street Address Intersection City Center Map Edit Route Cancel Route CLIMATE Press to select any of the following Driver Settings Recirculated Air Auto Dual Passenger Settings A C Defrost MyLincoln Touch 349 E SETTINGS Press to select any of the following Clock Display Sound Vehicle Settings Help HOME Press to access your home screen Depending on your vehicle s option package and software your screens may vary in appearance from the descriptions in this section Your features may also be limited depending on your market Check with your authorized dealer for availability INFORMATION Press to select any of the following SYNC Services Sirius Travel Link Alerts Calendar e SYNC Apps If the icon is yellow see Alerts in the Information section of this chapter ENTERTAINMENT Press to select any of the following AM FM SIRIUS CD USB BT Stereo SD Card A N In 350 MyLincoln Touch Using the Touchscreen To turn a feature on and off just touch the graphic with your finger To get the best performance from the touch sensitive controls e Make sure your hands are clean and dry e Press firmly on the center of a control graphic or menu item e Keep metal and other conductive material away from the surface of the touchscreen Using Your Audio and Climate Controls Depending on your veh
122. IN CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV S SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE TELENAV SOFTWARE SOME STATES AND OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU 6 Arbitration and Governing Law You agree that any dispute claim or controversy arising out of or relating to this Agreement or the Telenav Software shall be settled by independent arbitration involving a neutral arbitrator and administered by the American Arbitration Association in the County of Santa Clara California The arbitrator shall apply the Commercial Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association and the judgment upon the award rendered by the arbitrator may be entered by any court having jurisdiction Note that there is no judge or jury in an arbitration proceeding and the decision of the arbitrator shall be binding upon both parties You expressly agree to waive your right to a jury trial This Agreement and performance hereunder will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California without giving effect to its conflict of laws provisions To the extent judicial action is necessary in connection with the binding arbitration both Telenav and you agree to submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the County
123. ION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace 462 Index 911 Assist M uuuuusussss 393 Automatic transmission driving an automatic A Overdrive sssseseseeeeeeeee 172 fluid adding s 268 ABS see Brakes VER Pav eee 186 fluid checking NER 268 Accessing and using your fluid refill capacities 324 USB port 373 fluid specification 324 Accessing your calendar 393 Selectshift SST 174 Accessory delay o c g4 Auxiliary Input Jack 369 Adding pairing a phone 380 Auxiliary powerpoint 152 Airbag supplemental restraint A N inputs Viistae ness sap QUA Ve SIpIS ERN 346 377 SYSTEM cci isnan as utei aro Hed 45 Axle and child safety seats 47 lubricant specifications 324 descriplloTt iurc eee 45 refill capacities 324 disposal us etis e Een 52 driver airbag occi tpe 45 B passenger airbag 45 side airbag isses 45 47 Battery inicie eerte ce 270 Air cleaner filter 273 274 328 acid treating emergencies 270 d jumping a disabled Air filter sss 274 328 battery iecit ee 240 All Wheel Drive AWD main
124. If Equipped Refer to Blind Spot Information System BLIS with Cross Traffic Alert CTA in the Driving Aids chapter INTERIOR MIRROR WARNING Do not adjust the mirror when your vehicle is moving Note Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum or ammonia based cleaning products You can adjust the interior mirror to your preference Some mirrors also have a second pivot point This lets you move the mirror head up or down and from side to side Auto Dimming Mirror Note Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the mirror Mirror performance may be affected A rear center passenger or raised rear center head restraint may also block light from reaching the sensor The mirror will dim automatically to reduce glare when bright lights are detected from behind your vehicle It will automatically return to normal reflection when you select reverse gear to make sure you have a clear view when backing up Windows and Mirrors 97 CHILDMINDER MIRROR IF EQUIPPED On double bin overhead consoles the conversation mirror allows the driver to view the rear seating area WARNING Do not use the childminder mirror to view rearward traffic do not allow rear passengers to distract you from the driving task and make sure the rear view mirror has a clear view of rearward traffic Failure to do so could increase the risk of a crash from an unseen vehicle which may result in se
125. If the fuse is not blown and the brake lamps are working properly the following procedure will allow you to move the gearshift lever from P Park 1 Apply the parking brake turn the ignition key to the off position and remove the key 2 Starting at the rear of the trim panel using a screwdriver or similar tool carefully pry up the trim panel from rear attachments and disconnect it from the console to expose the inside of the gearshift 3 Locate the brake shift interlock lever on the passenger side of the shifter assembly 4 Apply the brake pedal Using a screwdriver or similar tool press and hold the brake shift interlock lever while pulling the gearshift lever out of the P Park position and into the N Neutral position 5 Install the trim panel 6 Apply brake pedal start the vehicle and release the parking brake See your authorized dealer as soon as possible if this procedure is used If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud or Snow Note Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur Note Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears stopping between shifts in a steady pattern Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear 178 Four Wheel Drive
126. It assumes a vehicle with only mandatory options no cargo internal or external a tongue load of 10 1596 conventional trailer or king pin weight of 15 25 fifth wheel trailer and driver only 150 Ib 68 kgD Consult your authorized dealer or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer for more detailed information Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight refers to the amount of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch Examples For a 5 000 Ib 2 268 kg conventional trailer multiply 5 000 by 0 10 and 0 15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 7750 Ib 227 to 340 kg For an 11 500 Ib 5 216 kg fifth wheel trailer multiply by 0 15 and 0 25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1 725 to 2 875 Ib 782 to 1 304 kg WARNING Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label WARNING Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower the vehicles GVWR and GAWR limitations Replacement tires with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations Load Carrying 217 WARNING Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in serious damage to the vehicle and or personal injury Steps for determining the correct load limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg o
127. Je91 di s popu pJ0 1 JO Yor oje duroo 40 jue eambo 10 E TX Jogrpojy uorjoup eAumpy JO TU gTT Zo p PPV IOM ur posJourqns useq seq o xe oy oum Aue pasueyo oq prnous jueoriqnr ore aur Joye ur peg81eurqns useq seu opxe ay 10 pormbal St oorAIos poyoodsns SI yea L sso un posueuo IO pox29uo oq 0 JOU ae sjueoriqni SL Sn 10 pegeotiqng peroprsuoo st pue JUBOLIQH e xe TBII orjeuqu s amp YIM per ST 9 Xe TEI Sa OTYoA MOX I9 009 ut3 ur ue YM peddmbo jt pue azis Jo o05 uo p seq Area amp eur suoneordde eurog Aroedeo g Arp ejeurxodde Apuo sojeorpur uonvogroods p1o q 328 Capacities and Specifications MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS Battery BXT 65 650 or BXT 65 750 if equipped Seat filter if equipped FS 104 WW 2234 front WW 1612 rear Motorcraft replacement parts are recommended for scheduled maintenance and are available at your Ford or Lincoln dealer or at fordparts com These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance emissions and durability Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts Windshield wiper blade Should a Motorcraft oil filter not be available use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE USCAR 36 For spark plug replacement contact an authorized dealer Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals Refer to scheduled maintenance
128. KS When these locks are set the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside The childproof locks are located on the rear edge of each rear door and must be set separately for each door Move the lock control up to engage the childproof lock Move it down to disengage the lock 34 Safety Belts PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION WARNING Always drive and ride with your seat back upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips i WARNING To reduce the risk of injury make sure children sit where they can be properly restrained fh WARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a crash WARNING All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided Failure to properly wear your safety belt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a crash people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safe
129. Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles for stopping Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower gears In emergency stopping situations apply the brake steadily Do not pump the brakes Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter for additional information on the operation of the Anti lock Brake System ABS Maintenance and modifications The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty and durable load carrying capability For this reason Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such as adding or removing parts such as lift kits or stabilizer bars or by using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle equipped with a high load or device such as ladder racks or pickup box cover Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty increase your repair cost reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities and adversely affect driver and passenger safety Frequent inspection of vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to heavy off road usage 186 Brakes GENERAL INFORMATION N
130. Note The doors will not autounlock if you electronically lock the vehicle after you switch the ignition off and before you open the driver door Enabling or Disabling Note You can enable or disable the autolock and autounlock features independently of each other You can enable or disable these features e through an authorized dealer e using the information display if equipped with this feature 70 Locks Illuminated Entry The interior lamps and select exterior lamps illuminate when you use the intelligent access key or the keyless entry keypad to unlock the vehicle The system will turn off the lights if e you switch the ignition on e you press the lock button on the remote control e you lock your vehicle using the keyless entry keypad e after 25 seconds of illumination The lights will not turn off if e you turn them on with the dimmer control e any door is open Illuminated Exit The interior lamps and select exterior lamps illuminate when all doors are closed and you switch off the ignition The lamps turn off if all the doors remain closed and e 25 seconds elapse e you press the START STOP button Battery Saver If you leave on the courtesy lamps dome lamps or headlamps the battery saver shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch off the ignition Accessory Mode Battery Saver for Intelligent Access Keys If you leave your vehicle in the run ignition state it will shut off once it detects a certai
131. OMPANY nor its suppliers shall be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process Limitations on Reverse Engineering Decompilation and Disassembly You may not reverse engineer decompile or disassemble nor permit others to reverse engineer decompile or disassemble the SOFTWARE except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation Limitations on Distributing Copying Modifying and Creating Derivative Works You may not distribute copy make modifications to or create derivative works based on the SOFTWARE except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation Single EULA The end user documentation for the DEVICE and related systems and services may contain multiple EULAs such as multiple translations and or multiple media versions e g in the user documentation and in the software Even if you receive multiple EULAs you are licensed to use only one 1 copy of the SOFTWARE SOFTWARE Transfer You may permanently transfer your rights under this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer of the DEVICE provided you retain no copies you transfer all of the SOFTWARE including all component parts the media and printed materials any upgrades and if applicable the Certificate s of Authenticity and the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA If the SOFTWARE is a
132. ONT2 REAR3 The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs S MANUAL FOR 200 KPA 29PSI ADDITIONAL SPARE T145 80D16 420 KPA 60 PSI INFORMATION P225 60R17 200 KPA 29 PSI XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX XX XXXX XXXX TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT SEATING CAPACITY TFRONT T REAR NOMBRE DE PLACES TOTAL 5 avant 2 4 ARRI RE 3 The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 492 kg or Le poids total des occupants et du chargement na doit jamais d pesser kg ou COLD TIRE PRESSURE TRE PRESSION DES SEE OWNER S PNEU PNEUS A FROID MANUAL FOR o co a ADDITIONAL P235 70R16 240 KPA 35 PSI INFORMATION REAR P235 70R16 240 KPA 35 Psi VOIR LE MANUEL c POUR PLUS DE sb ms T145 90R17 415 KPA 60 PSI RENSEIGNEMENTS XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX IHE F XXX XX XXXX XXXXA 214 Load Carrying CARGO Cargo Weight includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight including cargo and optional equipment When towing trailer tongue load or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight GAW Gross Axle Weight is the total weight placed on each axle front and rear including vehicle curb weight and all payload GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certificatio
133. PMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction 312 Wheels and Tires telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly The tire pressure monitoring system complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changing Tires with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System Note Each road tire is equipped with a tire pressure sensor located inside the tire and wheel assembly cavity The pressure sensor is attached to the valve stem The pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is not visible unless the tire is removed Take care when changing the tire to avoid damaging the sensor You should always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer Check the tire pressure periodically at least monthly using an accurate tire gauge See nflating Your Tires in this chapter Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System The tire pressure monitoring system measures pressure in your four road t
134. R NAME HERE CONTRACTOR MANUFACTURER SUPPLIER ADDRESS 425 West Randolph Street Chicago IL 60606 This Data is a commercial item as defined in FAR 2 101 and is subject to the End User License Agreement under which this Data was provided 1987 2013 HERE All rights reserved If the Contracting Officer federal government agency or any federal official refuses to use the legend provided herein the Contracting Officer federal government agency or any federal official must notify HERE prior to seeking additional or alternative rights in the Data Wi Fi hotspot data provided by JiWire 92013 JiWire Appendices 441 Gracenote Copyright CD and music related data from Gracenote Inc copyright 9 2000 2007 Gracenote Gracenote Software copyright 2000 2007 Gracenote This product and service may practice one or more of the following U S Patents 5 987 525 6 061 680 6 154 773 6 161 132 6 230 192 6 230 207 6 240 459 6 330 593 and other patents issued or pending Some services supplied under license from Open Globe Inc for U S Patent 6 304 523 Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote The Gracenote logo and logotype and the Powered by Gracenote logo are trademarks of Gracenote Gracenote End User License Agreement EULA This device contains software from Gracenote Inc of 2000 Powell Street Emeryville California 94608 Gracenote The software from Gracenote t
135. S its parent corporation Microsoft Corporation or their affiliates or subsidiaries For product support please refer to FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in the documentation for the DEVICE Should you have any questions concerning this EULA or if you desire to contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason please refer to the address provided in the documentation for the DEVICE No Liability for Certain Damages EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW FORD MOTOR COMPANY ANY THRID PARTY SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS MS MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE IN NO EVENT SHALL MS MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND OR THEIR AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U S TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS U S 250 00 e THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY EXPRESSLY BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW VEHICLE 430 Appendices End user notice Microsoft amp Windows Mobile for Automotive Important Safety Information This system Ford SYNC contains software that is licensed to Manufacturer FORD MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate of Microsoft Corporation pursuant to a license agreement Any removal reproduction reverse engineering or other unauthorized use of the software from this system in violation of the
136. THE LINCOLN MOTOR COMPANY i lincolnowner com lincolncanada com July 2014 First Printing Owner s Manual Lincoln Navigator Litho in U S A FSC MIX Paper FSC C102270 FL7J 19A321 AA z gt o gt fe a GLO Enue N S I9UA 2015 NAVIGATOR p ae M O a A Lo Owner s Manual THE LINCOLN MOTOR COMPANY i Table of Contents 1 Introduction 9 Child Safety 17 Installing child seats 2x ss sake hae dae beach RARE ne ee E 19 Booster seatS esc Gen G rk or uae XR G GU eS ne ad Gee wees 29 Child seat positioning iuo my wv ee GR REESE 32 Child safety locks llis 33 Safety Belts 34 Fastening the satety belts i v iva exc REESE eR RE E 36 Safety belt height adjustment llle 39 Safety belt warning light and indicator chime 40 Safety belt minder 0 0 0 ee ens Al Child restraint and safety belt maintenance 0 42 Supplementary Restraints System 43 Driver and passenger airbags 0 00 0002 e eee eee 45 Dide AIFDAGS ie ss bare ee Ae E RU ORE EE X ear Ca eee eS 47 Safety canopy curtain airbags 2 0 49 Crash sensors and airbag indicator llli 51 Airbag disposal eas soe amp ROREM Gta NU eR E WER Sic d 52 Keys and Remote Control 53 General information on radio frequencies 0000005 53 Remote control si 60h dame GOSS a RP RE DEG Deas Ete EX 54 Replacing a lost key or remote con
137. Telenav and its suppliers and licensors hereby reserve all of their respective rights other than the licenses explicitly granted in this Agreement 8 3 By using the Telenav Software you consent to receive from Telenav all communications including notices agreements legally required disclosures or other information in connection with the Telenav Software collectively Notices electronically Telenav may provide such Notices by posting them on Telenav s Website or by downloading such Notices to your wireless device If you desire to withdraw your consent to receive Notices electronically you must discontinue your use of the Telenav Software 8 4 Telenav s or your failure to require performance of any provision shall not affect that party s right to require performance at any time thereafter nor shall a waiver of any breach or default of this Agreement constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach or default or a waiver of the provision itself 8 5 If any provision herein is held unenforceable then such provision will be modified to reflect the intention of the parties and the remaining provisions of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect 8 6 The headings in this Agreement are for convenience of reference only will not be deemed to be a part of this Agreement and will not be referred to in connection with the construction or interpretation of this Agreement As used in this Agreement the words include and including
138. UTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or to the extent allowed by state law before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws This dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws IN CALIFORNIA U S ONLY California Civil Code Section 1793 2 d requires that if a manufacturer or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of attempts the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the consumer less a reasonable allowance for consumer use The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b presumes that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18000 mi 29 000 km whichever occurs first 1 Two or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR 2 Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconfor
139. Use caution when folding the seatback to the flat back position as the system will move forward when you lift the release handle WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to make sure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or crash Make sure that the head restraint is in the down position and no objects such as books purses or briefcases are on the floor in front of the second row seats before folding them down Move the front passenger seat forward so that the second row seat head restraint clears the front seat 1 Lower the head restraints by pulling on the strap 138 Seats 2 Locate handle on the side of the seat cushion by the door 3 Pull up on the handle and push the seat back forward toward the front of the vehicle To return the seat to the upright position D 1 Lift the seatback toward the rear of the vehicle 2 Rotate the seatback until you hear a click locking it in the upright position 3 Lift up on the head restraint until it locks into its original position Seats 139 Placing the Second Row Outboard 40 Seats in Cargo Mode 4 WARNING Use caution when folding the seatback to the flat back position as the system will move forward w
140. When you leave the vehicle always apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into park P WARNING You must remain in the vehicle once you have activated the hill start assist feature WARNING During all times you are responsible for controlling the vehicle supervising the hill start assist system and intervening if required WARNING If the engine is revved excessively or if a malfunction is detected when the hill start assist feature is active the hill start assist feature will be deactivated 188 Brakes Hill start assist keeps your vehicle stationary long enough to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal when your vehicle is on a slope The brakes are released automatically once the engine has developed sufficient drive to prevent the vehicle from rolling down the slope This is an advantage when pulling away on a slope for example from a car park ramp traffic lights or when reversing uphill into a parking space Using Hill Start Assist 1 Press the brake pedal to bring the vehicle to a complete standstill Keep the brake pedal pressed 2 If the sensors detect that the vehicle is on a slope the hill start assist feature will be activated automatically 3 When you remove your foot from the brake pedal the vehicle will remain on the slope without rolling away for approximately two or three seconds This hold time will automatically be extended if you are in the process of driving
141. a 12 volt supply to start your vehicle Note Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle s electrical system 1 Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making sure the two vehicles do not touch Set the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts 2 Check all battery terminals Remove the positive terminal cover if equipped and any excessive corrosion before you attach the battery cables Ensure that vent caps are tight and level 3 Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical surges Turn all other accessories off Roadside Emergencies 241 Connecting the Jumper Cables WARNING Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative terminal of the battery to be jumped A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery Note Do not attach the negative cable to fuel lines engine rocker covers the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points Note In the illustration the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate the assisting boosting battery 1 Connect the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery 2 Connect the other end of the positive 4 cable to the positive terminal of the assisting battery 3 Connect the negative cable to the negative terminal of the as
142. ace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Scheduled Maintenance 453 Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns Miveace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace 454 Scheduled Maintenance Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns Miveace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns
143. action required This message should disappear shortly If this message does not clear shortly or with an ignition key cycle your receiver may have a fault See an authorized dealer for service Tune to another channel or choose another preset Contact Sirius at 1 888 539 7474 to subscribe to the channel or tune to another channel The signal is blocked When you move into an open area the signal should return No action required The process may take up to three minutes Call Sirius at 1 888 539 7474 to resolve subscription issues 346 Audio System Radio displa None Found Check All the channels in the Use the channel guide Channel Guide selected category are to turn off the Lock or either skipped or Skip function on that locked station Subscription Updated Sirius has updated the No action required channels available for your vehicle MEDIA HUB The media hub is located in the center console and has the following features A g A Auxiliary input jack or B USB ports Q f E C SD card slot For more information see the MyLincoln Touch chapter MyLincoln Touch 347 GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against
144. ade Jump starting the vehicle llli Customer Assistance Reporting safety defects U S only 0 0000 Reporting safety defects Canada only 0 Fuses Changing a f 8e i vk ee wee ye oh A ue Fa Ey Pu uer ew Fuse specification chart s psss ssr cetar aa a ka aua a 6 Table of Contents Maintenance 260 General information 2s 44 hed ove e Cela a E xU E ESO we 260 Opening and closing the hood ssa ese lille 261 Under hood overview sies ser m RR Sa 262 Engine oil dipstick 223 chet abd eae Gas E OER ee ERS 263 Engine oil check sess RR RIDE EU DRESBREOG ES QA 263 Engine coolant Cheek cese ise acera ea eh eX E Ee 264 Automatic transmission fluid check 0 0 00 268 Brake fuid cheek 24 uiuo ter 64 94 E OE NI eg es 269 Fugl HITET prc cc 269 Washer fluid Cheeks 2 uus sepe dee be daos e eR REO 9 270 pina tee ses ch sede as fan etc Gh i ie wees Hee ee eee Tenet i aa 270 Checking the wiper blades 0 d rere rir iones 271 Changing the wiper blades 0 00000 eee eee 272 Air BILer S 35a pace a ea 9 Toe PRR ea Y Ed ds wae 273 Adjusting the headlamps issues ERREUR LEER ee Re 276 Changing bulb occ sers iera Re eR SESER EG ERE S Sep 277 Removing a headlamps sess bo ee t ep X 3 y R 278 Vehicle Care 281 Cleaning products 44 ES ea tbe deed eee bead ces 281 Cleaning thecexterioE c Rex rs RHONE ne Ux Rs 281 Wasting ii xe C4 beeen ee D Vege qub
145. afety devices The restraints control module also monitors the readiness of the above safety devices plus the crash and occupant sensors The readiness of the safety system is indicated by a warning indicator light in the instrument cluster or by a backup tone if the warning light is not working See the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The readiness light will either flash or stay lit N e The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after the ignition is turned on e A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem or light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently have the supplemental restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a crash The safety belt pretensioners and the airbag supplemental restraint system are designed to activate when the vehicle sustains frontal or sideways deceleration sufficient to cause the restraints control module to deploy a safety device or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor 52 Supplementary Restraints System The fact that the safety belt pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front seat occupants in a crash does not mean that something is wrong with the
146. afety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations Your vehicle s Restraint Safety System consists of e Driver and passenger dual stage airbag supplemental restraints Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners energy management retractors first row only and safety belt usage sensors e Driver seat position sensor Front crash severity sensors Supplementary Restraints System 45 e Restraints control module with impact and safing sensors e Restraint system warning light and backup tone e The electrical wiring for the airbags crash sensor s safety belt pretensioners front safety belt usage sensors driver seat position sensor and indicator lights How does the Restraint Safety System work The Restraint Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your vehicle s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant conditions A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides information to the restraints control module During a crash the restraints control module may activate the safety belt pretensioners and or either one or both stages of the dual stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash severity and occupant conditions SOS POST CRASH ALERT SYSTEM The system flashes the direction indicator lamps and the horn sounds intermittently in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag equipped on your vehicle The horn and lamps
147. aft Premium Glass Cleaner Canada only CXC 100 Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid Canada only CXC 37 A B D or F Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant United States only ZC 32 B2 Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner ZC 56 Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover United States only ZC 14 Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A CLEANING THE EXTERIOR Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash e Never use strong household detergents or soap such as dish washing or laundry liquid These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces e Never wash a vehicle that is hot to the touch or during exposure to strong direct sunlight e Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting 282 Vehicle Care e mmediately remove items such as gasoline diesel fuel bird droppings and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle s paintwork and trim over time Use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover e Note Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted surface if these substances come in contact with your vehicle wash it off as soon as possible e Remove any exterior accessories before entering a car was
148. ailure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if the correct air filter element is not used When changing the air filter element use only the air filter element listed See Motorcraft Part Numbers in the Capacities and Specifications chapter See Scheduled Maintenance Information for the appropriate intervals for changing the air filter element Note Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if the correct air filter element is not used 274 Maintenance Changing the Air Filter Element ea 1 Locate the mass air flow sensor electrical connector on the air outlet tube This connector will need to be unplugged 2 Unlock the locking clip on the connector connector shown from below for clarity then squeeze and pull the connector off of the air outlet tube 3 Clean the area around the air tube to air cover connection to prevent debris from entering the system and then loosen the bolt on the air tube clamp so the clamp is no longer snug to the air tube It is not necessary to completely remove the clamp 4 Pull the air tube off from the air cleaner housing Maintenance 275 5 Release the three clamps that secure the cover to the air filter housing Push the air filter cover toward the center of the vehi
149. also be balanced periodically An unbalanced tire and wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear Wheels and Tires 309 Tire Rotation Note If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation Note Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly A dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly is defined as a spare tire or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels If you have a dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation Note After having your tires rotated inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements Rotating your tires at the recommended interval as indicated in your scheduled maintenance information will help your tires wear more evenly providing better tire performance and longer tire life e Rear wheel drive E B8 e E B vehicles Four wheel drive vehicles front tires at left of diagram amp Eme Em Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires USING SNOW CHAINS WARNING Snow tires must be the same size load index speed rating as those originally provided by Ford Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in a
150. an extended period after cleaning the wheels with a wheel cleaner drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing so This reduces the risk of increased corrosion of the brake discs VEHICLE STORAGE If you plan on storing your vehicle for an extended period of time 30 days or more read the following maintenance recommendations to make sure your vehicle stays in good operating condition All motor vehicles and their components were engineered and tested for reliable regular driving Long term storage under various conditions may lead to component degradation or failure unless specific precautions are taken to preserve the components General e Store all vehicles in a dry ventilated place e Protect from sunlight if possible e If vehicles are stored outside they require regular maintenance to protect against rust and damage Body e Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt grease oil tar or mud from exterior surfaces rear wheel housing and underside of front fenders e Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposed locations e Touch up raw or primed metal to prevent rust e Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent discoloration Re wax as necessary when the vehicle is washed 290 Vehicle Care e Lubricate hood latch all door latches and trunk lid hinges with a light grade oil e Cover interior trim to prevent fading e Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents Engine
151. an take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the passenger sensing system resulting in serious injury or death in a crash Always sit upright against your seatback with your feet on the floor WARNING Do not recline the seatback as this can cause the occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in severe personal injury in the event of a crash WARNING Do not place objects higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of injury in a crash or during heavy braking or when stopping suddenly When you use them properly the seat head restraint safety belt and airbags will provide optimum protection in the event of a crash We recommend that you follow these guidelines e Do not recline the seatback more than 30 degrees from vertical Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine as far back as possible Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forward as possible remaining comfortable e Keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel We recommend a minimum of 10 inches 25 centimeters between your breastbone and the airbag cover e Hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent e Bend your legs slightly so that you can press the pedals fully Position the shoulder strap of the safety belt over the center of your shoulder and position the lap strap tightly across your hips Make sure that your driving position is com
152. anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap and the child restraint manufacturer recommends its use Ford also recommends its use BOOSTER SEATS WARNING Never place or allow a child to place the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a crash Use a belt positioning booster seat for children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child safety seat generally children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall are greater than age four 4 and less than age twelve 12 and between 40 pounds 18 kilograms and 80 pounds 36 kilograms and upward to 100 pounds 45 kilograms if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight 8 a height of 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall or 80 pounds 86 kilograms Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these questions when the child is seated without a booster seat e Can the child sit all the way back against their vehicle seat with knees bent comfortably at the edge of the seat cushion e Can the child sit without slouching 30 Child Safety e Does the lap belt rest low across the hips e Is the sh
153. and exterior lights Tires including spare for wear and proper pressure Windshield washer fluid level Check every six months Battery connections Clean if necessary Body and door drain holes for obstructions Clean if necessary Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength Door weatherstrips for wear Lubricate if necessary Hinges latches and outside locks for proper operation Lubricate if necessary Parking brake for proper operation Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function Safety warning lamps brake ABS airbag safety belt for operation Washer spray and wiper operation Clean or replace blades as necessary Scheduled Maintenance 447 Multi point Inspection In order to keep your vehicle running right it is important to have the systems on your vehicle checked regularly This can help identify potential issues and prevent major problems Ford Motor Company recommends the following multi point inspection be performed at every scheduled maintenance interval to help make sure your vehicle keeps running great Multi point inspection Accessory drive belt s Hazard warning system operation Battery performance Engine air filter Radiator cooler heater and A C hoses Exhaust system Suspension components for leaks or damage Exterior lamps operation Steering and linkage Fluid levels fill if necessary Tires including spare for wear and proper pressure For oil and fluid leaks Windshield for cracks
154. and generally may not provide adequate lighting during these conditions Failure to activate your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision To activate e The ignition must be in the on position e The lighting control must be in the off parking lamps or autolamps position 90 Lighting ADAPTIVE HEADLAMPS The headlamp beams move in the same direction as the steering wheel which provides more visibility when driving around curves A Without adaptive headlamps B With adaptive headlamps The system will only work with the lighting control switch in the autolamp position Note There is a delay of two to five seconds before the adaptive headlamp system will operate when the vehicle is driven Note The system is only active at speeds above 3 mph 5 km h Note The system has a power up movement check feature When your vehicle is started the lamps move inward and then back to their original position They then move to the right and then back to the original position again to alert the driver that the system is working properly Lighting 91 DIRECTION INDICATORS e Push down to activate the left turn signal e Push up to activate the right turn signal WELCOME LIGHTING The Lincoln welcome mat projection lights are on the bottom of the exterior mirror housings They project light onto the ground a short distance from you vehicle when welcome lighting or lighted entry turn
155. and grease 48000 km seals if non sealed bearings are used 2WD vehicles Every 60000 miles Change transfer case fluid Four wheel drive 96000 km vehicles Reset your Intelligent Oil Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change See the nstrument Cluster chapter 458 Scheduled Maintenance Special Operating Condition Log Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns Miteace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Scheduled Maintenance 459 Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns Miveace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Dearer VALI
156. and press the cloth onto the soiled area Allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes 5 Remove the soaked cloth then with a clean damp cloth use a rubbing motion for 60 seconds on the soiled area 6 Following this wipe area dry with a clean white cotton cloth 288 Vehicle Care CLEANING LEATHER SEATS IF EQUIPPED Note Follow the same procedure as cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather instrument panels and leather interior trim surfaces For routine cleaning wipe the surface with a soft damp cloth and a mild soap and water solution Dry the area with a clean soft cloth For cleaning and removing spots and stains such as dye transfer use Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available leather cleaning product for automotive interiors Note Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous area You should e Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner e Clean and treat spills and stains as soon as possible Do not use the following products as these may damage the leather Oil and petroleum or silicone based leather conditioners Household cleaners Alcohol solutions Solvents or cleaners intended specifically for rubber vinyl and plastics Motorcraft Note Do not use Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner ZC 56 on Lincoln Black Label Presidential or Reserve Leathers because it can damage these and other semi aniline leather seating fabrics It can also
157. and variations thereof will not be deemed to be terms of limitation but rather will be deemed to be followed by the words without limitation Appendices 437 9 Other Vendors Terms and Conditions The Telenav Software utilizes map and other data licensed to Telenav by third party vendors for the benefit of you and other end users This Agreement includes end user terms applicable to these companies included at the end of this Agreement and thus your use of the Telenav Software is also subject to such terms You agree to comply with the following additional terms and conditions which are applicable to Telenav s third party vendor licensors End User License Agreement For Distribution By HERE For North America APAC END USER TERMS The content provided Data is licensed not sold By opening this package or installing copying or otherwise using the Data you agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement If you do not agree to the terms of this agreement you are not permitted to install copy use resell or transfer the Data If you wish to reject the terms of this agreement and have not installed copied or used the Data you must contact your retailer or HERE North America LLC as defined below within thirty 80 days of purchase for a refund of your purchase price To contact HERE please visit www here com The Data is provided for your personal internal use only and may not be resold It is protected by c
158. any link does not imply an endorsement of the third party site by MS Microsoft Corporation their affiliates and or their designated agent e Obligation to Drive Responsibly You recognize your obligation to drive responsibly and keep attention on the road You will read and abide with the DEVICE operating instructions particularly as they pertain to safety and assumes any risk associated with the use of the DEVICE UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD MOTOR COMPANY separate from the DEVICE on media such as a ROM chip CD ROM disk s or via web download or other means and is labeled For Upgrade Purposes Only or For Recovery Purposes Only you may install one 1 copy of such SOFTWARE onto the DEVICE as a replacement copy for the existing SOFTWARE and use it in accordance with this EULA including any additional EULA terms accompanying the upgrade SOFTWARE INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE including but not limited to any images photographs animations video audio music text and applets incorporated into the SOFTWARE the accompanying printed materials and any copies of the SOFTWARE are owned by MS Microsoft Corporation FORD MOTOR COMPANY or their affiliates or suppliers The SOFTWARE is licensed not sold You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE AII title and intellectual Appendices 429 property rights
159. as current track artist name album and genre Options allows you to view and adjust various media settings e Sound Settings allows you to adjust settings for e Dass Midrange Treble Balance and Fade DSP Digital Signal Processing Occupancy Mode Speed Compensated Volume Note Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings e Media Player Settings allows you to select more settings which is under Media Player See Settings e Device Information displays software and firmware information about the currently connected media device e Update Media Index indexes your device each time you connect it to make sure you have the latest voice commands available for all media on the device Browse allows you to view the contents of the device It also allows you to search by categories such as genre artist or album If you want to view song information such as Title Artist File Folder Album and Genre touch the on screen album art You can also touch What s Playing to hear how the system pronounces the current band and song This can be helpful when using voice commands to make sure the system correctly plays your request MyLincoln Touch 375 SD Card and USB Voice Commands If you are listening to a USB device or an SD card press the us voice button on the steering wheel control When prompted say any of the commands in the following chart If you are not listening to a USB device or an SD card press the voice
160. assengers cargo or optional equipment Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket equipment PAYLOAD Payload is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is carrying The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire Label on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire Label Look for THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX Ib for maximum payload The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant If any aftermarket or authorized dealer installed equipment has been installed on the vehicle the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload Load Carrying 213 WARNING The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited either by volume capacity how much space is available or by payload capacity how much weight the vehicle should carry Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle do not add more cargo even if there is space available Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover Example only TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION SEATING CAPACITY TOTALS FR
161. ated headlamps The windshield wiper activated headlamps turn on within 10 seconds when you switch the windshield wipers on and the lighting control switch is in the autolamps position They will turn off approximately 60 seconds after you switch the windshield wipers off The headlamps will not turn on by wiper activation e During a single wipe e When the wipers are on to clear washer fluid during a wash condition e Ifthe wipers are in intermittent mode Note If you have autolamps and autowipers switched on the low beam headlamps will turn on automatically when the windshield wipers operate continuously Lighting 89 INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER Use to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel and all applicable lit components in the vehicle during headlamp and parking lamp operation e Tap the top or bottom of the control to brighten dim all interior lit components incrementally or Press and hold at the first position the top or bottom of the control until the desired lighting level is reached Press and hold the top of the control to the full on position to activate the dome on feature This will turn on the interior courtesy lights Press and hold the bottom of the control to turn off the interior courtesy lights DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS DRL WARNING Always remember to switch on your headlamps at dusk or during inclement weather The Daytime Running Lamp DRL system does not activate the tail lamps
162. ating or any combination of these factors consider refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lubricant if the axle is not already filled with it See the Capacities and Specifications chapter for the lubricant specification e Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached Anticipate stops and brake gradually e Avoid parking on a grade However if you must park on a grade 1 Turn the steering wheel to point your vehicle tires away from traffic flow 2 Set your vehicle parking brake 3 Place the automatic transmission in position P 4 Place wheel chocks in front and back of the trailer wheels Chocks not included with vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with a temporary or conventional spare tire A temporary spare tire is different in size diameter or width tread type All Season or All Terrain or is from a different manufacturer than the road tires on your vehicle Consult information on the tire label or Safety Compliance label for limitations when using Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal Watercraft PWC Note Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into the water Note Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after removing the trailer from the water When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval e Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of the rear bumper e Do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches 15 centimeter
163. ation Label affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position or Tire Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door B pillar The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door Bead area of the tire Area of the tire next to the rim Sidewall of the tire Area between the bead area and the tread Tread area of the tire Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle Rim The metal support wheel for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated Wheels and Tires 297 INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall Information on P Type Tires P215 65R15 95H is an example of a tire size load index and speed rating The definitions of these items are listed below Note that the tire size load index and speed rating for your vehicle may be different from this example A P Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association that may be used for service on cars sport utility vehicles minivans
164. ations chart in the Capacities and Specifications chapter Note The front and rear washer systems are supplied from the same reservoir State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol a common windshield washer antifreeze additive Washer fluids containing non methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle s paint finish wiper blades or washer system 270 Maintenance CHANGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY WARNING Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury Therefore do not allow flames sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery When working near the battery always shield your face and protect your eyes Always provide proper ventilation WARNING When lifting a plastic cased battery excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps resulting in personal injury and or damage to the vehicle or battery Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners WARNING Keep batteries out of reach of children Batteries contain sulfuric acid Avoid contact with skin eyes or clothing Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution In case of acid contact with skin or eyes flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention If acid is s
165. ature To adjust fan speed touch or next to the fan icon e Touch Rear again to close the rear controls Closing the rear climate control functions does not affect their current settings E Recirculated air Touch the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air When you select recirculated air the air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates This may reduce the time needed to cool the interior when used with A C and may reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle Note Recirculated air may turn off automatically or be prevented from turning on in all airflow modes except MAX A C to reduce risk of fogging F MAX A C Touch the button to maximize cooling Recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents air conditioning automatically turns on and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed G A C Touch the button to switch the air conditioning compressor on or off Use air conditioning with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency Note In certain conditions the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even after you switch off the air conditioning with the A C button H AUTO Touch the button to switch on automatic operation Select the desired temperature using the temperature control The system adjusts fan speed air distribution air conditioning operation and selects outside air or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle in ord
166. aves the station Sound returns when finished When switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory preset the sound mutes before the digital audio plays because the system has to reacquire the digital signal e Note As with any saved radio station you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is outside the station s reception area MyLincoln Touch 363 HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting Potential Reception Issues Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area the station may mute due to weak signal strength If you are listening to HD1 the system switches back to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again However if you are listening to any of the possible HD2 through HD7 multicast channels the station mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal again Station blending When the system first receives a station aside from HD2 HD7 multicast stations it first plays the station in the analog version Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio station it shifts to the digital version Depending on the station quality you may hear a slight sound change when the station changes from analog to digital Blending is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound In order to provide the best possible experience use the contact form to report any station issues found w
167. ay from the battery and all fuel related parts Maintenance 261 Working with the Engine Off 1 Set the parking brake and shift to P Park 2 Turn off the engine and remove the key if equipped 3 Block the wheels Working with the Engine On A WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running 1 Set the parking brake and shift to position P Park 2 Block the wheels OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD 1 Inside the vehicle pull the hood release handle located under the bottom of the instrument panel 2 Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latch that is tf located under the front center of the hood 3 Lift the hood until the lift cylinders hold it open 262 Maintenance UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW 3 5L V6 EcoBoost engine A B C D A Windshield washer fluid reservoir B Battery C Engine oil filler cap D Engine oil dipstick E Brake fluid reservoir F Engine coolant reservoir G Air filter assembly H Power distribution box Maintenance 263 ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK A MIN B MAX ENGINE OIL CHECK Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for checking the engine oil 1 Make sure the vehicle is on level ground 2 Turn the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan 3 Set
168. be later upgraded to interface with and or communicate with additional software and or systems provided by third party software and service suppliers The additional software and services of third party origin as well as associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation THRID PARTY SOFTWARE are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties The THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is licensed not sold All rights reserved e The MS SOFTWARE FORD SOFTWARE and THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE hereinafter collectively and individually will be referred to as SOFTWARE IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT EULA DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE This EULA grants you the following license e You may use the SOFTWARE as installed on the DEVICE and as otherwise interfacing with systems and or services provide by or through FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third party software and service providers 426 Appendices DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS Speech Recognition If the SOFTWARE includes speech recognition component s you should understand that speech recognition is an inherently statistical process and that recognition errors are inherent in the process Neither FORD MOTOR C
169. belt warning light and chime See Safety Belt Warning Light and Indicator Chime later in this chapter indicator See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator in the Supplemental Restraints System chapter The safety belt pretensioners are designed to activate in frontal near frontal and side crashes and in rollovers The safety belt pretensioners at the front seating positions are designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant s body when activated This helps increase the effectiveness of the safety belts In frontal crashes the safety belt pretensioners can be activated alone or if the crash is of sufficient severity together with the front airbags e Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness N 36 Safety Belts FASTENING THE SAFETY BELTS The front outboard and rear safety restraints in your vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts 1 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from until you hear a snap and feel it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle e 2 To unfasten press the release button and remove the tongue from the buckle P Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy WARNING Always ride and drive with your seatback upright and the safety belt properly fastened The lap portion of the safety belt should fit snug and be positioned low across the hips The shoulder portion of the sa
170. bination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode Safety Belt Extension Assembly WARNING Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso If the safety belt is too short when fully extended you can obtain a safety belt extension assembly from an authorized dealer Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt Manufacturer identification is on a label located either at the end of the webbing or on the retractor behind the trim Also use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended Safety Belts 39 SAFETY BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT WARNING Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and increase the risk of injury in a crash Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder To adjust the shoulder belt height 1 Squeeze the side release buttons and slide the height adjuster up or down 2 Pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place t amp Second Row Comfort Guide WARNING Position the safety belt comfort guide so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder Failur
171. brake pedal before driving your vehicle The power windows will not work during the remote start and the radio will not turn on automatically The parking lamps will remain on and your vehicle will run for 5 10 or 15 minutes depending on the setting See the nformation Displays chapter to select the duration of the remote start system Extending the Vehicle Run Time Repeat Steps 1 and 2 with your vehicle still running to extend the run time for another remote start duration If the duration is set to last 10 minutes the duration will extend by another 10 minutes beginning after what is left of the first activation time For example if your vehicle had been running from the first remote start for five minutes your vehicle will continue to run now for a total of 15 minutes Wait at least five seconds before remote starting after a vehicle shutdown Keys and Remote Control 59 Turning the Vehicle Off After Remote Starting Press the button once The parking lamps will turn off You may have to be closer to your vehicle than when starting due to ground reflection and the added noise of the running vehicle You can disable or enable the remote start system through the information display See the Information Display chapter REPLACING A LOST KEY OR REMOTE CONTROL You can purchase replacement or additional keys or remote controls from an authorized dealer A dealer can program the transmitters to your vehicle or you may be ab
172. button and after the tone say USB or SD card then any of the commands in the following chart Play audiobook lt name gt Play video podcast episode lt name gt Play podcast episode lt name gt If you have said you would like to browse your USB or SD card the system prompts you to specify what you would like to browse When prompted see the following Browse chart This command is only available in USB mode and are device dependent BROWSE All video podcasts All albums All videos 376 MyLincoln Touch Folder lt name gt All playlists All podcasts Video playlist lt name gt All TV shows Video podcast lt name gt All video playlists This command is only available in USB mode and are device dependent Supported Media Players Formats and Metadata Information SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player including iPod Zune plays from device players and most USB drives Supported audio formats include MP3 WMA WAV and AAC It is also able to organize your indexed media from your playing device by metadata tags Metadata tags which are descriptive software identifiers embedded in the media files provide information about the file If your indexed media files contain no information embedded in these metadata tags SYNC may classify the empty metadata tags as Unknown
173. c ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate for more information 14 Introduction LINCOLN AUTOMOTIVE FINANCIAL SERVICES U S ONLY Lincoln Automotive Financial Services offers a full range of financing and lease plans to help you acquire your vehicle If you have financed or leased your vehicle through Lincoln Automotive Financial Services thank you for your business For your convenience we offer a number of ways to contact us as well as help manage your account Phone 1 888 498 8801 For more information regarding Lincoln Automotive Financial Services as well as to access Account Manager please go to www LincolnAFS com REPLACEMENT PARTS RECOMMENDATION Your vehicle has been built to the highest standards using quality parts We recommend that you demand the use of genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts whenever your vehicle requires scheduled maintenance or repair You can clearly identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts by looking for the Ford FoMoCo or Motorcraft branding on the parts or their packaging Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs One of the best ways for you to make sure that your vehicle provides years of service is to have it maintained in line with our recommendations using parts that conform to the specifications detailed in this owner s manual Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these specifications Collision Repairs We hope that you never experience a collision but accidents do hap
174. cbe E E Dee vy des 283 Repairing minor paint damage llle 283 Cleaning the engine ss erso ss sor D kha epe OES a De ee eS 283 Cleaning the windows and wiper blades lisse 284 Cleaning the interior i406 cbse dank RC eder RO ER RR Ree eg 285 Cleaning the instrument panel and instrument cluster lens 287 Cleaning leather seats sea nea 2 2 288 Cleaning the alloy wheels ee terer dd eee eee eee 288 VehicleStorages s xe QE es e 3 RE tae ewes Pe ei ecd es Table of Contents 7 Wheels and Tires 292 recare PRIME LIC P TE 294 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 05 311 Changing a road wheel 0 00 00 00 cee eee eee 315 Technical specifications ia RR saa wae REDS ae a 322 Wheel lug nut torque 644 655 bead neee E Heed eek ERE YE 322 Capacities and Specifications 323 Engine specifications lille 323 Engine drivebeltz 2 403 4 eR oe he ene dea de deba moe 323 Part numbers ss aspere e WE eR ERU YE Bw RE REBASESIGE EAS 328 Vehicle identification number llle 329 Vehicle certification label llle 330 Transmission code designation lille 330 Accessories 331 JXGGBSSOLIGS uude d exero ced bodies gorge e E oy ede aoa d ss 381 Extended Service Plan 333 Audio System 336 Rear seat Controls seg edx ex YES GE we EGG Was 339 Satellite radio information llle 943 MyLincoln Touch 347 VOICE maze iint n PET 355 Listening to
175. ccess key is programmed to the system Max Number of Keys Programmed Displayed during spare key programming when the maximum number of keys have been programmed Information Displays 115 Keys and Intelligent Access Action Dererintion Messages Press Brake to Start Displayed when the start stop button is pressed without the brake pedal being applied This is a reminder that the brake pedal must be applied when the start stop button is pressed in order to start the engine Restart Now or Key is Needed Displayed when the start stop button is pressed to shut off the engine and a Intelligent Access Key is not detected inside the vehicle Accessory Power Active Displayed when the vehicle is in the accessory ignition state Starting System Fault This message is displayed when there is a problem with your vehicle s starting system See your authorized dealer for service Maintenance Messages Action Description LOW Engine Oil Pressure Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible turn off the engine Check the oil level If the warning stays on or continues to come on with your engine running contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is 10 or less Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0 Engine Coolant Overtemperature Displayed when the engine coolant temperature is excessively high 116 Information Displays to a powertrain malfunction l
176. certification label WARNING Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of your vehicle and could result in engine damage transmission damage structural damage loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and personal injury Note For information on electrical items such as fuses or relays see the Fuses chapter The load capacity of your vehicle is designated by weight not volume You may not necessarily be able to use all available space when loading your vehicle or trailer Towing a trailer places extra load on the engine transmission axle brakes tires and suspension Inspect these components before during and after towing Load Placement To help minimize how trailer movement affects your vehicle when driving e Load the heaviest items closest to the trailer floor e Load the heaviest items centered between the left and right side trailer tires e Load the heaviest items above the trailer axles or just slightly forward toward the trailer tongue Do not allow the final trailer tongue weight to go above or below 10 15 of the loaded trailer weight e Select a tow bar with the correct rise or drop When both the loaded vehicle and trailer are connected the trailer frame should be level or slightly angled down toward your vehicle when viewed from the side When driving with a trailer or payload a slight takeoff vibration or shudder may be present due to the increased payload we
177. ck button on the remote control Unlock the doors with the keyless entry pad Turn the ignition on with a valid key Press the panic button on the remote control The alarm system will still be armed but this shuts off the horn and turn lamps when the alarm is sounding Note If the driver s door is unlocked with a key a chime will sound when you open the door You will have 12 seconds to disarm the alarm using any of the actions above otherwise the alarm will trigger Steering Wheel 79 ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle is moving Note Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position Refer to Sitting in the Correct Position in the Seats chapter Use the control on the side of the steering column to tilt the position a Memory Feature The steering column positions are saved and recalled with the memory feature Refer to the Seats chapter Pressing the adjustment control during memory recall will cancel the operation The column will respond to the adjustment control Easy Entry and Exit Feature The column will move to the full up position when the ignition is switched off It will return to the previous position when the ignition is switched on This feature can be switched on or off in the information display 80 Steering Wheel AUDIO CONTROL Type One A Seek up or next B Volume up C Volume down B j A p Seek down o
178. cle and up slightly to release it 6 Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing 7 Install a new air filter element 8 Replace the air filter housing cover and secure the clamps Be careful not to crimp the filter element edges between the air filter housing and cover and ensure that the tabs on the edge are properly aligned into the slots 9 Slip the air tube onto the air filter housing and tighten the air tube clamp bolt snugly but do not overtighten it 10 Reconnect the mass air flow sensor electrical connector to the outlet tube Make sure the locking tab on the connector is in the locked position connector shown from below for clarity 276 Maintenance ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant If your vehicle has been in an accident an authorized dealer should check the alignment of your headlamps Vertical Aim Adjustment Before aim adjustment disable the air suspension system Refer to Message center in the Driver Controls chapter 1 Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface approximately 25 feet 7 6 meters away e A 8 feet 2 4 meters e B Center height of lamp to ground e C 25 feet 7 6 meters e D Horizontal reference line 2 Measure the height from the center of your headlamp indicated Vw by a 3 0 millimeter circle on the lens to the ground and mark an 8 foot 2 4
179. cle has travelled Trip Computer See Trip Computer in Information Displays Vehicle Settings and Personalization See Information Displays Instrument Cluster 101 WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATORS The following warning lamps and indicators will alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious Some lamps will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure they work If any lamps remain on after starting your vehicle refer to the respective system warning lamp for further information Note Some warning indicators appear in the information display and function the same as a warning lamp but do not display when you start your vehicle Anti Lock Braking System If it illuminates when you are driving this indicates a malfunction You will continue to have the normal braking system without ABS unless the brake warning lamp is also illuminated Have the system checked by your authorized dealer Battery If it illuminates while driving it indicates a malfunction Switch E off all unnecessary electrical equipment and have the system checked by your authorized dealer Brake System Ole It will illuminate when the parking brake is engaged and the aes ignition is on If it illuminates when you are driving check that the parking brake is not engaged If the parking brake is not engaged this indicates low brake fluid level or a brake system malfunction Have the system checked immediately by your authorized deale
180. com Push to interrupt Press the voice button at any time while connected to SYNC Services to interrupt a voice prompt or an audio clip such as a sports report and say your voice command Portable Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth enabled cellular phone number not your VIN Vehicle Identification Number You can pair and connect your phone to any vehicle equipped with SYNC Services and continue enjoying your personalized services SYNC Services Voice Commands E When a route has been downloaded non navigation systems i press the voice button on the steering wheel control When prompted say any of the following commands Next turn Route status Route summary 390 MyLincoln Touch SERVICES Update route Sirius Travel Link If Equipped and If Activated WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any hand held device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving Note In order to use Sirius Travel Link your vehicle must be equipped with navigation and your naviga
181. complete the roadside assistance identification card found in the centerfold of this warranty guide and retain for future reference Canadian roadside coverage and benefits may differ from the U S coverage If you require more information please refer to the coverage section of your warranty guide call us in Canada at 1 800 387 9333 or visit our website at www lincolncanada com Sykes Assistance Services Corporation administers the Roadside Assistance program You must receive covered services in Canada or the continental United States Coverage extends to vehicles that use public non seasonal annually traveled roadways Roadside Assistance coverage does not extend to vehicles involved in cross country driving logging autocross and any other form of off road use Well maintained roads and surfaces help ensure safe travel for the Supplier and allow their representatives to perform service as per the standard operating procedures In Remote Locations If our supplier cannot take your vehicle by road to the nearest authorized dealership transportation by rail or water may be necessary The program covers a tow to the dock or rail terminal and also to the dealership at the end of the trip For rail or water transportation however contact your authorized dealer to confirm if you are eligible for additional coverage before you authorize or pay for the service Call the Lincoln Roadside Assistance at 1 800 387 9333 for additional information
182. county maintained road no recoveries e Towing Lincoln eligible vehicles to the client s selling or preferred dealer within 100 miles 161 kilometers of the disablement location or to the nearest Lincoln dealer If a client requests a tow to a selling or preferred dealer that is more than 100 miles 161 kilometers from the disablement location the client shall be responsible for any mileage costs in excess of 100 miles 161 kilometers Roadside Assistance will include up to 200 coverage for a towed trailer if the disabled eligible vehicle requires service at the nearest authorized dealer If the towing vehicle is operational but the trailer is not then the trailer does not qualify for any roadside services 238 Roadside Emergencies Vehicles sold in the United States Using roadside assistance United States Lincoln vehicle clients who require Roadside Assistance call 1 800 521 4140 If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself Ford Motor Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest Lincoln dealership within 100 miles 161 kilometers To obtain reimbursement information United States Lincoln vehicle clients call 1 800 521 4140 Clients will be asked to submit their original receipts Vehicles Sold in Canada Getting Roadside Assistance Canadian clients who require roadside assistance call 1 800 387 9333 Vehicles Sold in Canada Using Roadside Assistance For your convenience you may
183. cted to the system are thrown from the vehicle 911 Assist Privacy Notice When you turn on 911 Assist it may disclose to emergency services that your vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut off Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators your vehicle location or other details about your vehicle or crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services If you do not want to disclose this information do not turn the feature on 396 MyLincoln Touch Vehicle Health Report If Equipped United States Only WARNING Always follow scheduled maintenance instructions regularly inspect your vehicle and seek repair for any damage or problem you suspect Vehicle Health Report supplements but cannot replace normal maintenance and vehicle inspection Vehicle Health Report only monitors certain systems electronically monitored by your vehicle and will not monitor or report the status of any other system such as brake lining wear Failure to perform scheduled maintenance and regularly inspect your vehicle may result in vehicle damage and serious injury Note Your Vehicle Health Report feature requires activation prior to use Visit www SYNCMyRide com to register There is no fee or subscription associated with Vehicle Health Report but you must register to use this feature
184. cturer Children who have outgrown or no Use a vehicle safety longer properly fit in a belt having the lap belt belt positioning booster seat snug and low across the generally children who are at hips shoulder belt least 4 ft 9 in 1 45 m tall or centered across the greater than 80 Ib 36 kg or shoulder and chest and 100 Ib 45 kg if recommended by seat back upright child restraint manufacturer e You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and toddlers in the U S and Canada e Many states and provinces require that small children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight a height of 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall or 80 pounds 36 kilograms Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements about the safety of children in your vehicle e When possible always properly restrain children twelve 12 years of age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in a front seating position Child Safety 19 INSTALLING CHILD SEATS Child Seats Use a child safety seat sometimes called an infant carrier convertible seat or toddler seat for infants toddlers or children weighing 40 pounds 18 kilograms or less generally age four or younger Using Lap and Shoulder Belts WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat
185. d steering column to allow easier exit and entry to the vehicle The driver seat automatically moves 2 inches 5 centimeters rearward when the transmission is in park P and you switch the ignition off The driver seat returns to the previous position when you switch the ignition on Enable or disable this feature through the information display See the Information Displays chapter for more information Seats 135 Climate Controlled Seats If Equipped Heated Seats WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaustion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the seat heater The seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion because this may cause the seat heater to overheat Do not puncture the seat with pins needles or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element which may cause the seat heater to overheat An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury Note Do not do the following e Place heavy objects on the seat e Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat Allow the seat to dry thoroughly The heated seats will only function when the engine is running To operate the heated seats
186. d 30 mph 50 km h or less if recommended by the chain manufacturer while using snow chains Drive cautiously If you hear the chains rub or bang against your vehicle stop and retighten the chains If this does not work remove the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed Do not use tire chains on dry roads Purchase chains or cables from a manufacturer that clearly labels body to tire dimension restrictions The snow chains or cables must be mounted in pairs on the rear tires only If you have any questions regarding snow chains or cables please contact your Ford Lincoln dealer Wheels and Tires 311 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM WARNING The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a substitute for manually checking tire pressure The tire pressure should be checked periodically at least monthly using a tire gauge See Inflating Your Tires in this chapter Failure to properly maintain your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure loss of control vehicle rollover and personal injury Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tir
187. d and reverse sensing replacing bulbs 278 SYSTEM 5 ater bestes 196 turning on and off 87 Four Wheel Drive vehicles 178 Head restraints s 129 GESCFIPUION Mere sceicvenseneeanscetnees 179 driving off road vee 180 Heated steering wheel 410 indicator light 178 Heating sermien 122 Fuel Help reote tees 409 CAP 167 Hili descent mode ssi 193 CAPACIOY rriei eir teg 324 i choosing the right fuel 163 Hill start assist 187 filler funnel AERIS Hours a tides leg 164 Homelink wireless control filling your vehicle with fuel 167 system c 147 filter specifications 269 Hood 261 fuel pump shut off ao 239 DUCI ausssveaaxxttuaebeue kuxvedei Free RN VE RUE octane rating 164 323 How to use voice commands 355 Index 465 I Lane change indicator see Turn signal 91 Ignition iai s 323 LATCH anchors ee 23 Illuminated visor mirror 98 Tiftgate odes cor der teat 71 Inspection maintenance I M Lights warning and indicator 101 TESTING ies edens 171 Listening to MUSIC recreire 358 Instrument panel Loading instructions 218 cleaning CETERIS 287 Load limits sss 212 CIUSEER NR 101 Locks s up panel ana 89 autoloGK iai eri tetti 69 No eu M ee GhildDEOOF i5 iri Intelligent Access Key
188. damage surrounding microfiber accent surfaces To clean Lincoln Black Label Presidential or Reserve Leather first vacuum the seats to remove loose dirt Then wipe the leather with a clean soft cloth dampened with lukewarm water and a mild soap Wipe the leather again with a slightly damp cloth to remove soap residue and dry with a soft cloth To maintain the leather s resiliency it should be cleaned whenever soiled CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS Note Do not use chrome cleaner metal cleaner or polish on wheels and wheel covers A clearcoat paint finish coats aluminum wheels and wheel covers In order to maintain their condition e Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner Use a sponge to remove heavy deposits of dirt and brake dust accumulation Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water when you have completed the cleaning process Vehicle Care 289 e To remove tar and grease use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover e Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or covers e Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims or covers e Industrial strength heavy duty cleaners or cleaning chemicals in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt could wear away the clearcoat finish over time e Do not use hydrofluoric acid based or high caustic based wheel cleaners steel wool fuels or strong household detergent e f you intend on parking your vehicle for
189. day before you drive check your tires If one looks lower than the others use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if required At least once a month and before long trips inspect each tire and check the tire pressure with a tire gauge including spare if equipped Inflate all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company WARNING Under inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking tread separation or blowout with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury Under inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance resulting in heat build up and internal damage to the tire It also may result in unnecessary tire stress irregular wear loss of vehicle control and accidents A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear Under inflation or over inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the tire The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure
190. delay is off Press the Settings button found on the navigation screen if equipped to set the camera delay feature to on or off Note The camera may not operate correctly under the following conditions e Nighttime or dark areas if one or both reverse lamps are not operating e The camera s view is obstructed by mud water or debris Clean the lens with a soft lint free cloth and non abrasive cleaner e The rear of the vehicle is hit or damaged causing the camera to become misaligned To access any of the rear view camera system settings make the following selections in the touch screen when the transmission is not in R Reverse Menu Vehicle Rear View Camera After changing a system setting the touch screen shows a preview of the selected features 200 Parking Aids Guidelines and the Centerline Note Fixed guidelines are only available when the transmission is in R Reverse Note The centerline is only available if fixed guidelines are on A Rear bumper p B Fixed guideline Red zone e N C Fixed guideline Yellow zone E D Fixed guideline Green zone p A E Centerline Always use caution while reversing Objects in the red zone are closest to your vehicle and objects in the green zone are further away Objects are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to the yellow or red zones Use the side view mirrors and rear view mirror to get better coverage on both sides a
191. ds in that direction In CD mode press these buttons to select the previous or next track VOL and Power Press this button to switch the system off and on Turn it to adjust the volume eerte Audio System 339 REAR AUDIO CONTROLS Your vehicle is equipped with rear seat audio controls This allows front and middle seat passengers to simultaneously control the vehicle media sources radio CD or SYNC EB A PETTIS A VOL Press this button to increase or decrease the volume of playing B MEDIA Press this button to scroll through available playing media such as AM AM2 FM1 FM2 FM3 SAT1 SAT2 SAT3 CD and SYNC sources USB SD card Bluetooth audio or Line in C Rear audio display See displayed time radio frequency Sirius radio channel or CD track D CLOCK Press this button to display the time briefly Press and hold the button to display the time until you release the button You can press the button to display the time even when the radio is off E SEEK Select the next or previous stored radio frequency station Sirius radio channel or CD track e n radio mode press and release the button to go to the next or previous memory preset Press and hold the button to fast seek down the radio frequency e In satellite radio mode press and release the button to go to the next or previous preset channel in SAT1 SAT2 and SAT3 Press and hold the button to fast seek down the channels e n C
192. e gt Ambient Lighting 2 Touch the desired color 3 Use the scroll bar to increase or decrease the intensity To turn the feature on or off press the power button Vehicle Health Report Turn Automatic Reminders on and off and set the mileage interval at which you would like to receive the reports Press for more information on these selections When done making your selections press Run Vehicle Health Report Now if you want your report Door Keypad Code To change the keypad code for your keyless entry keypad system 1 Press the Settings icon gt Vehicle gt Door Keypad Code 2 Enter your current factory code then when prompted enter your new code MyLincoln Touch 401 Camera Settings This menu allows you to access settings for your rear view camera Press the Settings icon gt Vehicle gt Camera Settings then select from the following settings e Enhanced Park Aids e Rear Camera Delay Enable Valet Mode Valet mode allows you to lock the system No information is accessible until the system is unlocked with the correct PIN 1 Press the Settings icon gt Vehicle gt Enable Valet Mode 2 Enter a four digit pin twice as prompted After you press Continue the system locks until you enter the PIN again Note If the system locks and you need to reset the PIN enter 3681 and the system unlocks Settings Access and adjust system settings voice features as well as phone navigation and wire
193. e condition a blocked sensor warning or low visibility warning will appear in the information display and the alert indicator illuminates in the appropriate mirror s The information display warning can be cleared but the alert indicator remains illuminated When the blockage is removed the system can be reset in two ways 1 when at least two objects are detected while driving or 2 turn the ignition key from on to off then back on If the blockage is still present after the key cycle the system senses again that it is blocked after driving in traffic Reasons for messages being displayed The radar surface is Clean the fascia area in front of the radar or dirty or obstructed remove the obstruction The radar surface is Drive normally in traffic for a few minutes to not dirty or obstructed allow the radar to detect passing vehicles so it can clear the blocked state 208 Driving Aids Reasons for messages being displayed Heavy rainfall snowfall No action required The system automatically interferes with the resets to an unblocked state once the radar signals rainfall snowfall rate decreases or stops Do not use BLIS and or CTA in these conditions System Limitations The BLIS and CTA systems do have their limitations situations such as severe weather conditions or debris build up on the sensor area may limit vehicle detection The following are other situations that may limit the BLIS e Certain maneuveri
194. e control and increase the risk of serious personal injury 236 Driving Hints WARNING Always make sure that the floor mats are properly attached to the retention posts in the carpet that are supplied with your vehicle Floor mats must be properly secured to both retention posts to make sure mats do not shift out of position WARNING Never place floor mats or any other covering in the vehicle foot well that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle WARNING Never place floor mats or any other covering on top of already installed floor mats Floor mats should always rest on top of vehicle carpeting surface and not another floor mat or other covering Additional floor mats or any other covering will reduce the pedal clearance and potentially interfere with pedal operation WARNING Check attachment of floor mats on a regular basis Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning or replacement WARNING Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while the vehicle is moving Objects that are loose can become trapped under the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control WARNING Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or attachment instructions can potentially cause interference with pedal operation causing a loss of vehicle control TT To install the floor mats position the floor
195. e has a remote start system See Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems MyKey distances do e The MyKey user is not using the MyKey not accumulate e An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys and created new MyKeys e The key system has been reset No MyKey functions e An admin fob is present at the vehicle start with the Intelligent e No MyKeys are created See Creating a Access key MyKey Locks 67 LOCKING AND UNLOCKING You can use the power door lock control or the remote control to lock and unlock your vehicle Power Door Locks A Unlock B Lock Remote Control You can use the remote control anytime your vehicle is not running Unlocking the Doors Two Stage Unlock n Press the button to unlock the driver door Press the button again within three seconds to unlock all doors The turn signals will flash Press and hold both the lock and unlock buttons on the remote control for four seconds to disable or enable two stage unlocking Disabling two stage unlocking allows all vehicle doors to unlock with one press of the button The turn signals will flash twice to indicate a change to the unlocking mode The unlocking mode applies to the remote control keyless entry keypad and intelligent access Intelligent access at the driver door unlocks all doors when you have disabled two stage unlocking Locking the Doors Press the button to lock all the doors The turn signals will A illuminate Press the button again wi
196. e inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended T
197. e liftgate i Y 4 area 8 A A Press B to lower the desired seatback Press A to return the seatback to its original position If the power third row seat is disabled after 10 minutes you can enable the seat by e Opening any door e Pressing the unlock button on the key fob e Pressing any keyless entry keypad button e Turning the ignition key Universal Garage Door Opener If Equipped 147 HOMELINK amp WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED WARNING Make sure that the garage door and security device are free from obstruction when you are programming Do not program the system with the vehicle in the garage WARNING Do not use the system with any garage door opener that does not have the safety stop and reverse feature as required by U S Federal Safety Standards this includes any garage door opener manufactured before April 1 1982 Note Make sure you keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future system programming Note We recommend that upon the sale or lease termination of your vehicle you erase the programmed function buttons for security reasons See Erasing the function button codes later in this section Note You can program a maximum of three devices To change or replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed you must first erase the current settings See Erasing the function button codes later in this section The unive
198. e only Ford recommended replacement fasteners Note Inspect the wheel pilot hole and mounting surface prior to installation Remove any visible corrosion or loose particles Capacities and Specifications 323 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS Engine BSL V6 EcoBoost Coil on plug Spark plug gap 0 030 0 033 inch 0 75 0 85 mm Compression ratio 10 0 1 DRIVEBELT ROUTING 1 The short drivebelt is on the first pulley groove closest to engine 2 The long drivebelt is on the second pulley groove farthest from engine 3 5L V6 EcoBoost engine ions t ica Capacities and Spec V 9V60GWSSM SAO OEMS OX 10 dS0 0 MS OX Za PTILEN SSM epeuep q TId8 0AO CSM qgTIde 0A q 660TA HS gSWISIC ISOHO Toso1ov GTX Me1910 0 N TY G909W SSM O T Wd TO 1010 OHEyIUAS ATM O amp MG AVS YEIN 10 TIO 1030 X pu9rq onoeuju g wntwealg 08 8 AVS 3J J510 0 X pein podq juepooo ezaedpruy ogued 3J 191030 A jueo2nqnrT J20 pue Surjerjouaq 3je124030 q 9sea18 umnprr asvely osodunq nmypy pmrjT exelg IPVA J030 N e LOG eo ueuuojiaq USIH LIION 14 9 3b 079 QUO Sursum 10D 3b Q 8T yeay ead AreyEXne YIM Joyerpel MO IOLI Aynp AaeoH CIS 2D 2b 9 81 jeou Tear Areyrxne IA JoyeIpel oseq z Jue ooo ourSurg SIoput Ao 0rT Suds pue og8utu 100p J9 U Jeng syorry yeas s10301 pue soqeld 1exugjs sayoyey sosuly MOAIOSaI UO XVN pue NIW usomeg Pog Seng 324
199. e to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt and increase the risk of injury in a crash The second row outboard lap and shoulder belt is equipped with a belt comfort guide This guide is attached to the quarter trim panel Use it to adjust the comfort of the shoulder belt for smaller occupants in the outboard second row seats IN 40 Safety Belts To adjust the comfort guide 1 Slip the shoulder belt into the belt guide the portion of the belt between the latch tongue and the D ring not the portion where the belt exits from the quarter trim panel 2 Slide the guide up or down along the webbing so that the belt is centered on the occupant s shoulder SAFETY BELT WARNING LIGHT AND INDICATOR CHIME This lamp illuminates and an audible warning will sound if the driver s safety belt has not been fastened when the vehicle s ignition is turned on Conditions of Operation The driver safety belt is not The safety belt warning light buckled before the ignition illuminates 1 Z minutes and the switch is turned to the on warning chime sounds 4 8 seconds position The driver safety belt is The safety belt warning light and buckled while the indicator warning chime turn off light is illuminated and the warning chime is sounding The driver safety belt is The safety belt warning light and buckled before the ignition indicator chime remain off switch is turned to the on
200. eased risk of loss of vehicle control injury or death If you have a dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly then it is intended for temporary use only This means that if you need to use it you should replace it as soon as possible with a road tire and wheel assembly that is the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged it should be replaced rather than repaired A dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly is defined as a spare tire or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels and can be one of three types 1 T type mini spare This spare tire begins with the letter T for tire size and may have Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall 316 Wheels and Tires 2 Full size dissimilar spare with label on wheel This spare tire has a label on the wheel that states THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above do not e exceed 50 mph 80 km h e load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the Safety Compliance Label e tow a trailer e use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire e use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time e use commercial car washing equipment e try to repair the dissimilar spare tire Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel
201. eck the pressure in your tire s 1 Make sure the tires are cool meaning they are not hot from driving even a mile Note If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot for example driven more than 1 mile 1 6 kilometers never bleed or reduce air pressure The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under inflated Note If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire s check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump It is normal for tires to heat up and the air pressure inside to go up as you drive 2 Remove the cap from the valve on one tire then firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure 3 Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure Note If you overfill the tire release air by pressing on the metal stem in the center of the valve Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge 4 Replace the valve cap 5 Repeat this procedure for each tire including the spare 304 Wheels and Tires Note Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the other tires For T type mini spare tires see the Dissimilar Spare Tire and Wheel Assembly Information section Store and maintain at 60 psi 4 15 bar For full size and dissimilar spare tires see Dissimilar Spare
202. ect and lubricate U joints Exceptions Every 60000 miles Change transfer case fluid Four wheel drive 96000 km vehicles 456 Scheduled Maintenance Extensive idling or low speed driving for long distances as in heavy commercial use such as delivery taxi patrol car or livery As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart service as required Every 60000 miles Replace spark plugs 96000 km Change transfer case fluid Four wheel drive vehicles Operating in dusty or sandy conditions such as unpaved or dusty roads service as required 8000 km abnormal noise wear looseness or drag measure tread depth Every 5000 miles Change engine oil and filter 8000 km or six months Every 60000 miles Change transfer case fluid Four wheel drive 96000 km vehicles Reset your Intelligent Oil Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change See the nstrument Cluster chapter Scheduled Maintenance 457 Off road operation Inspect frequently Inspect steering linkage ball joints and service as required U joints Lubricate if equipped with grease fittings Every 5000 miles 8000 km or six Inspect wheels and related components for months abnormal noise wear looseness or drag Rotate tires inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth Every 30000 miles Replace front wheel bearing grease
203. ed Settings Information Displays 111 INFORMATION MESSAGES Note Depending on the vehicle options equipped with your vehicle not all of the messages will display or be available Certain messages may be abbreviated or shortened depending upon which cluster type you have Press the OK button to acknowledge and remove some messages from the information display Other messages will be removed automatically after a short time Certain messages need to be confirmed before you can access the menus AdvanceTrac Traction ACD V DeSCEIDGDR Control Messages P Traction control off Traction Displays when the traction control control on system has been switched off or on See Using Traction Control Service AdvanceTrac Displays when the system has detected a condition that requires service Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible has been switched off Displays when the AdvanceTrac has been switched on Action Description Vehicle Alarm To Stop Alarm Start Displays when unauthorized entry into the vehicle has occurred Turn the ignition on to stop the alarm 112 Information Displays Battery and Charging System Action Description Messages Check Charging System Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch off the ignition Contact your authorized dealer Turn Power Off to Save Battery Displays to warn of a low 12 volt battery condition Turn off all unneeded electrical acces
204. ed by law or the trailer manufacturer 8 Drive the vehicle and trailer at 20 25 mph 32 40 km h for approximately 2 miles 3 kilometers to re level the suspension 9 Park your vehicle and trailer on a level surface 10 Measure the height to the top of your vehicles front wheel opening on the fender a second time This is H2 Towing 229 11 Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing bars so that the height of the front fender is approximately halfway between H1 and H2 12 Check that the trailer is level or slightly nose down toward the vehicle If it is not remove the trailer adjust the ball height accordingly and repeat Steps 5 11 Once the trailer is level or slightly nose down toward the vehicle e Lock the bar tension adjuster in place e Check that the trailer tongue securely attaches and locks onto the hitch e Install safety chains lighting and trailer brake controls as required by law or the trailer manufacturer Safety Chains Note Do not attach safety chains to the bumper Always connect the trailer s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers of your vehicle hitch To connect the trailers safety chains cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning tight corners Do not allow the chains to drag on the ground Trailer Brakes WARNING Do not connect a trailer s hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle s brake system Your vehicle may not have en
205. ed to the ground and the cable is slightly slack 5 Slide the retainer through the center of the spare tire wheel 6 With the vehicle on level ground p block both sides of the wheel AN v v gt p diagonally opposite other side and dr om Plo end of the vehicle to the wheel y G 226g hei E 105 eing changed Do not jack the db ad vehicle on a hill or incline 7 Turn off the deployable running boards See the Driving Aids chapter 8 Obtain the spare tire and jack tools from their storage locations 9 Use the tip of the jack handle to remove any wheel trim 10 Loosen each wheel lug nut one half turn counterclockwise but do not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground 320 Wheels and Tires 11 Position the jack according to the jack locator arrows found on the frame and turn the jack handle and extension tool assembly clockwise Note Use the frame rail as the jacking location point not the control arm 12 Raise the vehicle to provide sufficient ground clearance when installing the spare tire about 1 4 inch 6 millimeters e Front e Note Jack at the specified locations to avoid damage to the vehicle 13 Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench 14 Replace the flat tire with the spare tire making sure the valve stem is facing outward 15 Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered
206. eement shall be given full force and effect Governing Law The above terms and conditions shall be governed by the laws of the State of Illinois for Data for the Americas and or the Asia Pacific region or The Netherlands for Data for Europe the Middle East and Africa without giving effect to 1 its conflict of laws provisions or ii the United Nations Convention for Contracts for the International Sale of Goods which is explicitly excluded For any and all 440 Appendices disputes claims and actions arising from or in connection with the Data Claims you agree to submit to the personal jurisdiction of a the State of Illinois for Claims related to Data for the Americas and or the Asia Pacific region provided to you hereunder and b The Netherlands for Data for Europe the Middle East and or Africa provided to you hereunder Government End Users If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf of the United States government or any other entity seeking or applying rights similar to those customarily claimed by the United States government this Data is a commercial item as that term is defined at 48 C F R FAR 2 101 is licensed in accordance with this End not User License Agreement and each copy of Data delivered or otherwise furnished shall be marked and embedded as appropriate with the following Notice of Use and be treated in accordance with such Notice NOTICE OF USE CONTRACTOR MANUFACTURER SUPPLIE
207. eering linkage ball joints suspension tie rod ends driveshaft and U joints Lubricate if equipped with grease fittings Inspect wheels and related components for abnormal noise wear looseness or drag Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles 16000 kilometers between service intervals Reset your Intelligent Oil Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change See the nstrument Cluster chapter Scheduled Maintenance 451 Every 30000 miles Replace climate controlled heated and 48000 km cooled seat filter if equipped Replace engine air filter At 100000 miles Change engine coolant 160000 km Every 100000 miles Replace spark plugs 160000 km Every 150000 miles Change automatic transmission fluid and filter 240000 km Change front axle fluid Four wheel drive vehicles Change rear axle fluid vehicles Replace accessory drive belt s if not replaced within the last 100000 miles 160000 km These maintenance items can be performed within 3000 miles 4800 kilometers of the last oil change Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles 160000 kilometers then every three years or 50000 miles 80000 kilometers After initial inspection inspect every other oil change until replaced Inspect accessory drive belt s 452 Scheduled Maintenance Maintenance Schedule Log Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Mive
208. ehicle configuration listed in the chart below Note Make sure to take into consideration trailer frontal area Do not exceed e 36 5 feet 3 39 meters trailer frontal area for vehicles equipped with the standard towing package e 60 0 feet 5 57 meters trailer frontal area for vehicles equipped with the optional Heavy Duty package Note Exceeding this limitation may significantly reduce the performance of your towing vehicle Selecting a trailer with a low aerodynamic drag and rounded front design helps optimize performance and fuel economy Note For high altitude operation reduce the gross combined weight by 296 per 1000 feet 300 meters starting at the 1000 foot 300 meter elevation point 224 Towing Note Certain states require electric trailer brakes for trailers over a specified weight Be sure to check state regulations for this specified weight The maximum trailer weights listed may be limited to this specified weight as your vehicle s electrical system may not include the wiring connector needed to use electric trailer brakes Your vehicle may tow a trailer provided the maximum trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed for your vehicle configuration on the following chart To calculate the maximum loaded trailer weight for your vehicle 1 Start with the gross combined weight rating for your vehicle model and axle ratio See the following chart 2 Subtract all of the follow
209. emental component damage is incurred The fail safe distance depends on ambient temperatures vehicle load and terrain How Fail Safe Cooling Works If the engine begins to overheat the engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red hot area and The coolant temperature warning light will illuminate ei The service engine soon indicator will illuminate If the engine reaches a preset over temperature condition the engine will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation Each disabled cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine When this occurs the vehicle will still operate However e The engine power will be limited e The air conditioning system will be disabled Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine will completely shut down causing steering and braking effort to increase Once the engine temperature cools the engine can be restarted Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize engine damage 268 Maintenance When Fail Safe Mode is Activated WARNING Fail safe mode is for use during emergencies only Operate the vehicle in fail safe mode only as long as necessary to bring the vehicle to rest in a safe location and seek immediate repairs When in fail safe mode the vehicle will have limited power will not be able to maintain high speed operation and may completely shut down without warning potentially losing engine power pow
210. en met becomes active becomes inactive control mode is deactivated exceeds 20 MPH 82 KM H For Hill Descent Select Gear Displayed when hill descent control mode requires driver shift transmission into Driver Resume Control Displayed when the hill control mode requires the driver to resume control Hill Descent Control FAULT Displayed mien a Mil desteni system fault is present Hill Descent Control OFF System Displayed when hill descent control mode is disabled to cool the brake system Hill Descent Control Ready Displayed when hill descent control mode is activated 118 Information Displays Park Aid Messages Action Description Check Park Aid Displays when the transmission is in R Reverse and the park aid is disabled Check Rear Park Aid Displays when the transmission is in reverse R and the park aid is disabled Check Front Park Aid Displays when the system has detected a condition that requires service SeeParking Aid chapter Front Park Aid On Off Displays the park aid status Power Steering Messages Action Description Steering loss Stop safely The power steering system has detected a condition that requires service See an authorized dealer Steering fault Service now The power steering system has detected a condition within the power steering system that requires service immediately See an authorized dealer Steering assist fault Service The power steering system has required d
211. ent Please read these terms and conditions carefully before you use the Telenav Software Your use of the Telenav Software indicates that you accept these terms and conditions If you do not accept these terms and conditions do not break the seal of the package launch or otherwise use the Telenav Software These terms and conditions represent the agreement Agreement between you and Telenav Inc Telenav with respect to the Telenav Software including upgrades modifications or additions thereto collectively Telenav Software All references herein to you and your means you your employees agents and contractors and any other entity on whose behalf you accept these terms and conditions all of whom shall also be bound by this Agreement Additionally all of your account information as well as other payment and personal information provided by you to Telenav directly or through the use of the Telenav Software is subject to Telenav s privacy policy located at http www telenav com Telenav may revise this Agreement and the privacy policy at any time with or without notice to you You agree to visit http www telenav com from time to time to review the then current version of this Agreement and of the privacy policy 1 Safe and Lawful Use You acknowledge that devoting attention to the Telenav Software may pose a risk of injury or death to you and others in situations that otherwise require your undiv
212. er steering assist and power brake assist which may increase the possibility of a crash resulting in serious injury WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot You have limited engine power when in the fail safe mode so drive the vehicle with caution The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed operation and the engine will run rough Remember that the engine is capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine damage therefore 1 Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine 2 Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer 3 If this is not possible wait a short period for the engine to cool 4 Check the coolant level and replenish if low 5 Restart the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer Note Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases the chance of engine damage Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID CHECK Note Transmission fluid should be checked by an authorized dealer If required fluid should be added by an authorized dealer The automatic transmission does not have a transmission fluid dipstick Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled intervals for fluid checks and changes Your transmission does not consume fluid However the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not working p
213. er to maintain the desired temperature You can also use the AUTO button to switch off dual zone operation by touching and holding the button for more than two seconds 412 MyLincoln Touch I Heated rear window Turns the heated rear window on and off See Heated windows and mirrors in the Climate Control chapter J Defrost Touch the button to distribute air to the windshield vents and de mister Air distribution to instrument panel and footwell vents turn off You can use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice K Manual controls Touch these buttons to switch airflow from the windshield instrument panel or footwell vents on or off The system can distribute air through any combination of these vents L Driver settings Depending on your vehicle and option package you may have the following features e Touch the or to increase or decrease the air temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle e Touch the heated seat icon to switch the heated seat off and on if equipped e Touch the climate controlled seat icon to switch the climate controlled seat off and on if equipped e Touch MyTemp to select your preset temperature setpoint Touch and hold MyTemp to save a new preset temperature setpoint e If your vehicle is equipped with a heated steering wheel touch the heated steering wheel icon to warm the steering wheel Note If your vehicle is equipped with a wood trimmed steeri
214. er turn fasteners by turning them clockwise Hitches WARNING The trailer hitch on this vehicle is part of the vehicle rear crash safety structure Do not remove the trailer hitch Failure to follow this warning could compromise vehicle crash structure and increase the risk of injury in a rear end crash Do not use a hitch that clamps onto your vehicle s bumper Use a load carrying hitch You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10 1596 of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue Integrated Hitch Rating WARNING Towing trailers beyond the maximum tongue weight exceeds the limit of the towing system and could result in vehicle structural damage loss of vehicle control and personal injury Towing 227 The standard integrated hitch has two ratings depending on mode of operation e Weight carrying mode requires a draw bar and hitch ball The draw bar supports all the vertical tongue load of the trailer e Weight distributing mode requires an aftermarket weight distributing system which includes draw bar hitch ball spring bars and snap up brackets This system distributes the vertical tongue load of the trailer between the truck and the trailer Maximum trailer Maximum tongue weight weight 6300 Ib 2857 kg 630 Ib 285 kg Weight distributing 9000 Ib 4082 kg 900 Ib 408 kg Note These are hitch ratings only Actual vehicle ratings are dependent on engine transmission and axle combinations Weig
215. ery 400 pounds 180 kilograms of weight carried Driving Hints 235 e Add particular accessories to your vehicle e g bug deflectors rollbars or light bars running boards ski racks e Drive with the wheels out of alignment DRIVING THROUGH WATER WARNING Do not drive through flowing or deep water as you may lose control of your vehicle Note Driving through standing water can cause vehicle damage Note Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter Before driving through standing water check the depth Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom of the wheel hubs When driving through standing water drive very slowly and do not stop your vehicle Your brake performance and traction may be limited After driving through water and as soon as it is safe to do so e Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the brakes and to check that they work e Check that the horn works e Check that the exterior lights work e Turn the steering wheel to check that the steering power assist works FLOOR MATS WARNING Always use floor mats that are designed to fit the foot well of your vehicle Only use floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed Only use floor mats that are firmly secured to retention posts so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicl
216. ess the button to switch the air conditioning compressor on or off Use air conditioning with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency H Power Press the button to switch the system on and off Switching off the climate control system prevents outside air from entering the vehicle I AUTO Touch the button to switch on automatic operation Select the desired temperature using the temperature control The system adjusts fan speed air distribution air conditioning operation and selects outside air or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle in order to maintain the desired temperature You can also use the AUTO button to switch off dual zone operation by touching and holding the button for more than two seconds J Heated rear window Turns the heated rear window on and off See Heated windows and mirrors later in this chapter for more information K Defrost Press the button to distribute air to the windshield vents and de mister Air distribution to instrument panel and footwell vents turn off You can use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice L Driver climate controlled seat and heated seat if equipped Press the button to switch on the driver climate controlled and heated seat Press the button again to adjust the temperature of the seat 124 Climate Control AUXILIARY CLIMATE CONTROL IF EQUIPPED A B Cc D E The auxiliary climate controls are on the rear o
217. ess with the push button start system or the remote start system If your programmed intelligent access transmitters are lost or stolen and you do not have an extra coded key you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer Your dealer will erase the key codes from your vehicle and program new coded keys Store an extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any inconvenience See your authorized dealer to purchase additional spare or replacement keys Programming a Spare Intelligent Access Key See an authorized dealer to have additional keys programmed to your vehicle ANTI THEFT ALARM The system will warn you of unauthorized entry to your vehicle The turn signal lamps will flash and the horn will sound when e any door or the hood is opened without using the key or the remote control e the ignition is turned on with an invalid key Take all keys and remote controls to your authorized dealer if there is any potential alarm problem with your vehicle Arming the Alarm The system is ready to arm whenever the ignition is off Lock the vehicle to arm the alarm The turn signal lamps will flash once after locking the vehicle to indicate the alarm is in the pre armed mode and will become fully armed in 20 seconds 78 Security Disarming the Alarm To disarm the alarm do any of the following Press the power door unlock button within the 20 second pre armed mode Press the unlo
218. etermine if there is an update available MyLincoln Touch 423 Navigation Voice Commands EB When in navigation mode press the voice button on the i steering wheel control After the tone say any of the following commands Navigation system voice commands Cancel next waypoint Cancel route Destination Destination nearest lt POI category gt Destination nearest POI Navigation Navigation voice volume decrease Navigation voice volume increase Repeat instruction Show 3D Show heading up Show map Show north up Show route Show turn list Destination play nametags Voice guidance off Destination POI Voice guidance on Destination POI category Where am I Destination previous destination Destination street address Detour Help This command is only available when a navigation route is active if you have said the command Destination you may say any of the above commands or commands in the following Destination chart If you have said the command Navigation you may say any of the above commands or commands in the following Navigation chart DESTINATION lt POI category gt Favorites Home 424 MyLincoln Touch DESTINATION Help If you have said Destination you may say any of the commands in the Destina
219. f equipped shoulder belt guide on seat back if equipped child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors and attaching hardware should be inspected after a crash Read the child restraint manufacturer s instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information specific to the child restraint Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a crash be replaced However if the crash was minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly they do not need to be replaced Safety belt assemblies not in use during a crash should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted For proper care of soiled safety belts see Cleaning the Interior in the Vehicle Care chapter Supplementary Restraints System 43 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION WARNING Airbags do not inflate slowly or gently and the risk of injury from a deploying airbag is the greatest close to the trim covering the airbag module WARNING All occupants of your vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided Failure to properly wear your safety belt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back seat and always properly use appr
220. f a crash The release handle is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion Lift it to allow the seatback to be adjusted to the desired location Folding the Second Row Center 20 Seat System If Equipped WARNING To prevent possible damage to the seat or safety belts make sure that the safety belts are not buckled when moving the seat to the load floor position WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped underneath the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to make sure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or crash 1 Locate the release handle located in the upper left seatback and pull the handle to release the folding seat latch Seats 143 2 With the latch released the seatback can be lowered into the load floor position 3 To return the seat to the upright position lift the seatback until the latch is fully engaged Adjusting the Second Row Center 20 Seat If Equipped Note Move this seat forward to keep a child in a child restraint close to the front seat occupants Move the seat to the full rearward position when it is occupied by older children or adults including children in booster seats Lift the handle to move the seat forward or backward 144 Seats Rear Heated Seats If Equipped WARNING
221. f the center console Depending on your vehicle and option package you may not have all these controls on your auxiliary climate controls A Fan speed control Controls the volume of air circulated in the rear of your vehicle Adjust to select the desired fan speed B Driver side heated seat if equipped Press the button to cycle through the driver side rear heated seat settings of high low and off C Air distribution control Press these buttons to turn airflow from the ceiling center or floor vents on or off The system can distribute air through any combination of these vents D Passenger side heated seat if equipped Press the button to cycle through the passenger side rear heated seat settings of high low and off E Temperature control Controls the temperature of the airflow in your vehicle Adjust to select the desired temperature F Fan speed lock Illuminates to indicate the front climate control system is controlling rear fan speed Climate Control 125 GENERAL OPERATING TIPS General Hints Note Prolonged use of recirculated air may cause the windows to fog up Note You may feel a small amount of air from the footwell air vents regardless of the air distribution setting Note To reduce humidity build up inside your vehicle do not drive with the system switched off or with recirculated air always switched on Note Do not place objects under the front seats as this may interfere with the airflow to
222. fety belt should be positioned across the chest Pregnant women should also follow this practice See the following figure Safety Belts 37 Pregnant women should always wear their safety belts The lap belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt should be positioned low across the hips below the belly and worn as tight as comfort will allow The shoulder belt should be positioned to cross the middle of the shoulder and the center of the chest Safety Belt Locking Modes WARNING After any vehicle crash the safety belt system at all passenger seating positions must be checked by an authorized dealer to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still functioning properly In addition all safety belts should be checked for proper function WARNING The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the safety belt assembly automatic locking retractor feature or any other safety belt function is not operating properly when checked by an authorized dealer Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in crashes All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts The driver safety belt has the first type of locking mode The front outboard passenger and rear seat safety belts have both types of locking modes described as follows Vehicle Sensitive Mode This is the normal retractor mode which allows free shoulder belt length
223. fication Caller ID Other features such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook download are phone dependent features To check your phone s compatibility see your phone s user manual and visit www SYNCMyRide com www SYNCMyRide ca or www syncmaroute ca 380 MyLincoln Touch Pairing Your Phone for the First Time WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any hand held device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving The first thing you must do to use the phone features of SYNC is to pair your Bluetooth enabled cellular phone with SYNC This allows you to use your phone in a hands free manner Note Put the transmission in position P Turn on your vehicle ignition and the radio 1 Touch Add Phone in the upper left corner of the touchscreen Find SYNC appears on the screen and instructs you to begin the pairing process from your device 2 Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and that your cellular phone is in the proper mode See your phone s manual if necessary e Select SYNC and a six digit PIN appears o
224. flating your tires When putting air into your tires such as at a gas station or in your garage the tire pressure monitoring system may not respond immediately to the air added to your tires It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph 82 km h for the light to turn off after you have filled your tires to the recommended inflation pressure How temperature affects your tire pressure The tire pressure monitoring system monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic tire While driving in a normal manner a typical passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi 14 to 28 kPa from a cold start situation If the vehicle is stationary overnight with the outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime temperature the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi 21 kPa for a drop of 30 F 17 C in ambient temperature This lower pressure value may be detected by the system as being significantly lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the system warning light for low tire pressure If the low tire pressure warning light is on visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat If one or more tires are flat repair as necessary Check air pressure in the road tires If any tire is under inflated carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where air can be added to the tires Inflate all the tires to the recommended inflation pressure Wheels and Tires 315 CHANGING A
225. flushed or the engine coolant to be replaced e DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle Make sure the correct coolant is used Mixing of engine coolants may harm your engine s cooling system The use of an improper coolant may harm engine and cooling system components and may void the warranty 266 Maintenance e n case of emergency a large amount of water without engine coolant may be added in order to reach a vehicle service location In this instance the cooling system must be drained chemically cleaned with Motorcraft Premium Cooling System Flush and refilled with engine coolant as soon as possible Water alone without engine coolant can cause engine damage from corrosion overheating or freezing e Do not use alcohol methanol brine or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze coolant Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing e Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine coolant Unscrew the cap slowly Any pressure will escape as you unscrew the cap Add prediluted engine coolant meeting the Ford specification See Capacities amd Specifications for more information Whenever coolant has been added the coolant level in the coolant reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle If necessary add enough prediluted engine coolant
226. fog belt lamps Fuel pump AN Hazard reset warning flasher Heated rear Interior window luggage compartment Jack release T BgEgS E E F yr Fuse compartment HE Introduction 11 ymbol Low tire Maintain pressure correct fluid warning level Parking aid Parking system brake system Power Power steering fluid windows front and rear Service i i L BU Stability engine soon AVE control Windshield x Windshield defrost and washer and demist wiper DATA RECORDING Service Data Recording Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and storing diagnostic information about your vehicle This potentially includes information about the performance or status of various systems and modules in the vehicle such as engine throttle steering or brake systems In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada and service and repair facilities may access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle Additionally when your vehicle is in for service or repair Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada and service and repair facilities may access or share among them data for vehicle improvement purposes For U S only if equipped if you choose to use the SYNC Vehicle Health Report you consent that certain diagnostic information may also be acce
227. fortable and that you can maintain full control of your vehicle Seats 129 HEAD RESTRAINTS WARNING Fully adjust the head restraint before you sit in or operate your vehicle This will help minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash Do not adjust the head restraint when your vehicle is moving WARNING The adjustable head restraint is a safety device Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted when the seat is occupied Failure to adjust the head restraint properly could reduce its effectiveness during certain impacts WARNING Install the head restraint properly to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash Note Adjust the seatback to an upright driving position before adjusting any head restraint Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the back of your head For occupants of extremely tall stature adjust the head restraint to its full up position 130 Seats A Front Seat Head Restraints The head restraints consist of A An energy absorbing head restraint B Two steel stems C Guide sleeve adjust and release button D Guide sleeve unlock and remove button Adjusting the Head Restraint Raise Pull up the head restraint Lower 1 Press and hold button C 2 Push down on the head restraint Remove 1 Pull up the head restraint until it reaches
228. fuel filler door and remove any visible debris from the fuel fill opening 4 Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the fuel fill funnel provided with the vehicle several times to dislodge any debris and or allow the inlet to close properly If this action corrects the problem the message may not reset immediately It may take several driving cycles for the message to turn Off A driving cycle consists of an engine start up after four or more hours with the engine off followed by city highway driving Continuing to drive with the message on may cause the service engine soon lamp to turn on as well 168 Fuel and Refueling FUEL CONSUMPTION Filling the Tank The advertised capacity is the indicated capacity and the empty reserve combined Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty Empty reserve is the amount of fuel in the tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty Note The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank For consistent results when filling the fuel tank e Turn the ignition off before fueling an inaccurate reading results if the engine is left running e Use the same
229. g off the climate control system prevents outside air from entering the vehicle B Passenger settings e Touch the or to increase or decrease the air temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle e Touch the heated seat icon to switch the heated seat off and on if equipped e Touch the climate controlled seat icon to switch the climate controlled seat off and on if equipped e Touch DUAL to switch separate passenger side temperature controls off and on When you switch off DUAL the passenger side temperature changes to match the driver side temperature Note The passenger side temperature and the DUAL indicator automatically turn on when the passenger is adjusting their temperature control MyLincoln Touch 411 C Fan speed Touch or to increase or decrease the volume of air circulated in your vehicle Note When the system is controlling the fan speed automatically all the fan speed indicators turn off D Rear Touch to access the rear climate control Rear climate control settings appear at the bottom of the screen e Touch the power icon to turn the rear climate control functions off and on e Touch Rear Control to allow the rear seat passengers to adjust the rear climate settings Touch it again to prevent the rear seat passengers from adjusting the settings Rear Control automatically turns off when you use the touchscreen to adjust the rear climate settings e Touch or to adjust the temper
230. g on an expressway or highway followed by 20 minutes of stop and go driving with at least four 30 second idle periods Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the engine Then start the engine and complete the above driving cycle The engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature Once the engine is started do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete If the vehicle is still not ready for I M testing the above driving cycle will have to be repeated 172 Transmission AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the off position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle WARNING Do not use the tow haul feature when driving in icy or slippery conditions as the increased engine braking can cause the rear wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around with the possible loss of vehicle control Your vehicle has been designed to improve fuel economy by reducing fuel using while coasting or decelerating When you take your foot off the accelerator pedal and the vehicle begins to slow down the torque converter clutch locks up and aggressively shuts off fuel flow to the engine while decelerating This fuel economy benefit may be perceived as a light to medium braking sensation when removing your foot from the accelerator pedal This vehicle is equipped with an Adaptive Trans
231. g the instrument panel dimming control Edit Wallpaper e You can have your touchscreen display the default photo or upload your own Uploading Photos for Your Home Screen Wallpaper Note You cannot load photos directly from your camera You must access the photos either from your USB mass storage device or from an SD card Note Photographs with extremely large dimensions such as 2048 x 1536 may not be compatible and appear as a blank black image on the display Your system allows you to upload and view up to 32 photos To access press the Settings icon Display Edit Wallpaper and then follow the system prompts to upload your photographs Only the photograph s which meets the following conditions display e Compatible file formats are as follows jpg gif png bmp e Each file must be 1 5 MB or less e Recommended dimensions 800 x 384 400 MyLincoln Touch Sound Press the Settings icon Sound then select from the Thy following Sound Settings Bass Speed Compensated Volume Set Balance and Fade p If equipped Vehicle Press the Settings icon Vehicle then select from the Thy following Ambient Lighting Vehicle Health Report Door Keypad Code Camera Settings Enable Valet Mode Ambient Lighting If Equipped When activated ambient lighting illuminates footwells and cupholders with a choice of colors To access and make adjustments 1 Press the Settings icon gt Vehicl
232. g your hands from the wheel Appendices 431 Prolonged Views of Screen Do not access any function requiring a prolonged view of the screen while you are driving Pull over in a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention Even occasional short scans to the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted away from your driving task at a critical time Volume Setting Do not raise the volume excessively Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving Driving while unable to hear these sounds could cause an accident Use of Speech Recognition Functions Speech recognition software is inherently a statistical process which is subject to errors It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system and address any errors Navigation Features Any navigation features included in the system are intended to provide turn by turn instructions to get you to a desired destination Please make certain all persons using this system carefully read and follow instructions and safety information fully Distraction Hazard Any navigation features may require manual non verbal setup Attempting to perform such set up or insert data while driving can seriously distract your attention and could cause an accident or other serious consequences Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner
233. ge or personal injury WARNING Do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged cheater adapters There is a risk of electrical shock Note The heater is most effective when outdoor temperatures are below O F 18 C The heater acts as a starting aid by warming the engine coolant This allows the climate control system to respond quickly The equipment includes a heater element installed in the engine block and a wire harness You can connect the system to a grounded 120 volt A C electrical source We recommend that you do the following for safe and correct operation e Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord that is product certified by Underwriter s Laboratory or Canadian Standards Association This extension cord must be suitable for use outdoors in cold temperatures and be clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor Appliances Never use an indoor extension cord outdoors it could result in an electric shock or become a fire hazard e Use as short an extension cord as possible e Do not use multiple extension cords Starting and Stopping the Engine 161 e Make sure that when in operation the extension cord plug and the heater cord plug connections are free and clear of water This could cause an electric shock or fire e Make sure your vehicle is parked in a clean area clear of combustibles e Make sure the heater heater cord and extension cord are firmly connected e Check for heat a
234. ght or the temperature warning light fluid leaks strange odors smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust to enter the vehicle Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust system inspected and repaired immediately Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine By law vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures repairs services sells leases trades vehicles or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not 170 Fuel and Refueling permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working Information about your vehicle s emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine This decal also lists engine displacement Please consult your warranty information for complete emission warranty information On board Diagnostics OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine s emission control system This system is commonly known as the on board diagnostics system OBD II The OBD II system protects the environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards The OBD II system also assists your authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle When the service engine soon indicator illuminates the OBD II system has detected a malfunction Temporary malfunc
235. gt Listen to text messages Messages Mute call Pair phone Privacy on Read text message Reply to text messages Turn ringer off Turn ringer on Unmute call Help This command is only available during an active call If you have said Messages see the following Messages chart MESSAGES Listen to text messages Reply to text messages 386 MyLincoln Touch INFORMATION If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation touch the i Information button to access these features If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation touch the corner of the touchscreen with the green tab Under the Information menu you can access features such as A SYNC Services B Sirius Travel Link C Alerts D Calendar E SYNC Applications SYNC Services If Equipped United States Only Note SYNC Services varies by trim level and model year and may require a subscription Traffic alerts and turn by turn directions available in select markets Message and data rates may apply Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change or discontinue this product service at any time without prior notification or incurring any future obligation Note SYNC Services requires activation before use Visit www SYNCMyRide com to register and check your eligibility for complimentary services Standard phone and message rates may apply Subscription may be
236. h Stripes or Graphics if equipped Do not use a commercial or high pressure wand on the surface or edge of stripes and graphics This can cause damage to the film and cause the edge of the film to peel away from the vehicle surface Exterior Chrome Note Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as they can scratch the chrome surface Note Do not use chrome cleaner metal cleaner or polish on wheels and wheel covers e Wash the vehicle first using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash e Use Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner Apply the product as you would a wax to clean bumpers and other chrome parts allow the cleaner to dry for a few minutes then wipe off the haze with a clean dry rag e Do not apply cleaning product to hot surfaces and do not leave cleaning product on chrome surfaces for a period of time exceeding that which is recommended e Note Using other non recommended cleaners can result in severe and permanent cosmetic damage Underbody Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently Keep body and door drain holes free from packed dirt Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts Use only approved products to clean plastic parts e For routine cleaning use Motorcraft Detail Wash e f tar or grease spots are present use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover Vehicle Care 283 WAXING Regular waxing is necessary to protect the paint on y
237. h electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly after you have traveled 50 miles 80 kilometers e When stopped in congested or heavy traffic during hot weather place the gearshift in position P to aid engine and transmission cooling and to help air conditioning performance e Turn off the speed control with heavy loads or in hilly terrain The speed control may turn off automatically when you are towing on long steep grades e Shift to a lower gear when driving down a long or steep hill Do not apply the brakes continuously as they may overheat and become less effective e f your transmission is equipped with a Grade Assist or Tow Haul feature use this feature when towing This provides engine braking and helps eliminate excessive transmission shifting for optimum fuel economy and transmission cooling e If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac with RSC this system may turn on during typical cornering maneuvers with a heavily loaded trailer This is normal Turning the corner at a slower speed while towing may reduce this tendency e If your vehicle is equipped with Continuous Controlled Damping Suspension CCD Suspension you can select NORMAL or SPORT drive control modes for better experience while towing a trailer See the Information Displays chapter for details on selecting driving modes Towing 231 e f you are towing a trailer frequently in hot weather hilly conditions at the gross combined weight r
238. h on and off the road Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case On 4WD vehicles the transfer case allows you to select between different 4WD modes when necessary Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures can be found in this chapter Information on transfer case maintenance can be found in the Maintenance chapter You should become thoroughly familiar with this information before you operate your vehicle 4WD when you select a 4WD mode uses all four wheels to power the vehicle This increases traction enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two wheel drive vehicle cannot Basic Operating Principles In Special Conditions e Do not use 4x4 on dry hard surfaced roads Doing so will produce excessive noise increase tire wear and may damage drive components 4WD modes are only intended for consistently slippery or loose surfaces e Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering characteristics of your vehicle e Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by loose sand water gravel snow or ice If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement e f your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement slow down but avoid severe brake application ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface e t may be safer to sta
239. hannel multicast preset or The station is not when recalling a direct tune is not available in your preset or from a direct available in your current location tune current reception area Text information does Data service issue by Fill out the station not match currently the radio broadcaster issue form at website playing audio listed below There is no text Data service issue by Fill out the station information shown for the radio broadcaster issue form at website currently selected listed below frequency HD2 HD7 stations not Pressing Scan disables No action required found when Scan is HD2 HD7 channel This is normal pressed search behavior http www ibiquity com automotive report radio station experiences HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp U S and foreign patents HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp Ford Motor Company and iBiquity Digital Corp are not responsible for the content sent using HD Radio technology Content may be changed added or deleted at any time at the station owner s discretion Audio System 343 SATELLITE RADIO INFORMATION IF EQUIPPED Satellite Radio Channels Sirius broadcasts a variety of music news sports weather traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels For more information and a complete list of Sirius satellite radio channels visit www siriusxm com in
240. harp objects Note If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper fascia leaving it misaligned or bent the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms Note If your vehicle is equipped with MyKey it is possible to prevent turning the sensing system off Refer to the MyKey chapter Note When a trailer is connect to your vehicle the Rear Sensing System may detect the trailer and provide warnings It is suggested that the driver disables the Rear Sensing System when a trailer is connected to your vehicle to prevent these warnings 196 Parking Aids The sensing system warns the driver of obstacles within a certain range of the bumper area The system turns on automatically whenever the ignition is switched on When receiving a detection warning the radio volume is reduced to a predetermined level After the warning goes away the radio volume returns to the previous level Using the Front and Rear Sensing System Rear Sensing System The rear sensors are only active when the transmission is in R Reverse As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle the rate of the audible warning increases When the obstacle is fewer than 10 inches 25 centimeters away the warning sounds continuously If a stationary or receding object is detected farther than 10 inches 25 centimeters from the side of the vehicle the tone sounds for only three seconds Once the system detects an p approaching
241. has been submerged in water California fuel filter replacement If the vehicle is registered in California the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life Ford Motor Company however urges you to have all recommended maintenance services performed at the specified intervals and to record all vehicle service Hot climate oil change intervals Vehicles operating in the Middle East North Africa Sub Saharan Africa or locations with similar climates using an American Petroleum Institute APD Certified for Gasoline Engines Certification mark oil of SM or SN quality the normal oil change interval is 5000 miles 8000 kilometers If the available API SM or SN oils are not available then the oil change service interval is 3000 miles 4800 kilometers Engine air filter replacement Engine air filter life is dependent on exposure to dusty and dirty conditions Vehicles operated in these conditions require frequent inspection and replacement of the engine air filter Scheduled Maintenance 461 ENGINE COOLANT CHANGE RECORD Initial change Six years or 100000 miles 160000 km whichever comes first After initial change Every three years or 50000 miles 80000 km Engine Coolant Change Log Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDAT
242. he Gracenote Software enables this device to do disc and music file identification and obtain music related information including name artist track and title information Gracenote Data from online servers Gracenote Servers and to perform other functions You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End User functions of this device This device may contain content belonging to Gracenote s providers If so all of the restrictions set forth herein with respect to Gracenote Data shall also apply to such content and such content providers shall be entitled to all of the benefits and protections set forth herein that are available to Gracenote You agree that you will use the content from Gracenote Gracenote Content Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non commercial use only You agree not to assign copy transfer or transmit the Gracenote Content Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data except in a Tag associated with a music file to any third party YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT GRACENOTE DATA THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN You agree that your non exclusive licenses to use the Gracenote Content Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions If your licenses terminate you agree to cease any and all use of the
243. he Settings icon gt Clock 2 Press and to adjust the time From this screen you can also make other adjustments such as 12 or 24 hour mode activate GPS time synchronization and have the system automatically update for new time zones You can also turn the outside air temperature display on and off It appears at the top center of the touchscreen next to the time and date The system automatically saves any updates you make to the settings MyLincoln Touch 399 Display You can adjust the touchscreen display through the touchscreen or by pressing the voice button on your steering wheel controls and when prompted say Display settings Press the Settings icon Display to access and make adjustments using the touchscreen e Brightness allows you to make the screen display brighter or dimmer e Auto DIM when set to On lets you use the Auto Dim Manual Offset feature When set to Off screen brightness does not change e Mode allows you to set the screen to a certain brightness or have the system automatically change based on the outside light level or turn the display off e f you select AUTO or NIGHT you have the options of turning the display s Auto Dim feature on or off and changing the Auto Dim Manual Offset feature e Auto Dim Manual Offset allows you to adjust screen dimming as the outside lighting conditions change from day to night This feature also allows you to adjust screen brightness usin
244. he belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6 22 Child Safety 8 Remove remaining slack from the belt Force the seat down with extra weight for example by pressing down or kneeling on the child restraint while pulling up on the shoulder belt in order to force slack from the belt This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that will exist once the extra weight of the child is added to the child restraint It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child seat to your vehicle Sometimes a slight lean toward the buckle will provide extra help to remove remaining slack from the belt 9 Attach the tether strap if the child seat is equipped See Using Tether Straps in this chapter 10 Before placing the child in the seat forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place To check this grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back There should be no more than 1 inch 2 5 centimeters of movement for proper installation Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician to make certain the child restraint is properly installed In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a Child Passenger Safety Technician Child Safety 23 Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren LATCH WARNING Never attach two child safety seats to the same anchor In a crash one anchor may not
245. hen a driving condition activates the stability system I MB The stability control off light temporarily illuminates on engine H EE start up and stays on when the traction control system is turned off or if a problem occurs in the stability system 190 Stability Control PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION WARNING Vehicle modifications involving braking system aftermarket roof racks suspension steering system tire construction or wheel and tire size may change the handling characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance of the AdvanceTrac system In addition installing any stereo loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the AdvanceTrac system Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from the front center console the tunnel and the front seats in order to minimize the risk of interfering with the AdvanceTrac sensors Reducing the effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac system could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death WARNING Remember that even advanced technology cannot defy the laws of physics It s always possible to lose control of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions Aggressive driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage Activation of the AdvanceTrac system is an indication that at least some of the
246. hen a trailer is not connected Trailer Brake Module Fault Displays and is accompanied by a single chime in response to faults sensed by the TBC Trailer Connected Displays when a correct trailer connection is sensed during a given ignition cycle Trailer Disconnected Displays when a trailer connection becomes disconnected either intentionally or unintentionally and has been sensed during a given ignition cycle Disregard this status if your vehicle is not equipped with a factory installed trailer brake controller This message may appear when an aftermarket TBC is used even when the trailer is connected Trailer Sway Reduce Speed Displays when the trailer sway control has detected trailer sway Wiring Fault On Trailer Displays if there are certain faults in your vehicle wiring and the trailer wiring or brake system Trailer Brake Gain XX X Displays the current gain setting from the trailer brake Trailer Lighting Module Fault See There is a fault with your vehicle Manual trailer lighting module See Towing a Trailer Lamps stop lamp Check your lamp Trailer Left Turn Lamps Fault There is a fault with your trailer Check Lamps turn lamp Check your lamp Information Displays 121 Check Lamps turn lamp Check your lamp Lamps park lamp Check your lamp Trailer Battery Not Charging See There is a fault with your trailer Manual battery See Towing a Trailer Action Description Transmission not in Par
247. hen select D the CD tab You can also advance and reverse the current track or current folder if applicable Repeat Touch this button to repeat the currently playing track all tracks on the disc or turn the feature off if already on Shuffle Touch this button to play the tracks or entire albums in random order or turn the feature off if already on Scan Touch this button to hear a brief sampling of all available tracks More Info Touch this button to see disc information 372 MyLincoln Touch Options Sound Settings allows you to adjust settings for Bass Midrange Treble Balance and Fade DSP Digital Signal Processing Occupancy Mode Speed Compensated Volume Note Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings Compression allows you to turn the compression feature on and off Browse Touch this button to look through all available CD tracks CD Voice Commands EB If you are listening to a CD press the voice button on the i steering wheel control When prompted say any of the commands in the following chart If you are not listening to a CD press the voice button and after the tone say CD then any of the commands in the following chart Repeat off Repeat track Play next track Shuffle Repeat folder This applies to WMA or MP3 files only MyLincoln Touch 373 SD Card Slot and USB Port SD Card Slot Note Your SD card slot is spring loaded To re
248. hen you lift the release handle 4 WARNING Always return the seat from the kneel position prior to raising the seatback Failure to do so could result in personal injury Place the second row seats in a kneel down load floor position to allow more cargo space To place the seats in the cargo mode 1 Fold down the second row seat 2 Pull the cargo mode lever up to release the seat into a kneel down load floor position Returning to the upright position from full lowered load floor position You cannot return the seatback to the upright position until the seat is returned from the kneel down position To return the seat to the upright position 1 Push the seat rearward until the latch is engaged 2 Return the seatback to the upright position 140 Seats Adjusting the Second Row Outboard 40 Seat for E Z Entry WARNING Always latch the vehicle seat to the floor whether the seat is occupied or empty If not latched the seat may cause injury during a sudden stop WARNING After using the E Z Entry feature make sure there are not any objects cargo or the feet of a third row occupant under the second row seat when latching the seat to the floor Injury to the third row occupants feet or damage to the seat may occur WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pul
249. hich it is being used placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster seat Check with the booster seat manufacturer s instructions 32 Child Safety CHILD SEAT POSITIONING WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat Never place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the vehicle seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back When possible all children age 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat WARNING Always carefully follow the instructions and warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child s size height weight or age Follow the child restraint manufacturer s instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by your vehicle manufacturer A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized is inappropriate for your child s height age or weight or does not properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death WARNING Never let a passenger hold a chi
250. hile listening to a station broadcasting with HD Radio technology Independent entities own and operate each station These stations are responsible for making sure all audio streams and data fields are accurate Potential station issues Isue Cause Action Echo stutter skip or This is poor time No action required repeat in audio alignment by the radio This is a broadcast Increase or decrease broadcaster issue in audio volume 364 MyLincoln Touch Potential station issues Isue Case Action Sound fading or The radio is shifting No action required blending in and out between analog and The reception issue digital audio may clear up as you continue to drive There is an audio The digital multicast is No action required mute delay when not available until the This is normal selecting HD2 or HD3 HD Radio broadcast is behavior Wait until multicast preset or decoded Once the audio is available Direct Tune decoded the audio is available Cannot access HD2 or The previously stored No action required HD3 multicast channel multicast preset or The station is not when recalling a direct tune is not available in your preset or from a direct available in your current location tune current reception area Text information does Data service issue by Fill out the station not match currently the radio broadcaster issue form at website playing audio listed below There is no
251. ht distributing Hitch Vehicles without Automatic Leveling Suspension WARNING Do not adjust a weight distributing hitch to any position where the rear bumper of the vehicle is higher than it was before attaching the trailer Doing so will defeat the function of the weight distributing hitch which may cause unpredictable handling and could result in serious personal injury When hooking up a trailer using a weight distributing hitch always use the following procedure 1 Park your vehicle without the trailer on a level surface 2 Measure the height of the top of your vehicle s front wheel opening on the fender This is H1 3 Attach the trailer to your vehicle without the weight distributing bars connected 4 Measure the height of the top of your vehicle s front wheel opening on the fender a second time This is H2 5 Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing bars so that the height of the front fender is approximately halfway between H1 and H2 6 Check that the trailer is level or slightly nose down toward your vehicle If not adjust the ball height accordingly and repeat Steps 2 6 228 Towing Once the trailer is level or slightly nose down toward the vehicle e Lock the bar tension adjuster in place e Check that the trailer tongue securely attaches and locks onto the hitch e Install safety chains lighting and trailer brake controls as required by law or the trailer manufacturer Weight dist
252. ic and private lands by treading lightly Driving on hilly or sloping terrain Note Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep slopes or hills Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up or down a hill or steep incline you should always try to drive straight up or straight down A danger lies in losing traction slipping sideways and possibly rolling over Whenever driving on a hill determine beforehand the route you will use Do not drive over the crest of a hill without 184 Four Wheel Drive If Equipped seeing what conditions are on the other side Do not drive in reverse over a hill without the aid of an observer When climbing a steep slope or hill start in a lower gear rather than downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling If you do stall out do not try to turn around because you might roll over It is better to back down to a safe location Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill Too much power will cause the tires to slip spin or lose traction resulting in loss of vehicle control Descend a hill in the same gear you would use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive brake application and brake overheating Do not descend in neutral instead disengage overdrive or manually shift to a lower gear When descending a steep hill avoid sudden hard braking as you cou
253. icator will turn on in the instrument cluster Changing the Set Speed e Press and hold SET or SET Release the button when you reach the desired speed Press and release SET or SET The set speed will change in approximately 1 mph 2 km h increments e Press the accelerator pedal or brake pedal until you reach the desired speed Press and release SET Canceling a Set Speed Tap the brake pedal The set speed will not be erased Resuming a Set Speed Press and release RES Switching Off Cruise Control Note The set speed is erased when you turn off cruise control Press OFF or turn off the ignition 204 Driving Aids BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM BLIS WITH CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT CTA IF EQUIPPED WARNING To help avoid injuries NEVER use the BLIS as a 5 replacement for using the interior and exterior mirrors and looking over your shoulder before changing lanes BLIS is not a replacement for careful driving BLIS aids the driver in detecting vehicles that may have entered the blind spot zone A The detection area is on both sides of the vehicle u extending rearward from the exterior mirrors to approximately 10 feet 8 meters beyond the bumper The system alerts you if certain vehicles enter the blind spot zone while driving CTA warns the driver of vehicles approaching from the sides when the transmission is in R Reverse Note BLIS is not designed to
254. ices suppliers their affiliates and or their designated agent may use this information solely to improve their products or to provide customized services or technologies to you MS Microsoft Corporation FORD MOTOR COMPANY third party software and systems suppliers their affiliates and or their designated agent may disclose this information to others but not in a form that personally identifies you e Internet Based Services Components The SOFTWARE may contain components that enable and facilitate the use of certain Internet based services You acknowledge and agree that MS Microsoft Corporation FORD MOTOR COMPANY third party software and service suppliers their affiliates and or their designated agent may automatically check the version of the SOFTWARE and or its components that you are utilizing and may provide upgrades or supplements to the SOFTWARE that may be automatically downloaded to your DEVICE e Additional Software Services The SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR COMPANY third party software and service suppliers MS Microsoft Corporation their affiliates and or their designated agent to provide or make available to you SOFTWARE updates supplements add on components or Internet based services components of the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain your initial copy of the SOFTWARE Supplemental Components If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party software and services suppliers provide or make available to you Supplemental Com
255. icle and option package you may also have these controls on your bezel e Power Switch the media or climate features off and on e VOL Control the volume of playing media e Seek and Tune Use as you normally would in media modes e PRESETS Press and hold a numbered button to store a radio or Sirius station Press to recall the stored station Eject Eject a CD from the entertainment system e Climate control Control the temperature fan speed and settings of the climate control system e MEDIA Touch repeatedly to see all available media sources If not on an audio screen the media change appears in the lower left status bar Using Your Steering Wheel Controls Depending on your vehicle and option package you can use your steering wheel controls to interact with the touchscreen system e VOL Control the volume of audio output e VOICE Press to start a voice session Press again and hold to end a voice session e SEEK and PHONE SEND e While in radio mode press to seek between presets or press and hold to seek between stations e While in USB or CD mode press to seek between stations or press and hold to fast seek e While in phone mode press to answer a call or switch between calls e SEEK and PHONE END e While in radio mode press to seek between presets or press and hold to seek between stations e While in USB or CD mode press to seek between stations or press and hold to fast seek e While in phone mode press to end a
256. ided attention and you therefore agree to comply with the following when using the Telenav Software a observe all traffic laws and otherwise drive safely b use your own personal judgment while driving If you feel that a route suggested by the Telenav Appendices 433 Software instructs you to perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver places you in an unsafe situation or directs you into an area that you consider to be unsafe do not follow such instructions c do not input destinations or otherwise manipulate the Telenav Software unless your vehicle is stationary and parked d do not use the Telenav Software for any illegal unauthorized unintended unsafe hazardous or unlawful purposes or in any manner inconsistent with this Agreement e arrange all GPS and wireless devices and cables necessary for use of the Telenav Software in a secure manner in your vehicle so that they will not interfere with your driving and will not prevent the operation of any safety device such as an airbag You agree to indemnify and hold Telenav harmless against all claims resulting from any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use of the Telenav Software in any moving vehicle including as a result of your failure to comply with the directions above 2 Account Information You agree a when registering the Telenav Software to provide Telenav with true accurate current and complete information about yourself and b to inform Telenav prompt
257. if a you retain no copies of the Data b the recipient agrees to the terms of this End User License Agreement and c you transfer the Data in the exact same form as you purchased it by physically transferring the original media e g the CD ROM or DVD you purchased all original packaging all Manuals and other documentation Specifically Multi disc sets may only be transferred or sold as a complete set as provided to you and not as a subset thereof Additional License Limitations Except where you have been specifically licensed to do so by HERE in a separate written agreement and without limiting the preceding paragraph your license is conditioned on use of the Data as prescribed in this agreement and you may not a use this Data with any products systems or applications installed or otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles capable of vehicle navigation positioning dispatch real time route guidance fleet management or similar applications or b with or in communication with including without limitation cellular phones palmtop and handheld computers pagers and personal digital assistants or PDAs This Data may contain inaccurate or incomplete information due to the passage of time changing circum stances sources used and the nature of collecting comprehensive geographic Data any of which may lead to incorrect results No Warranty This Data is provided to you as is and you agree to use it at your
258. ight You can find more information about proper trailer loading and setting your vehicle up for towing under Load limit in the Load Carrying chapter You can also find information in the RV and Trailer Towing Guide available at your authorized dealer Towing 223 TRAILER SWAY CONTROL WARNING Turning off trailer sway control increases the risk of loss of vehicle control serious injury or death Ford does not recommend disabling this feature except in situations where speed reduction may be detrimental such as hill climbing the driver has significant trailer towing experience and can control trailer sway and maintain safe operation Note This feature does not prevent trailer sway but reduces it once it begins Note This feature cannot stop all trailers from swaying Note In some cases if vehicle speed is too high the system may turn on multiple times gradually reducing vehicle speed This feature applies your vehicle brakes at individual wheels and if necessary reduces engine power If the trailer begins to sway the stability control light flashes and the message TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED appears in the information display The first thing to do is slow your vehicle down then pull safely to the side of the road and check for proper tongue load and trailer load distribution See the Load Carrying chapter for specific loading information RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS Note Do not exceed the trailer weight for your v
259. ilding footprints and railways 3D landmarks appear as clear visible objects that are typically recognizable and have a certain tourist value The 3D landmarks appear in 3D map mode only Coverage varies and improves with updated map releases Change the appearance of the map display by repeatedly pressing the arrow button in the upper left corner of the screen It toggles between three different map modes Heading up North up and 3D Heading up 2D map always shows the direction of forward P travel to be upward on the screen This view is available for map scales up to 2 5 miles 4 kilometers The system remembers this setting for larger map scales but shows the map in North up only If the scale returns below this level the system restores Heading up 420 MyLincoln Touch North up 2D map always shows the northern direction to be upward on the screen 3D map mode provides an elevated perspective of the map This viewing angle can be adjusted and the map can be rotated 180 degrees by touching the map twice and then dragging your finger along the shaded bar with arrows at the bottom of the map View switches between full map street list and exit view in route guidance Menu displays a pop up box that allows direct access to navigation settings View Edit Route Sirius Travel Link Guidance Mute and Cancel Route When the light on the button illuminates the feature is on The speaker button appears on the
260. ileage based schedule the vehicle lets you know when an oil change is due by displaying ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE REQUIRED in the information display The following table is intended to provide examples of vehicle use and its impact on engine oil change intervals it is provided as a guideline only Actual engine oil change intervals depend on several factors and generally decrease with severity of use When to expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message Vehicle use and examples 7500 10000 miles Normal commuting with highway driving 12000 16000 km 7 No or moderate load or towing Flat to moderately hilly roads No extended idling 5000 7499 miles Moderate to heavy load or towing 8000 11999 km Mountainous or off road conditions Extended idling Extended hot or cold operation ee Maximum load ae i ae Extreme hot or cold operation 450 Scheduled Maintenance Normal scheduled maintenance At every oil change Change engine oil and filter the information display tread depth recommended Inspect automatic transmission fluid level if equipped with dipstick Consult dealer for requirements Inspect brake pads shoes rotors drums brake linings hoses and parking brake Inspect engine cooling system strength and hoses Inspect front axle and U joints Lubricate if equipped with grease fittings Four wheel drive vehicles Inspect half shaft boots if equipped Inspect st
261. in and to the content which may be accessed through use of the SOFTWARE is the property of the respective content owner and may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property laws and treaties This EULA grants you no rights to use such content All rights not specifically granted under this EULA are reserved by MS Microsoft Corporation FORD MOTOR COMPANY third party software and service providers their affiliates and suppliers Use of any on line services which may be accessed through the SOFTWARE may be governed by the respective terms of use relating to such services If this SOFTWARE contains documentation that is provided only in electronic form you may print one copy of such electronic documentation EXPORT RESTRICTIONS You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is subject to U S and European Union export jurisdiction You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE including the U S Export Administration Regulations as well as end user end use and destination restrictions issued by U S and other governments For additional information see http www microsoft com exporting TRADEMARKS This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of FORD MOTOR COMPANY MS Microsoft Corporation third party software or service providers their affiliates or suppliers PRODUCT SUPPORT Product support for the SOFTWARE is not provided by M
262. inates when the ignition is first turned to the on position to check the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for Inspection Maintenance I M testing Normally the service engine soon light will stay on until the engine is cranked then turn itself off if no malfunctions are present However if after 15 seconds the service engine soon light blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing See the Readiness for inspection maintenance Q M testing in the Fuel and Refueling chapter Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the on board diagnostics system OBD IT has detected a malfunction Refer to On board diagnostics OBD II in the Fuel and Refueling chapter If the light is blinking engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter Drive in a moderate fashion avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration and have your vehicle serviced immediately by your authorized dealer WARNING Under engine misfire conditions excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the catalytic converter the fuel system interior floor coverings or other vehicle components possibly causing a fire Stability Control System twr Displays when the AdvanceTracG Traction control is active If Pell the light remains on have the system serviced immediately Stability Control System Off r Illuminates when AdvanceTrac Traction control has been SO disabled by the driver Tran
263. ing A message may appear in the information display If you are unable to start your vehicle with a correctly coded key a malfunction has occurred A message may appear in the information display Automatic Arming Your vehicle arms immediately after you switch the ignition off Anti Theft Indicator The anti theft indicator is located in the instrument cluster e When the ignition is off the indicator will flash once every A two seconds to indicate the SecuriLock system is functioning as a theft deterrent e When the ignition is on the indicator will glow for three seconds then turn off to indicate normal system functionality If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock system the indicator will flash rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is on If this occurs switch the ignition off then back on to make sure there was no electronic interference with the programmed key If your vehicle does not start try to start it with the second programmed key and if successful contact your authorized dealership for key replacement If the indicator still flashes rapidly or glows steadily your vehicle will not start Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible for service Security 77 Automatic Disarming Your vehicle disarms when you switch the ignition on with a coded key Spare Intelligent Access Keys Your intelligent access key functions as a programmed key that operates the driver door lock and activates intelligent acc
264. ing a car wash Use the rotary control to adjust the sensitivity to one of the interval moisture settings The wipers will not cycle until moisture is detected on the windshield The wiper speed will vary based on the amount of moisture detected on the windshield and the sensitivity setting The wipers will continue to wipe as long as moisture is detected 86 Wipers and Washers Keep the outside of the windshield clean especially the area around the interior mirror where the sensor is located or sensor performance may be affected WINDSHIELD WASHERS Note Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield This may scratch the glass damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to burn out Always use the windshield washer before wiping a dry windshield Note Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty This may cause the washer pump to overheat Press the end of the stalk to activate the washer e A brief press causes a single wipe without washer fluid e A quick press and hold causes the wipers to swipe three times with washer fluid e A long press and hold will activate the wipers and washer fluid for up to 10 seconds A wipe will occur a few seconds after washing to clear any remaining washer fluid REAR WINDOW WIPER AND WASHERS Rotate the control to select 2 Intermittent operation shortest pause between wipes 1 Intermittent operation longest pause between wipes 0
265. ing that apply to your vehicle e Vehicle curb weight e Hitch hardware weight such as a draw bar ball locks or weight distributing Driver weight Passenger s weight Payload cargo and luggage weight e Aftermarket equipment weight 3 This equals the maximum loaded trailer weight for this combination Note The trailer tongue load figures into the payload for your vehicle Reduce the total payload by the final trailer tongue weight Consult an authorized dealer to determine the maximum trailer weight allowed for your vehicle if you are not sure Vehicle type Towing package Maximum GCWR Two wheel drive 12300 Ib 5579 kg except L Two wheel drive L 12600 Ib 5715 kg Four wheel drive standard 12500 Ib 5669 kg except L Four wheel drive L 12800 lb 5806 kg Two wheel drive 15100 Ib 6849 kg except L Two wheel drive L Ontional Heavy Dut 14900 lb 6758 kg Four wheel drive p Vy VU 15100 Ib 6849 kg except L Four wheel drive L 14900 Ib 6758 kg Towing 225 ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS Follow these guidelines for safe towing e Do not tow a trailer until you drive your vehicle at least 1000 miles 1600 kilometers e Consult your local motor vehicle laws for towing a trailer e See the instructions included with towing accessories for the proper installation and adjustment specifications e Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer See your scheduled maintenance information e f you use a
266. installed crossbars Ford Genuine Accessory crossbars designed specifically for your vehicle are also recommended for use with your roof rack system Make sure that the load is securely fastened Check the tightness of the load before driving and at each fuel stop Adjusting the Crossbars If Equipped 1 Loosen the thumbwheels at both ends of the crossbar by turning them counterclockwise both crossbars are adjustable 2 Slide the crossbar to the desired location 3 Tighten the thumbwheels at both ends of the crossbar by turning them clockwise Make sure to check that the thumbwheels are tight each time a load is added or removed from the roof rack and periodically while traveling Make sure that the load is secure before traveling 212 Load Carrying LOAD LIMIT Vehicle Loading With and Without a Trailer This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and or trailer to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability with or without a trailer Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance Before loading your vehicle familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle s weight ratings with or without a trailer from the vehicle s Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment It does not include p
267. io Telecommunications Commission CRTC regulate the use of mobile communications systems that are equipped with radio transmitters for example two way radios telephones and theft alarms Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with Federal Communications Commission FCC and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission CRTC regulations and should be installed only by an authorized dealer An authorized dealer needs to install mobile communications systems Improper installation may harm the operation of your vehicle particularly if their manufacturer did not design the mobile communication device specifically for automotive use If you or an authorized Lincoln dealer add any non Lincoln electrical or electronic accessories or components to the vehicle you may adversely affect battery performance and durability In addition you may adversely affect the performance of other electrical systems in the vehicle Extended Service Plan 333 Extended Service Plan ESP PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A LINCOLN EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN SERVICE PLANS U S Only Lincoln owners have discovered the powerful protection of Lincoln Extended Service Plan It is the only extended service plan backed by Lincoln Motor Company and provides peace of mind protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage Lincoln ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself One service bill the cost of parts and labor
268. ion voice commands 423 Privacy information 358 Notifications usccecere ionic 393 Push button start system 156 o Q Octane rating 164 Quick touch buttons 422 E R FUIL DIO OOE Sappia WE NRNRRRCRERER 338 Pairing your phone 380 AM FM ssis 360 Pairing your phone for the omgle OD 3 edeeieiee ree 338 first CME oe cts rt diserte enini 380 Radio reception 336 Parental MyKey programming 60 Radio voice commands 365 Parking brake 187 Rear heated seats Js 144 Parts Rear view camera see Motorcraft parts 328 display sss 198 401 Phone settings 384 406 Rear window defroster 122 Phone voice commands 385 Receiving a text message 383 POI categories ssse 415 Recommendations for Point of Interest POD 415 attaching safety restraints Power deployable running for children esssssss 19 DOSES 3e trasmettere 220 RELAYS sicveiaieeiancaeis eect aes 251 Power distribution box Remote entry system see FUSES sss 251 256 illuminated entry 70 locking unlocking doors 67 ee i LOCKS tese eh 67 replacing the bateries cuca 55 OWED MEAN Eyer oenn pterea 71 Rimiote startclimate Power TIITEOFS secet tes 94 operation 127 Powerpoint
269. ions e A flat shelf which pivots up and snaps into place e A divider which pivots up and snaps vertically into place To move the shelf to the shelf position Pull up and pivot the shelf over the channels on the side trim panels and snap the shelf ends in the channels To move the shelf to the divider position Pull up and pivot the shelf over the channels on the side trim panels and snap vertically in place 220 Load Carrying POWER DEPLOYABLE RUNNING BOARDS IF EQUIPPED WARNING In extreme climates excessive ice buildup may occur causing the running boards not to deploy Be sure that the running boards have deployed and have finished moving before attempting to step on them The running boards will resume normal function once the blockage is cleared WARNING Turn off the running boards before jacking or placing any object under the vehicle Never place your hand between the extended running board and the vehicle A moving running board may cause injury Note Do not use the running boards front and rear hinge assemblies running board motors or the running board under body mounts to lift the vehicle when jacking Always use proper jacking points Note The running boards may operate slower in cooler temperatures Debris such as mud dirt and salt may become trapped in the running board mechanism possibly leading to unwanted noise If this occurs manually set the running boards to the deployed position and flu
270. ires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle The low tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly low Once the light is illuminated your tires are under inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer s recommended tire pressure Even if the light turns on and a short time later turns off your tire pressure still needs to be checked When your spare tire is installed When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the spare the tire pressure monitoring system will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the damaged road wheel or tire needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle To restore the full function of the tire pressure monitoring system have the damaged road wheel or tire repaired and remounted on your vehicle For additional information see Changing Tires with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System in this section Wheels and Tires 313 When you believe your system is not operating properly The main function of the tire pressure monitoring system is to warn you when your tires need air It can also warn you in the event the system is no longer capable of functioning as intended See the following chart for information concerning your tire pressure monitoring system Low tire Possible cause pressure warning light Tire s under inflated Solid warning light Spare tire in use Tire pressure monitoring system malfunction Tire rotation withou
271. is available HD1 signifies the main programming status and is available in analog and digital broadcasts Other multicast stations HD2 through HD7 are only available digitally TAG allows you to save a song to download later when you are on an acquired HD Radio station and the feature is on To turn the feature on and use it 1 Press AM or FM gt Options gt TAG button gt On 2 When you hear a song you like touch TAG 3 The system automatically saves the song s information and transfers it to your portable music player if supported when you connect it to the system The system automatically transfers the tag to your player if already connected and a pop up confirms the transfer 4 When you access iTunes with your portable music player the tags appear to you as a reminder The system allows you to tag up to approximately 100 songs For a list of devices that support tagging see www SYNCMyRide com www SYNCMyRide ca or www syncmaroute ca When HD Radio broadcasts are active you can access the following functions e Scan allows you to hear a brief sampling of all available stations This feature still works when HD Radio reception is on although it does not scan for HD2 HD7 channels You may see the HD logo appear if the station has a digital broadcast e Memory presets allow you to save an active channel as a memory preset Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns There is a brief mute while the radio s
272. is found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles Wheels and Tires 303 Maximum Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer s maximum permissible pressure or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label When weather temperature changes occur tire inflation pressures also change A 10 F 6 C temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi 7 kPa in inflation pressure Check your tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label To ch
273. is not equipped with Navigation e Turn by turn directions appear in the information display in the status bar of your touchscreen system and on the SYNC Services screen You also receive driving instructions from audible prompts e When on an active route you can select Route Summary or Route Status using the touchscreen controls or voice commands to view the Route Summary Turn List or the Route Status ETA You can also turn voice guidance on or off cancel the route or update the route If you miss a turn SYNC automatically asks if you want the route updated Just say Yes when prompted and the system delivers a new route to your vehicle MyLincoln Touch 389 If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation SYNC Services downloads your requested destination to the navigation system The navigation system then calculates the route and provides driving instructions See the Navigation system section for more information Disconnecting from SYNC Services 1 Press and hold the phone button on the steering wheel 2 Say Good bye from the SYNC Services main menu SYNC Services quick tips Personalizing You can personalize your Services feature to provide quicker access to your most used or favorite information You can save address points such as work or home You can also save favorite information like sports teams such as Detroit Lions or a news category You can learn more about personalization by logging onto www SYNCMyRide
274. isabled power steering assist due to a system error See an authorized dealer Remote Start Messages Action Description To Drive Turn Key to On Displays as a reminder to turn the key on to drive the vehicle after a remote start To Drive Press Brake and START Displays as a reminder to apply the brake and the start button to drive the vehicle after a remote start Information Displays 119 To Drive Turn Key to On Displays when there is a problem with your vehicle s starting system See an authorized dealer for service Driver Control malfunction Service Displays when there is a problem required with your vehicle s suspension system See an authorized dealer for service Action Description Tire Pressure LOW Displays when one or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure Tire Pressure Monitor Fault Displays when the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact an authorized dealer Tire Pressure Sensor Fault Displays when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in use For more information on how the system operates under these conditions see theWheels and Tires chapter If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact an authorized dealer 120 Information Displays Trailer Messages Action Description Trailer Brake Gain XX X No Displays the current gain setting Trailer for the trailer brake w
275. ists voice commands The system simply makes a best guess at your request with these turned off Voice Control Volume This allows you to adjust the system s voice volume level MyLincoln Touch 403 Media Player Press the Settings icon Settings Media Player then select Thy from the following Autoplay When this feature is on the system automatically switches to the media source upon initial connection This allows you to listen to music during the indexing process When this feature is off the system does not automatically switch to the inserted media source Bluetooth Devices Select to connect disconnect add or delete a device You can also set a device as your favorite so that the system automatically attempts to connect to that device at every ignition cycle Gracenote Database This allows you to view the version level of Info the Gracenote Database Gracenote With this feature on the Gracenote Database Management supplies metadata information for your music files This overrides information from your device This feature defaults to off Cover Art Priority With this feature on the Gracenote Database supplied cover art for your music files This overrides any art from your device This feature defaults to Media Player 404 MyLincoln Touch Navigation Press the Settings icon Settings Navigation then select o from the following Map Preferences Turn breadcrumbs on and off
276. ition 1 move the memory features to their desired position using the associated controls 3 Press and hold button 1 for about two seconds A tone will sound confirming that a memory position has been set To program position 2 repeat the previous procedure using button 2 You can program a memory position at any time To program the memory feature to a remote control transmitter see the Keys and Remote Control chapter 134 Seats Recalling Saved Memory Positions To recall position 1 settings press and release memory button 1 The memory features will move to the saved memory 1 position You can also recall the memory positions when you e Press your remote control transmitter unlock button if the remote control is programmed to a memory position e Unlock the intelligent access driver door handle if a linked key fob is present e Enter a valid Securicode personal entry code that is programmed to a memory position With the Easy Entry and Exit feature on the mirrors and pedals move to the programmed memory position The seat and steering column move to the Easy Entry position The seat and steering column move to the memory position when you switch the ignition on You can recall a programmed memory position e Only in park P or neutral N if the ignition is on e In any gearshift position if the ignition is not on Easy Entry and Exit Feature The Easy Entry and Exit feature adjusts the position of the seat an
277. itions 1 For center seating positions route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat For outboard seating positions route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts If the top of the safety seat hits the head restraint recline the seat back slightly to obtain proper fit 2 Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position e Second row outboard seating positions e Second row center seating position if equipped Child Safety 27 3 Grasp the tether strap and position it to the seat frame 4 Rotate the tether strap and clip the tether strap to the anchor on the seat frame 5 Rotate the tether strap clip 4 6 Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions 28 Child Safety Third row center seating position 1 Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat 2 Locate the anchor webbing loop for the seating position e You may need to pull back the top of the hinged panel along the bottom of the seat back to access the tether anchor 3 Clip the tether strap through the anchor loop as shown If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a crash Child Safety 29 4 Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions If the safety seat is not
278. ix D Drive with Tow Haul On The Tow Haul feature improves transmission operation when towing a trailer or a heavy load All transmission gear ranges are available when using Tow Haul Tow Haul can be activated by pressing the transmission control switch on the side of the gearshift lever e Floor shift transmission TOW The TOW HAUL indicator light will HAUL illuminate in the instrument cluster Tow haul delays upshifts to reduce frequency of transmission shifting Tow haul also provides engine braking in all forward gears when the transmission is in the D Drive position this engine braking will slow the vehicle and assist the driver in controlling the vehicle when descending a grade Depending on driving conditions and load conditions the transmission may downshift slow the vehicle and control 174 Transmission the vehicle speed when descending a hill without the accelerator pedal being pressed The amount of downshift braking provided will vary based upon the amount the brake pedal is pressed To deactivate the tow haul feature and return to normal driving mode press the button on the end of the gearshift lever The TOW HAUL light will no longer be illuminated Tow haul will also deactivate when the vehicle is powered down 3 Third Transmission operates in third gear only Used for improved traction on slippery roads 2 Second Transmission operates in 2nd gear only Use 2 Second to start up on slippery
279. k Displays as a reminder to shift into park P 122 Climate Control AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL K J l H G F E Note You can switch temperature units between Fahrenheit and Celsius See Settings in the MyLincoln Touch chapter A TEMP Press to increase or decrease the air temperature for the driver side of the vehicle B Fan speed Press to increase or decrease the volume of air circulated in the vehicle C TEMP Press to increase or decrease the air temperature for the passenger side of the vehicle D Passenger climate controlled seat and heated seat if equipped Press the button to switch on the passenger climate controlled and heated seat Press the button again to adjust the temperature of the seat E Recirculated air Press the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air When you select recirculated air the air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates This may reduce the time needed to cool the interior when used with A C and may reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle Note Recirculated air may turn off automatically or be prevented from turning on in all airflow modes except MAX A C to reduce risk of fogging Climate Control 123 F MAX A C Press the button to maximize cooling Recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents air conditioning automatically turns on and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed G A C Pr
280. ked by an authorized dealer Note You can crank the engine for a total of 60 seconds without the engine starting before the starting system temporarily disables The 60 seconds does not have to be all at once For example if you crank the engine three times for 20 seconds each time without the engine starting you reached the 60 second time limit A message appears in the information display alerting you that you exceeded the cranking time You cannot attempt to start the engine for at least 15 minutes After 15 minutes you are limited to a 15 second engine cranking time You need to wait 60 minutes before you can crank the engine for 60 seconds again 158 Starting and Stopping the Engine Before starting the engine check the following e Make sure all occupants have fastened their safety belts e Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off e Make sure the parking brake is on e Make sure the gearshift is in position P Note Do not touch the accelerator pedal 1 Fully press the brake pedal 2 Press the button The system does not function if e The key frequencies are jammed e The key battery has no charge If you are unable to start your vehicle do the following 1 Locate the key backup slot 2 With the buttons facing the rear of the vehicle and the key ring up place the key into the backup slot 3 With the key in this position press the brake pedal then the button to switch the ignition o
281. l not more Additionally smooth variations of the accelerator and or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for Avoid abrupt steering acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and or personal injury Use all available road surface to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel e n the event of an emergency stop avoid skidding the tires and do not attempt any sharp steering wheel movements e f the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another i e from concrete to gravel there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds to a maneuver steering acceleration or braking Again avoid these abrupt inputs Sand When driving over sand try to keep all four wheels on the most solid area of the trail Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower gear and drive steadily through the terrain Apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning the wheels Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may be required from another vehicle Remember you may be able to back out the way you came if you proceed with caution Four Wheel Drive If Equipped 183 Mud and water Note Driving through deep water may damage the vehicle If you must drive through high water drive slowly Traction or brake capability may be limited
282. l area network within your vehicle for things such as game playing file transfer and internet browsing Press for more information Gateway Access Point Settings allows you to view and change settings for using SYNO as the internet gateway Gateway Access Point Device List allows you to view recent connections to your Wi Fi system 408 MyLincoln Touch USB Mobile Instead of using Wi Fi your system can also Broadband use a USB mobile broadband connection to access the internet You must turn on your mobile broadband device on your personal computer before connecting it to the system This screen allows you to set up what is your typical area for your USB mobile broadband connection USB mobile broadband settings may not display if the device is already on You can select the following Country Carrier Phone Number User Name and Password Bluetooth Settings Shows you the currently paired devices as well as giving you your typical Bluetooth options to connect disconnect set as favorite delete and add device Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG Prioritize Choose your connection methods and change Connection Methods them as needed You can select to Change Order and have the system either always attempt to connect using a USB mobile broadband or using Wi Fi The Wi Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a bf Cri certification mark of the Wi Fi Alliance CERTIFIED MyLincoln Touch 409 He
283. l on the seatback to make sure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or crash The E Z entry seat allows for easier entry and exit to and from the third row seat To enter the third row seat 1 Fold down the second row seat and release the handle GE 4 2 Pull the handle up again until the seat releases from the floor 3 Push the seat upward and fold it away from the third row Seats 141 To return the seat to a seating position 1 Push the seat down and latch to the floor 2 Bring the seatback to an upright position The seatback should lock into position Note If the seatback will not return to the upright position tumble the seat again and re latch it to the floor Be sure that cargo or other objects are not trapped underneath the seatback Exiting the Third Row Note If a squeak is heard from the latch area the latch striker pin should be wiped clean of dust or debris 1 Pull the strap located at the bottom outboard of the seat back to release the seat from the floor and rotate the seat up towards the front seat 2 Follow the directions above to return the seat from the E Z entry and to the upright position 142 Seats Reclining the Second Row Outboard 40 Seatback WARNING Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in severe personal injuries in the event o
284. l the shade toward the front of the vehicle to close it The moonroof control is located on the overhead console The moonroof has a one touch open and close feature To stop its motion during the one touch operation press the control a second time Windows and Mirrors 99 Opening and Closing the Moonroof Press and release the SLIDE control to open the moonroof The moonroof will stop short of the fully opened position Note This position helps to reduce rumbling wind noise which may happen with the moonroof fully open Press and release the control again to fully open the moonroof Pull and release the SLIDE control to close the moonroof Bounce Back The moonroof will stop automatically while closing and reverse some distance if there is an obstacle detected Pull and hold the SLIDE control within two seconds of a bounce back event to override the function While bounce back is active the closing force increases for each of the next three times the moonroof is closed Venting the Moonroof Press and release the TILT control to move the moonroof to the vent position Pull and hold the TILT control to close the moonroof 100 Instrument Cluster GAUGES A Left Information Display B Speedometer C Right Information Display See the MyTouch chapter for more information Left Information Display Odometer Located in the bottom of the information display Registers the accumulated distance your vehi
285. ld lose control When you brake hard the front wheels can t turn and if they aren t turning you won t be able to steer The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the vehicle If your vehicle has anti lock brakes apply the brakes steadily Do not pump the brakes Driving on snow and ice WARNING If you are driving in slippery conditions that require tire chains or cables then it is critical that you drive cautiously Keep speeds down allow for longer stopping distances and avoid aggressive steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle control which can lead to serious injury or death If the rear end of the vehicle slides while cornering steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle 4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads turn the steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control Four Wheel Drive If Equipped 185 Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on snow and ice Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting from a full stop Avoid sudden braking as well Although a 4WD vehicle may accelerate better than a two wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice it won t stop any faster because as in other vehicles braking occurs at all four wheels Do not become overconfident as to road conditions
286. ld on his or her lap while your vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a crash which may result in serious injury or death WARNING Never use pillows books or towels to boost a child They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a crash WARNING Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster seat These objects may become projectiles in a crash or sudden stop which may increase the risk of serious injury WARNING Never place or allow a child to place the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a crash WARNING To avoid risk of injury do not leave children or pets unattended in your vehicle Child Safety 33 Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children Use any attachment method as indicated below by X Combined lower Restraint weight of anchors Type child and and top child seat tether Rear facing Up to child seat 65 Ib 29 5 kg Rear facing Over 65 Ib child seat 29 5 kg Forward facing Up to child seat 65 Ib 29 5 kg Forward facing Over 65 Ib child seat 29 5 kg Note The child seat must rest tightly against the vehicle seat upon which it is installed It may be necessary to lift or remove the head restraint See the Seats chapter for information on head restraints CHILD SAFETY LOC
287. le When this feature is on text message notifications do not ring inside the cabin either 911 Assist Turn on or turn off the 911 Assist feature See 911 Assist in the SYNC Services amd Applications section Phone Ringer Select the ring tone you want to hear when you receive a call Choose from possible system ring tones your currently paired phone s ring tone a beep text to speech or a silent notification Text Message Notification Select a text message notification if supported by your phone Choose from possible system alert tones text to speech or silent Internet Data Connection If your phone is compatible use this screen to adjust your internet data connection Select to make your connection profile with the personal area network or to turn off your connection You can also choose to adjust your settings or have the system always connect never connect when roaming or query on connect Press for more information Manage Phonebook Touch this button to access features such as automatic phonebook download re download your phonebook add contacts from your phone as well as delete or upload your phonebook MyLincoln Touch 385 Roaming Warning Touch this button to have the system alert you when your phone is in roaming mode Phone Voice Commands EE Press the voice button on the steering wheel control After the us tone say any of the following commands Join calls Listen to text message lt
288. le to program them yourself See the Security chapter for information on programming your transmitters 60 MyKey PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION MyKey allows you to program keys with restricted driving modes to promote good driving habits All but one of the keys programmed to the vehicle can be activated with these restricted modes Any keys that have not been programmed are referred to as administrator keys or admin keys These can be used to e Create a MyKey e Program configurable MyKey settings e Clear all MyKey features When you have programmed a MyKey you can access the following information using the information display e How many admin keys and MyKeys are programmed to your vehicle e The total distance your vehicle has traveled using a MyKey Note All MyKeys are programmed to the same settings You cannot program them individually Note For vehicles with intelligent access push button start when both a MyKey and an admin transmitter are present the admin transmitter will be recognized to start the vehicle Non configurable Settings The following settings cannot be changed by an admin key user e Belt Minder You cannot disable this feature The audio system will mute when the front seat occupants safety belts are not fastened e Early low fuel The low fuel warning activates earlier giving the MyKey user more time to refuel e Driver assist features if equipped on your vehicle are forced on traction cont
289. lease the RESET button HOLD RESET TO CONFIRM MYKEY will be displayed Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds until MARK THIS AS RESTRICTED is displayed Wait until KEY RESTRICTED AT NEXT START is displayed MyKey is successfully created Make sure you label it so you can distinguish it from the admin keys You can also program configurable settings for the key s Refer to Programming Changing Configurable Settings Programming Changing Configurable Settings Use the Information display to access your configurable MyKey settings deo Switch the ignition on with an admin key If your vehicle has keyless start place the intelligent access transmitter into the backup slot The location of your backup slot is in another chapter See Starting and Stopping the Engine Access the main menu on the information display controls and press SETUP until you see RESET FOR MYKEY SETTINGS in the display Press and release the RESET button to display the MyKey setup menus Press the SETUP button to display the next menu and scroll through your choices Within any of the menus press RESET to highlight your choice Use the arrow buttons to make a selection Press SETUP to enter your choice The next configurable setting will display Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until you are done changing the configurable settings 62 MyKey CLEARING ALL MYKEYS You can clear all MyKeys within the same key cycle as you created the MyKey If you s
290. les Here the left sensor is mostly obstructed zone coverage on that side is severely limited System Lights and Messages The BLIS and CTA systems illuminate a yellow alert indicator in the outside mirror on the side of the vehicle the approaching vehicle is coming from Note The alert indicator dims when nighttime darkness is detected CTA also sounds an audible alarm and a message appears in the information display indicating a vehicle is coming from the right or left CTA works with the reverse sensing system which sounds its own audible alarm see the Parking Aids chapter Driving Aids 207 System Sensors WARNING Just prior to the system recognizing a blocked condition and alerting the driver the number of missed objects will increase To help avoid injuries NEVER use the BLIS as a replacement for using the side and rear view mirrors and looking over your shoulder before changing lanes BLIS is not a replacement for careful driving Note It is possible to get a blockage warning with no blockage present this is rare and known as a false blockage warning A false blocked condition either self corrects or clears after a key cycle The system uses radar sensors which are located behind the bumper fascia on each side of the vehicle Do not allow these areas to become obstructed by mud snow or bumper stickers as this can cause degraded system performance If the system detects a degraded performanc
291. les and objects on the road e Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking Highway Hazards No matter how carefully you drive there is always the possibility that you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of traffic This may further damage the flat tire but your safety is more important If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving or you suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged immediately reduce your speed Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road Stop and inspect the tires for damage If a tire is under inflated or damaged deflate it remove the wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel If you cannot detect a cause have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected Tire and Wheel Alignment A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires If your vehicle seems to pull to one side when you are driving the wheels may be out of alignment Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer Front wheel drive vehicles and those with an independent rear suspension may require alignment of all four wheels The tires should
292. less settings System Press the Settings icon gt Settings gt System then select from Thy the following English Spanish or French Fahrenheit Volume system Touch Screen Button Select to have the system beep to confirm Beep choices made through the touchscreen Touch Panel Button Select to have the system beep to confirm Beep button choices made through the climate or audio system Keyboard Layout Have the touchscreen keyboard display in QWERTY or ABC format 402 MyLincoln Touch Install Applications Install any downloaded applications or view the current software licenses Master Reset Select to restore factory defaults This erases all personal settings and personal data Voice Control Press the Settings icon Settings Voice Control then Thy select from the following Voice control Interaction Mode Standard interaction mode provides more detailed interaction and guidance Advanced mode has less audible interaction and more tone prompts Confirmation Have the system ask you short questions if it Prompts has not clearly heard or understood your request Note Even with confirmation prompts turned off the system may occasionally ask you to confirm settings Media Candidate Candidate lists are possible results from your Lists voice commands The system simply makes a best guess at your request with these turned off Phone Candidate Candidate lists are possible results from your L
293. ll tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall 306 Wheels and Tires Tire Replacement Requirements WARNING Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size load index speed rating and type such as P metric versus LT metric or all season versus all terrain as those originally provided by Ford The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position or the Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or edge of the driver s door If this information is not found on these labels then you should contac
294. location can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise e Ground clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability e Wet weather driving capability e All wheel driving capability 3 Full size dissimilar spare without label on wheel When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly do not e exceed 70 mph 113 km h e use more than one dissimilar spare tire and wheel at a time e use commercial car washing equipment e use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire and wheel The usage of a full size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise Wheels and Tires 317 e Ground clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability e Wet weather driving capability e All wheel driving capability if applicable e Load leveling adjustment if applicable When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly additional caution should be given to e towing a trailer e driving vehicles equipped with a camper body e driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack Drive cautiously when using a full size dissimilar spare tire and wheel and seek service as soon as possible Tire Change Procedure WARNING When one of the front wheels is off the ground the t
295. lp Press the Settings icon Help then select from the following View your vehicle s current location if your vehicle is equipped with navigation If your vehicle is not equipped with navigation nothing displays System Information ESN version applications installed on your system vehicle is moving 911 Assist Turn on and turn off the 911 Assist feature See 911 Assist in the SYNC applications amd services section In Case of Emergency ICE Speed Dial allows you to save up to two numbers as ICE contacts for quick access if there is an emergency Select Edit to access your phonebook and then select the desired contacts The numbers then appear as options on this screen for the ICE 1 and ICE 2 buttons The ICE contacts you select appear at the end of the 911 Assist call process Voice Command List View categorized lists of voice commands To access Help using the voice commands press the voice button then after the tone say Help The system provides allowable voice commands for the current mode 410 MyLincoln Touch CLIMATE Touch the lower right corner on the touchscreen to access your climate control features Depending on your vehicle line and option package your climate screen may look different from this screen Note You can switch temperature units between Fahrenheit and Celsius See Settings in this chapter A Power Touch the button to switch the system on and off Switchin
296. ls and voice communications For more information see SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at www SYNCMyRide com If you do not want Ford or its service providers to collect your vehicle travel information or other information identified in the Terms and Conditions do not subscribe or use the service SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle sensors integrated GPS technology and comprehensive map and traffic data to give you personalized traffic reports precise turn by turn directions business search news sports weather and more For a complete list of services or to learn more please visit www SYNCMyRide com Connecting to SYNC Services Using Voice Commands Press the voice button on the steering wheel controls i 1 When prompted say Services This initiates an outgoing call to SYNC Services using your paired and connected Bluetooth enabled cellular phone 2 Once you connect to the service follow the voice prompts to request the desired service such as Traffic or Directions You can also say What are my choices to receive a list of available services from which to choose 3 Say Services to return to the Services main menu or for help say Help 388 MyLincoln Touch Connecting to SYNC Services Using the Touchscreen If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation touch the i Information button to access these features If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation touch the corner of the touchscreen
297. lt 879 1079 gt HD a7 If available AM autoset preset lt gt FM 2 preset lt gt 366 MyLincoln Touch Sirius Satellite Radio If Activated Press the lower left corner of the touchscreen then select the D SIRIUS tab Presets Save a channel by pressing and holding one of the memory preset areas There is a brief mute while the radio saves the channel Sound returns when finished ALERT Save the current song artist or team as a favorite The system alerts you when it plays again on any channel Replay Replay audio on the current channel You can replay approximately 45 minutes of audio as long as you have remained tuned to the current station Changing stations erases the previous audio s in replay mode Press and release the seek buttons to hear the previous or next song e Press and hold the seek buttons to reverse or fast forward in the current track e Press play or pause to play or pause the audio e Press Replay to return to live audio if you have been using the feature to replay audio Scan Touch this button to hear a brief sampling of channels Options Sound Settings allows you to adjust settings for Bass Midrange Treble Balance and Fade DSP Digital Signal Processing Occupancy Mode Speed Compensated Volume Note Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings MyLincoln Touch 367 Set Category for Seek Scan allows y
298. luding e Towing flat tire change and battery jump starts e Out of fuel and lock out assistance e Travel expense reimbursement for lodging meals and rental car e Destination assistance for taxi shuttle rental car coverage and emergency transportation Transferable Coverage If you sell your vehicle before your Lincoln Extended Service Plan coverage expires you can transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner Whenever you sell your vehicle prospective buyers may have a higher degree of confidence that vehicle was properly maintained with Lincoln ESP thereby improving resale value Avoid the Rising Cost of Properly Maintaining Your Vehicle Lincoln Extended Service Plan also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all scheduled maintenance and select items that routinely wear out The coverage is prepaid so you never have to worry about affording your vehicle maintenance It covers regular checkups routine inspections preventive care and replacement of select items that require periodic attention for normal wear Windshield wiper blades Spark plugs except in California The clutch disc Brake pads and linings Shock absorbers Belts and hoses Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment Interest Free Finance Options Available Take advantage of our interest free installment payment plan Just a 10 down payment will provide you with an affordable no interest no fee payment program allowing you all the secu
299. lure to do so may result in loss of steering control Your vehicle is equipped with an electric power assisted steering system There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill If your vehicle loses electrical power while you are driving or if the ignition is turned off you can steer the vehicle manually but it takes more effort Extreme continuous steering may increase the effort it takes 210 Driving Aids for you to steer This occurs to prevent internal overheating and permanent damage to your steering system If this should occur you will neither lose the ability to steer the vehicle manually nor will it cause permanent damage Typical steering and driving maneuvers will allow the system to cool and steering assist will return to normal When a steering system error is detected steering messages may appear in the information display Steering Tips If the steering wanders or pulls check for e an improperly inflated tire e uneven tire wear e loose or worn suspension components e loose or worn steering components e improper vehicle alignment A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering seem to wander pull AUTO LEVELING SUSPENSION SYSTEM if equipped The automatic leveling suspension system is designed to improve ride handling and general vehicle performance during e Certain road conditions e Steering maneuvers e Braking e Acceleration e Towing This system keeps the rear of your
300. ly Switch traffic alert notifications on and off Have the system display accident icons Have the system display traffic jam icons Have the system display closed roads Avoid Areas Enter specific areas that you would like to avoid on planned navigation routes 406 MyLincoln Touch Phone Settings Press the Settings icon Settings Phone then select from o the following Bluetooth Devices Connect disconnect add or delete a device as well as save it as a favorite Bluetooth Turn Bluetooth on and off Do Not Disturb Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and not ring inside your vehicle With this feature turned on text message notifications are also suppressed and do not ring inside your vehicle 911 Assist Turn on or turn off the 911 Assist feature See 911 Assist in the SYNC applications and services section Phone Ringer Select the type of notification for phone calls ring tone beep text to speech or have it be silent Text Message Select the type of notification for text Notification messages alert tone beep text to speech or have it be silent Internet Data If compatible with your phone you can adjust Connection your internet data connection Select to make your connection profile with the personal area network or to turn off your connection You can also choose to adjust your settings or have the system always connect never connect when roaming or query on connect Press f
301. ly of any changes to such information and to keep it true accurate current and complete 3 Software License Subject to your compliance with the terms of this Agreement Telenav hereby grants to you a personal non exclusive non transferable license except as expressly permitted below in connection with your permanent transfer of the Telenav Software license without the right to sublicense to use the Telenav Software in object code form only in order to access and use the Telenav Software This license shall terminate upon any termination or expiration of this Agreement You agree that you will use the Telenav Software only for your personal business or leisure purposes and not to provide commercial navigation services to other parties 3 1 License limitations You agree not to do any of the following a reverse engineer decompile disassemble translate modify alter or otherwise change the Telenav Software or any part thereof b attempt to derive the source code audio library or structure of the Telenav Software without the prior express written consent of Telenav c remove from the Telenav Software or alter any of Telenav s or its suppliers trademarks trade names logos patent or copyright notices or other notices or markings d distribute sublicense or otherwise transfer the Telenav Software to others except as part of your permanent transfer of the Telenav 434 Appendices Software or e use the Telenav Sof
302. m as an additional key in the total count of MYKEY S PROGRAMMED or ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED See Checking MyKey System Status As an added precaution owners may want to program the remote start system as a MyKey if the MyKey driver uses the remote start fob That way when the MyKey driver starts the vehicle with the remote start system the MyKey restrictions will be remain active With a non Ford approved aftermarket remote start system it is possible to program all real keys as MyKeys unintentionally If this happens then the remote start fob is the admin key If you want to have only one real key as a MyKey or do not want to have any MyKeys then you need to use your remote start to clear all MyKeys In that case follow these steps e Enter the vehicle and close all doors e Remote start the vehicle using your remote start fob e See Clearing All MyKeys Follow Steps 1 3 After clearing your MyKeys you can create a new MyKey See Creating a MyKey MyKey 65 MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING Potential causes I cannot create a MyKey I cannot program the configurable settings I cannot clear the MyKeys e The key or fob used to start the vehicle does not have admin privileges e The key or fob used to start the vehicle is the only admin key there always has to be at least one admin key e Vehicles with push button start The intelligent access key is not positioned correctly next to the steering column or placed in a
303. map only when route guidance is active Re center the map by pressing this icon whenever you scroll Be the map away from your vehicle s current location m x Press the speaker button on the map to mute route guidance Auto Zoom Press the green bar to access map mode then select the or zoom button to bring up the zoom level and Auto buttons on the touchscreen When you press Auto Auto Zoom turns on and Auto displays in the bottom left corner of the screen in the map scale The map zoom level then synchronizes with vehicle speed The slower your vehicle is traveling the farther in the map zooms in the faster your vehicle is traveling the farther the map zooms out To turn the feature off just press the or button again In 3D mode rotate the map view by swiping your finger across the shaded bar with the arrows The ETA box under the zoom buttons appears when a route is active and displays the distance and time to your destination If the button is pressed a pop up appears with the destination listed and waypoint if applicable along with mileage and time to destination You may also select to have either the estimated time to reach your destination or your estimated arrival time MyLincoln Touch 421 Map Icons A Vehicle mark shows the current location of your vehicle It stays in the center of the map display except when in scroll mode Scroll cursor allows you to scroll the map the fixed icon is in the ce
304. mation before you operate your vehicle On some four wheel drive models the initial shift from two wheel drive to four wheel drive while the vehicle is moving can cause a momentary clunk and ratcheting sound These sounds are normal as the front drivetrain comes up to speed and are not cause for concern How Your Vehicle Differs from Other Vehicles Sport utility vehicles vans and trucks can differ from some other vehicles in a few noticeable ways Your vehicle may be e Higher to allow higher load carrying capacity and to allow it to travel over rough terrain without getting hung up or damaging underbody components e Shorter to give it the capability to approach inclines and drive over the crest of a hill without getting hung up or damaging underbody components All other things held equal a shorter wheelbase may make your vehicle quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase 294 Wheels and Tires e Narrower to provide greater maneuverability in tight spaces particularly in off road use As a result of the above dimensional differences sport utility vehicles vans and trucks often will have a higher center of gravity and a greater difference in center of gravity between the loaded and unloaded condition These differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car
305. may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law PM 81 130 PON 8D O 89 DD PR 0 ATH Note For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph 240 km h tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR For those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph 299 km h tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR Wheels and Tires 299 H U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall I M S or M S Mud and Snow or AT All Terrain or AS All Season J Tire Ply Composition and Material Used Indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall which include steel nylon polyester and others K Maximum Load Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be
306. message should produce audio for the disappear shortly selected channel Sat Fault SIRIUS There is an internal If this message does system failure module or system not clear shortly or failure present with an ignition key cycle your receiver may have a fault See your authorized dealer for service Invalid Channel The channel is no Tune to another longer available channel or choose another preset Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does Contact Sirius at not include this 1 888 539 7474 to channel subscribe to the channel or tune to another channel No Signal The signal is lost from The signal is blocked the Sirius satellite or When you move into Sirius tower to your an open area the vehicle antenna signal should return MyLincoln Touch 371 Sirius troubleshooting tips Radio displa Possible action Updating Update of channel No action required programming in The process may take up to three minutes Call SIRIUS Your satellite service is Contact Sirius at 1 888 539 7474 no longer available 1 888 539 7474 to resolve subscription issues None Found Check All the channels in the Use the channel guide Channel Guide selected channels are to turn off the Lock either skipped or or Skip function on locked that station Subscription Updated Sirius has updated the No action required channels available for your vehicle CD Press the lower left corner of the touchscreen and t
307. meter horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or screen at this height a piece of masking tape works well 3 Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and open the hood Cover one of the headlamps so no light from that lamp hits the wall 4 On the wall or screen you will observe a light pattern with a distinct horizontal edge towards the right If this edge is not at the horizontal reference line the beam will need to be adjusted so the edge is at the same height as the horizontal reference line Maintenance 277 5 Locate the vertical adjuster on each headlamp then use a Phillips 2 screwdriver to turn the adjuster either counterclockwise or clockwise in order to adjust the vertical aim of the headlamp The upper edge of the light pattern should touch the horizontal reference line 6 HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS NOT ADJUSTABLE 7 Repeat Steps 3 5 for the other headlamp 8 Close the hood and turn off the lamps CHANGING A BULB Lamp Assembly Condensation Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure Condensation can be a natural by product of this design When moist air enters the lamp assembly through the vents there is a possibility that condensation can occur when the temperature is cold When normal condensation occurs a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the lens The thin mist eventually clears a
308. mission Shift Strategy The Adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy offers the optimal transmission operation and shift quality When the engine is turned off the shift data which includes the adaptive information will be stored automatically in the Powertrain Control Module If the battery is disconnected for any reason the stored information from the last time the key was turned to off will be read This way no information will be lost with any battery removal or disconnect P Park This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from turning To put your vehicle in gear e Press the brake pedal e Start the engine e Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear If your vehicle is equipped with a floor shift transmission press the gearshift lever release button on the front of the lever while shifting into the desired gear Transmission 173 To put your vehicle in P Park e Come to a complete stop e Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P Park R Reverse With the gearshift lever in R Reverse the vehicle will move backward Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R Reverse N Neutral With the gearshift lever in N Neutral the vehicle can be started and is free to roll Hold the brake pedal down while in this position D Drive with Tow Haul Off The normal driving position for the best fuel economy Transmission operates in gears one through s
309. mity a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use value or safety of the vehicle OR 3 The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar days not necessarily all at one time In the case of 1 or 2 above the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the following address Ford Motor Company 16800 Executive Plaza Drive Mail Drop 3NE B Dearborn MI 48126 You are required to submit your warranty dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting in court any rights or remedies conferred by California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b You are also required to use BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by the Federal Magnuson Moss Warranty Act 15 U S C sec 2301 et seq If you choose 246 Customer Assistance to seek redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b or the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act resorting to BBB AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU BBB AUTO LINE PROGRAM U S ONLY Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three step procedure outlined earlier in this chapter in the Getting the Services You Need section you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts
310. mmed for five seconds then release You may need to do this twice to activate the door If your garage door does not operate watch the HomeLink indicator light If the indicator light stays on the programming is complete Press and release the programmed HomeLink button and then begin programming your garage door opener See below for Steps 5 7 If the indicator light flashes rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light the HomeLink button is not programmed yet Do the following Press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release the hand held transmitter button every two seconds The HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly once the HomeLink function button recognizes and accepts the hand held transmitter s radio frequency signal Universal Garage Door Opener If Equipped 149 After programming the HomeLink button follow Steps 5 7 as listed below to program your garage door opener Note You may need a ladder to reach the unit and you may need to remove the cover or lamp lens on your garage door opener 5 Press the learn button on the garage door opener motor and then you have 30 seconds to complete the next step 6 Return to your car 7 Press and hold the function button you want to program for two seconds then release Repeat this step Depending on your brand of garage door opener you may need to repeat this sequence a third time i 060
311. mode touch anywhere on the map display to access more features Set as Dest Touch this button to select a scrolled location on the map as your destination You may scroll the map by pressing your index finger on the map display When you reach the desired location simply let go and then touch Set as Dest Set as Waypoint Touch this button to set the current location as a waypoint Save to Favorites Touch this button to save the current location to your favorites POI Icons Touch this button to select icons to display on the map You can select up to three icons to display on the map at the same time Turn these ON or OFF Cancel Route Touch this button to cancel the active route View Edit Route Access these features when a route is active View Route Edit Destination Waypoints Edit Turn List Detour Edit Route Preferences Edit Traffic Preferences e Cancel Route Nokia is the digital map provider for the navigation application If you find map data errors you may report them directly to Nokia by going to http mapreporter navteg com Nokia evaluates all reported map errors and responds with the result of their investigation by e mail Navigation Map Updates Annual navigation map updates are available for purchase through your dealership by calling 1 866 4NAVTEQ 1 866 462 8837 in Mexico call 01 800 557 5539 or going to www navigation com sync You need to specify the make and model of your vehicle to d
312. move the SD card press the card in and the system ejects it Do not attempt to pull the card to remove it as this could cause damage Note The navigation system also uses this card slot See Navigation system later in this chapter for more information The slot is located either in the center console or behind a small access door in the instrument panel To access and play music from your card press the lower left corner of the touchscreen and then select SD Card from the list on the left side of the screen SD logo is a trademark of SD 3C LLC USB Port The ports are located either in the center console or behind a small access door in the instrument panel To access and play music from your device press the lower S left corner of the touchscreen and then select the USB tab This feature allows you to plug in media playing devices memory sticks flash drives or thumb drives and charge devices if they support this feature 374 MyLincoln Touch Playing Music from Your Device Note The system is capable of indexing up to 30 000 songs Insert your device and select the SD Card or USB tab once the system recognizes it You can then select from the following options Repeat replays the currently playing song or album Shuffle plays music on the selected album or folder in random order Similar Music allows you to choose music similar to what is currently playing More Info displays information such
313. mp nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill position Fuel and Refueling 167 Easy Fuel amp No Cap Fuel System WARNING The fuel system may be under pressure If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler door do not refuel until the sound stops Otherwise fuel may spray out which could cause serious personal injury When fueling your vehicle 1 Turn the engine off 2 Open the fuel door by pulling the indent on the door 3 Insert the fuel plug key Gf equipped into the locking plug and turn it counterclockwise to unlock it 4 Slowly insert the fuel filler dore fully into the fuel system and leave the nozzle fully inserted until you are done pumping b After you are done pumping fuel slowly remove the fuel filler nozzle allow about ten seconds after pumping fuel before removing the fuel filler nozzle This allows residual fuel to drain back into the fuel tank and not spill onto the vehicle 6 Reinstall the plug if equipped into the fuel fill inlet and turn the key clockwise to lock Note Do not overfill the tank or fuel spillage will occur If the fuel fill inlet was not properly closed a Check Fuel Fill Inlet message may appear on the information display See the Information Displays chapter for more information At the next opportunity do the following 1 Safely pull off the road 2 Turn off the engine 3 Open the
314. n and start your vehicle Fast Restart The fast restart feature allows you to restart the engine within 20 seconds of switching it off even if a valid key is not present Within 20 seconds of switching the engine off press the brake pedal and press the button After 20 seconds have expired you can no longer start the engine without the key present inside your vehicle Once the engine has started it remains running until you press the button even if the system does not detect a valid key If you open and close a door while the engine is running the system searches for a valid key You cannot start the engine if the system does not detect a valid key within 20 seconds Starting and Stopping the Engine 159 Failure to Start If you cannot start the engine after three attempts wait 10 seconds and follow this procedure 1 Fully press the brake pedal 2 Fully press the accelerator pedal and hold it there 3 Start the engine Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Stationary 1 Move the transmission selector lever to position P 2 Press the button once 3 Apply the parking brake Note This switches off the ignition all electrical circuits warning lamps and indicators Note If the engine is idling for 30 minutes the ignition and engine automatically shut down Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Moving WARNING Switching off the engine when the vehicle is still moving will result in a loss of brake
315. n Label The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR Note For trailer towing information refer to the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer SEL GVW Gross Vehicle Weight is the Vehicle Curb Weight cargo passengers GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle including all options equipment passengers and cargo The GVWR is shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position The GVW must never exceed the GVWR Load Carrying 215 e Example only MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG REARGAWR XXXXLB XXXXKG WITH XXXX XXXXXXX TIRES XXXX XX MS XXXX XX RIMS AT XXX KPa XX PSLOOLD ATXXX KPa xX PSI COLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN XX000000000000000 C XXXXX TYPE DATE XX XX FRONT GAWR XXXXL XXXXKG XXXXDOOQQQUC RES XXXXX EXT PNT XX RC XX DSO we TINTTR PPS R TAXLE TTR SPR XXXXX XXX XX X X XX XX JOO000000009X XXX XXXX XXXXXXX XX
316. n amount of battery drain or after 45 minutes Locks 71 LIFTGATE WARNING Do not allow people to travel in any area of your vehicle that does not have seats and safety belts Riding in a cargo area inside or outside of the vehicle is extremely dangerous In a crash people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Make sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt correctly Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury or death Power Liftgate WARNING Make sure all persons are clear of the power liftgate area before using the power liftgate control WARNING Keep keys out of the reach of children Do not allow children to operate the power liftgate or to play near an open or moving power liftgate Note Cycling the ignition while the liftgate is power closing and is near the latch may cause the liftgate to reverse to full open position Make sure you close the liftgate before operating or moving the vehicle especially in an enclosure like a garage or a parking structure You could damage the liftgate or its components Note Do not drive with the liftgate open without first disabling the power function and securing the liftgate to the vehicle Note In case of operation in extreme cold 40 F 40 C or on extreme inclines manual operation of the liftgate is suggested You can enable or disable the power liftgate using the information display
317. n increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle transfer case or power transfer unit failure Note The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using snow tires and chains 310 Wheels and Tires The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow However in some climates you may need to use snow tires and chains If you need to use chains it is recommended that steel wheels of the same size and specifications be used as chains may chip aluminum wheels Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains If possible avoid fully loading your vehicle Use only cable type chains or chains offered by Ford Lincoln as an accessory or equivalent Other conventional link type chains may contact and cause damage to the vehicle s wheel house and or body Do not install chains on the front wheels as this may interfere with suspension components Only certain snow cables or chains have been approved by Ford Lincoln as safe for use on your vehicle with the following tires 275 65R18 You should install snow cables or chains that have been rated as SAE Class S Install chains securely verifying that the chains do not touch any wiring brake lines or fuel lines Do not excee
318. n the Safety Compliance Certification Label affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label The tire suppliers may have additional markings notes or warnings such as standard load or radial tubeless Additional Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall for LT Type Tires LT type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires These differences are described below Note Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire A LT Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association that is intended for service on light trucks B Load Range Load Inflation Limits Indicates the tire s load carrying capabilities and its inflation limits C Maximum Load Dual Ib kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual defined as four tires on the rear axle a total of six or more tires on the vehicle D Maximum Load Single Ib kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single defined as two tires total on the rear axle Wheels and Tires 301 Information on T Type Tires T type tires have some additional inf
319. n to make sure your child seat is appropriate for your child and is compatible with and properly installed in your vehicle To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or on the internet at http www nhtsa dot gov In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information contact your provincial ministry of transportation or locate your local St John Ambulance office by searching for St John Ambulance on the internet or Transport Canada at 1 800 333 0371 http www tc gc ca Failure to properly restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height age and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child 18 Child Safety Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children i Child size height weight or Recommended age restraint type Children weighing 40 Ib 18 kg or Use a child safety seat less generally age four or sometimes called an younger infant carrier convertible seat or toddler seat Small Children who have outgrown or no Use a belt positioning children longer properly fit in a child safety booster seat seat generally children who are less than 4 ft 9 in 1 45 m tall are greater than age four 4 and less than age twelve 12 and between 40 Ib 18 kg and 80 Ib 36 kg and upward to 100 Ib 45 kg if recommended by your child restraint manufa
320. n upgrade any transfer must include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE Termination Without prejudice to any other rights FORD MOTOR COMPANY or MS may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA Security Updates Digital Rights Management Content owners use the WMDRM technology included in your DEVICE to protect their intellectual property included copyrighted content Portions of the SOFTWARE on your DEVICE use WMDRM software to access WMDRM protected content If the WMDRM software fails to protect the content content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the Appendices 427 SOFTWARE s ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected content This action does not affect unprotected content When your DEVICE downloads licenses for protected content you agree that Microsoft may include a revocation list with the licenses Content owners may require you to upgrade the SOFTWARE on your DEVICE to access their content If you decline an upgrade you will not be able to access content that requires the upgrade Consent to Use of Data You agree that MS Microsoft Corporation FORD MOTOR COMPANY third party software and systems suppliers their affiliates and or their designated agent may collect and use technical information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services MS Microsoft Corporation FORD MOTOR COMPANY third party software and serv
321. n your device 3 If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device it does not support Secure Simple Pairing To pair enter the PIN displayed on the touchscreen Skip the next step 4 When prompted on your phone s display confirm that the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your cellular phone 5 The display indicates when the pairing is successful SYNC may prompt you with more phone options For more information on your phone s capability see your phone s manual and visit the website Pairing Subsequent Phones Note Put the transmission in position P Turn on your vehicle ignition and the radio 1 Press the Phone corner of the touchscreen gt Settings gt BT Devices Add Device 2 Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and that your cellular phone is in the proper mode See your phone s manual if necessary e Select SYNC and a six digit PIN appears on your device 3 If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device it does not support Secure Simple Pairing To pair enter the PIN displayed on the touchscreen Skip the next step MyLincoln Touch 381 4 When prompted on your phone s display confirm that the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your cellular phone 5 The display indicates when the pairing is successful SYNC may prompt you with more phone options For more information on your phone s capability see your phone s user guide and visit the website Making Calls E
322. naen dv ey s ejdsrp ey po uy Xie uoneogne qV ay sKejdsrp osye oqe ey ssepun K1089 e5 VoIAIOS NS IdV UMM po oqer Io sn you oq epqe1doooe os e o1e sourguo aul ose8 IOJ JIEN uorjeogno GV eui Kejdsrp pue sjueuraqmboJ NS dV 1299W Jey ope18 AjIso9stA popuoeururoo9J y JO SO 1030 uoreogroeds ploy sjootu yey pny esn ATUQ amp 1ojepueur JOU ST IO 1030ur puo q IN YJU S 10 I YJU S JO asf Oprea MOA ur peddmbo ATeurst10 odA3 que 000 91 PPV eJnjrej o qrssod pue ogeurep wo sds oxeiq ur 3 msoJ ACUI STeLIayeU Jojo 10 sjonpoud umo o13ed Iayem rp UM uoreururquo AIP pue ues pm ayeiq deey sprepueys o ueullojed p1o q 94 3eeur JOU pue oouteullojJ1ed exeiq papeisap asneo fewu PINT popueuruloo9J ay UY 19470 pmg Aue Jo 9S TV 8999IW SSA SUYU juspeAmbo JO pI exedg IPUPA JOJO 9oueuriojreq USI E LOC p104 37e104030 X Sursn spueurumo91 pIo TO d n m Josso1duio JULI SUJOY Tut 402 Zo HI 2 DVd 3J J510 0 N V 6IgAIW HSA epeuep Y 9I NAO V 76TIHAIW HSA CSM 61 NA uonvogroods pIo O Josso1duroo JueIoJUJOY 9 V JULIOSUJOY epey YLEIIO0JON 9 amp U T 20 OF Iue1o8ugoy O V 327 Capacities and Specifications ulojs amp s JUBIOSLIJOI Suruorrpuoo 1e VY oora1es pp nous ouuosJed pouipenb AjuQ Ainfut euosaed osneo ued uro1s s JULI SUJ I Suruonrpuoo dre pue Suruad o1nsso4d usn Jopun eger 1ue1oSugod surequoo Wo sds JULI SHJ I Suruorpuoo are oum 9NINSIVM MOTE SuntreA aud 99g S9 X
323. navigation as the maps or functionality of the Telenav Software are not intended to support such high risk applications especially in more remote geographical areas TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV SOFTWARE WHETHER STATUTORY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING ALL WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM COURSE OF DEALING CUSTOM OR TRADE AND INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE TELENAV SOFTWARE Certain jurisdictions do not permit the disclaimer of certain warranties so this limitation may not apply to you 5 Limitation of Liability TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES INCLUDING IN EACH CASE BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR Appendices 435 ACCESS DATA LOSS OF DATA LOSS OF BUSINESS LOSS OF PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE EVEN IF TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ALL DAMAGES REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES
324. nces that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car Maintain steering wheel control at all times especially in rough terrain Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside Do not grip the spokes Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as rocks and stumps You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before driving Map out your route before driving in the area To maintain steering and braking control of your vehicle you must have all four wheels on the ground and they must be rolling not sliding or spinning Driving Off Road With Truck and Utility Vehicles Note On some 4WD models the initial shift from two wheel drive to four wheel drive while the vehicle is moving can cause some momentary clunk and ratcheting sounds This is the front drivetrain coming up to speed and the automatic locking hubs engaging and is not cause for concern Note Your vehicle may be equipped with a front air dam that can become damaged due to reduced ground clearance when taking your vehicle off road This air dam can be taken off by removing two bolts Four Wheel Drive If Equipped 181 4WD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand snow mud and rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat different from conventional vehicles bot
325. nch will ratchet or slip when the tire is raised to maximum tightness A clicking sound will be heard from the winch indicating that the tire is properly stowed 5 Disassemble the jack tool and winch extension and snap them back into the tool tray 322 Wheels and Tires 6 Reinstall the jack bag properly around the jack and tool assembly tray making sure the strap is securely fastened 7 Close the access hole with the rubber plug 8 Reinstall the tray into the vehicle and secure it with the wing nut turn clockwise until tight TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications WARNING When a wheel is installed always remove any corrosion dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel Make sure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel Installing wheels without correct metal to metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion resulting in loss of control Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles 160 kilometers after any wheel disturbance such as rotation flat tire wheel removal Bolt size Wheel lug nut torque M14 x 1 5 Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust Us
326. nd the vehicle The image will be displayed in either the rear view mirror or the display in the center of the instrument panel During operation lines appear in the display which represent your vehicle s path and proximity to objects behind the vehicle The camera is located on the liftgate C i Parking Aids 199 Using the Rear View Camera System The rear view camera system displays what is behind your vehicle when you place the transmission in R Reverse The system uses two types of guides to help you see what is behind your vehicle 1 Fixed guidelines Show the actual path the vehicle is moving in while reversing in a straight line which can be helpful when backing into a parking space or aligning the vehicle with another object behind the vehicle 2 Centerline Helps align the center of the vehicle with an object i e a trailer Note If the transmission is in R Reverse and the luggage compartment is ajar no rear view camera features are displayed Note If the image comes on while the transmission is not in R Reverse have the system inspected by your authorized dealer Note When towing the camera only sees what is being towed behind the vehicle This might not provide adequate coverage as it usually provides in normal operation and some objects might not be seen In some vehicles the guidelines may disappear once the trailer tow connector is engaged Note The default setting for the camera
327. nd exits through the vents during normal operation Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry weather conditions These are examples of acceptable condensation e Presence of thin mist no streaks drip marks or droplets e Fine mist covers less than 50 of the lens These are examples of unacceptable moisture usually caused by a lamp water leak e Water puddle inside the lamp e Large water droplets drip marks or streaks present on the interior of the lens Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if any of the above conditions of unacceptable moisture are present 278 Maintenance Replacing HID Headlamp Bulbs The low high beam headlamps on your vehicle use a high intensity discharge source These lamps operate at a high voltage For bulb replacement see your authorized dealer Replacing Front Parking Lamp Turn Signal and Side Marker Bulbs These lamps are designed with LED light sources For replacement see your authorized dealer Replacing Tail Stop Turn Signal and Backup Lamp Bulbs These lamps are designed with LED light sources For replacement see your authorized dealer Replacing Supplemental Tail Lamp Bulbs These lamps are designed with LED light sources For replacement see your authorized dealer Replacing License Plate Lamp Bulbs The license plate bulbs are located above the license plate on the liftgate To change the license plate bulbs 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in
328. nd rear of the vehicle Visual Park Aid Alert Note Visual park alert is only available when the transmission is in R Reverse Note The reverse sensing system is not effective at speeds above 3 mph 5 km h and may not detect certain angular or moving objects The system uses red yellow and green highlights which appear on top of the video image when an object is detected by the reverse sensing system The alert highlights the closest object detected The reverse sensing alert can be disabled and if visual park aid alert is enabled highlighted areas are still displayed Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF Parking Aids 201 Manual Zoom WARNING When manual zoom is on the full area behind the vehicle is not shown Be aware of your surroundings when using the manual zoom feature Note Manual zoom is only available when the transmission is in R Reverse Note When manual zoom is enabled only the centerline is shown Allows the driver to get a closer view of an object behind the vehicle The zoomed image keeps the bumper in the image to provide a reference The zoom is only active while the transmission is in R Reverse When the transmission is shifted out of R Reverse the feature automatically turns off and must be reset when it is used again Selectable settings for this feature are OFF and ON Press the zoom button to change the view The default setting for the manual zoom is OFF Rear Came
329. ng and hydroplaning Built in treadwear indicators or wear bars which look like narrow strips of smooth rubber across the tread will appear on the tire when the tread is worn down to 1 16th of an inch 2 millimeters When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars the tire is worn out and must be replaced Wheels and Tires 305 Damage Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage such as bulges in the tread or sidewalls cracks in the tread groove and separation in the tread or sidewall If damage is observed or suspected have the tire inspected by a tire professional Tires can be damaged during off road use so inspection after off road use is also recommended WARNING Age Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as weather storage conditions and conditions of use such as load speed inflation pressure the tires experience throughout their lives In general tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread wear However heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be replaced more frequently You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or after six years due to aging even if it has not been used U S DOT Tire Identification Number Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of a
330. ng habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AAAB C WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Temperature A B C WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 139 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
331. ng of vehicles entering and exiting the blind zone e Vehicles passing through the blind zone at very fast rates e When several vehicles forming a convoy pass through the blind zone The following are other situations that may limit the CTA system e Adjacently parked vehicles or objects obstructing the sensors e Approaching vehicles passing at speeds greater than 15 mph 24 km h e Driving in reverse faster than 3 mph 5 km h e Backing out of an angled parking spot False Alerts Note If you connected a trailer to your vehicle the BLIS system may detect the trailer causing a false alert To avoid false alerts you may want to turn the BLIS off manually There may be certain instances when either the BLIS or CTA systems illuminate the alert indicator with no vehicle in the coverage zone this is known as a false alert Some amount of false alerts are normal they are temporary and self correct System Errors If either system senses a problem with the left or right sensor the BLISQ indicator in the information display will illuminate and remain on Also BLIND SPOT SYSTEM FAULT or CROSS TRAFFIC SYSTEM FAULT message will appear When problems that may cause the left or right indicator not to illuminate only the information display message faults appear Driving Aids 209 Switching the Systems Off and On One or both systems can be switched off temporarily by using the information display control refer to the Information
332. ng wheel it does not heat between the 10 o clock and 2 o clock positions Climate Control Voice Commands EB The following voice commands are available at the main menu i level of a voice session For example press the voice button and after the prompt Say a command say any of the following commands Climate control voice commands Climate automatic Climate my temperature Climate off Climate on Climate temperature 15 5 29 5 degrees MyLincoln Touch 413 Climate control voice commands Climate temperature 60 85 degrees There are additional climate control commands but in order to access them you have to say Climate first then when the system is ready to listen you may say any of the following commands Fan decrease Temperature 15 5 29 5 degrees Panel Moor on If you have said Temperature you can say any of the commands in the following Temperature chart TEMPERATURE lt 15 5 29 5 gt degrees lt 60 85 gt degrees 414 MyLincoln Touch NAVIGATION SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Note The navigation SD card must be in the SD card slot to operate the navigation system If you need a replacement SD card see your authorized dealer Note The SD card slot is spring loaded To remove the SD card just push the card in and release it Do not attempt to pull the card out to remove it this could cause damage Your navigation sy
333. ngitude and or other details about the vehicle or crash or personal information about the occupants to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services If you do not want to disclose this information do not activate the 911 Assist feature See your SYNC chapter for more information Additionally when you connect to Traffic Directions and Information if equipped U S only the service uses GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle s current location travel direction and speed vehicle travel information only to help provide you with the directions traffic reports or business searches that you request If you do not want Ford or its vendors to receive this information do not activate the service For more information see Traffic Directions and Information Terms and Conditions See your SYNC chapter for more information CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING Some constituents of engine exhaust certain vehicle components certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm PERCHLORATE MATERIAL Note Certain components in your vehicle such as airbag modules safety belt pretensioners and remote control batteries may contain perchlorate material Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal See www dts
334. nter of the screen The map position closest to the cursor is in a window on the top center part of the screen Address book entry default icon s indicates the location on the map of an address book entry This is the default symbol shown after the entry has been stored to the Address Book by any method other than the map You can select from any of the 22 icons available You can use each icon more than once K r v G Dg Home indicates the location on the map currently stored as the home position You can only save one address from the Address Book as your Home entry You cannot change this icon POI Point Of Interest icons indicate locations of any point of interest categories you choose to display on the map You can choose to display three point of interest categories on the map at one time Starting point indicates the starting point of a planned route Waypoints indicates the location of a waypoint on the map The number inside the circle is different for each waypoint and represents the position of the waypoint in the route list Destination symbol indicates the ending point of a planned route Next maneuver point indicates the location of the next turn on the planned route No GPS symbol indicates that insufficient GPS satellite signals are available for accurate map positioning This icon may display under normal operation in an area with poor GPS access 422 MyLincoln Touch Quick touch Buttons When in map
335. nts 153 110 Volt AC Power Point If Equipped WARNING Do not keep electrical devices plugged in the power point whenever the device is not in use Do not use any extension cord with the 110 volt AC power point since it will defeat the safety protection design Doing so may cause the power point to overload due to powering multiple devices that can reach beyond the 150 watt load limit and could result in fire or serious injury Note The cap should always be closed whenever the power point outlet is not in use Note The power point will turn off after 13 minutes if the ignition is on without the engine running Keep the engine running to use the power point The 110 volt AC power point outlet is used for powering electrical devices that require up to 150 watts Exceeding the 150 watt limit will cause the power point to cut off the power temporarily to provide overload protection The power point is located on the back of the center console The power point is not designed for the following electric appliances they may not work properly e Cathode ray tube type televisions e Motor loads such as vacuum cleaners electric saws and other electric power tools compressor driven refrigerators etc e Measuring devices that process precise data such as medical equipment measuring equipment etc e Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply microcomputer controlled electric blankets touch sensor lamp
336. nywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has been operating for approximately 30 minutes e Make sure the system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving your vehicle Make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the block heater cord plug when not in use e Keep plug terminals clean and free of dirt and corrosion e Make sure the heater system is checked for proper operation before winter Using the Engine Block Heater Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry before use To clean them use a dry cloth The heater uses 0 4 to 1 0 kilowatt hours of energy per hour of use The system does not have a thermostat It achieves maximum temperature after approximately three hours of operation Using the heater longer than three hours does not improve system performance and unnecessarily uses electricity 162 Fuel and Refueling SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING Do not overfill the fuel tank The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire WARNING The fuel system may be under pressure If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler inlet do not refuel until the sound stops Otherwise fuel may spray out which could cause serious personal injury WARNING Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled WARNING The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity This can cause a fire if you are filling an ungro
337. o Programming mode If done properly the LED light will appear red 3 Hold the transmitter within 1 3 inches 2 8 centimeters of the button on the sun visor you want to program 4 Press and hold both the programmed Genie button on the hand held transmitter and the button on the sun visor you want to program The indicator light on the sun visor will flash rapidly when the programming is successful Note the Genie transmitter will transmit for up to 30 seconds If HomeLink does not program within 30 seconds the Genie transmitter will need to be pressed again If the Genie transmitter LED displays green and red release the button until the LED turns off before pressing the button again Once HomeLink has been programmed successfully the Genie transmitter must be changed out of program mode To do this 1 Press and hold the previously programmed Genie button on the hand held transmitter for 10 seconds The indicator light will change from red to red and green 2 Press the same button twice to confirm the change If done correctly the LED will turn green Universal Garage Door Opener If Equipped 151 Programming HomeLink to the Genie Intellicode garage door opener motor Note You may need a ladder to access the garage door opener motor To program HomeLink to the garage door opener motor 1 Press and hold the PROGRAM button on the garage door opener motor until both blue LED s turn on 2 Release the PROGRAM button Only
338. ocated on the right side of your instrument cluster You can use your steering wheel controls to view and make minor adjustments to active modes without taking your hands off the wheel For example e n Entertainment mode you can view what is now playing change the audio source such as AM FM and CD and scroll through memory presets e n Phone mode you can accept or reject an incoming call or make a call by choosing from select menus within the Phone menu e f your vehicle is equipped with Navigation you can view the current route or cancel a route Note If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation Compass appears in the display instead of Navigation If you press the right arrow to go into the Compass menu you can see the compass graphic The compass displays the direction in which the vehicle is traveling not true direction For example if the vehicle is traveling west the middle of the compass graphic displays west north displays to the left of west though its true direction is to the right of west Audio Sources and Memory Presets Use the OK and arrow buttons on the right side of your steering wheel to scroll through the available modes You can make selections from the menu by using the OK button The selection menu expands and different options appear e Press OK to enter the mode e Press the left or right arrows to make adjustments within the chosen mode Small white arrows appear in the menu you are in
339. of bulbs Headlamps low and See your dealer high beam Front prklamps D O Front direction D indicator lamps Daytime running lamps Front side marker Front row map lamps LE LED LED 1600XB Rear cargo lamp 211 2XB Rear direction indicator rear and brake lamps LE Backup lamps LED Supplemental tail lamps LED Welcome lighting lamps LED Mirror direction 2 906 amber indicator lamps License lamp 168 5 High mount brake lamp W Visor vanity lamp Slide 2 A6224PF on rail system SOR All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted To replace LED bulbs see your authorized dealer To replace all instrument panel lights see your authorized dealer D 2nd row reading lamp 1600XB For vehicles with HID high intensity discharge lamps contact an authorized dealer for service Vehicle Care 281 GENERAL INFORMATION Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes CLEANING PRODUCTS For best results use the following products or products of equivalent quality Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC 15 Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A Motorcraft Dusting Cloth ZC 24 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser United States only ZC 20 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo Canada only CXC 66 A Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner Canada only CXC 101 Motorcr
340. of of ownership Upon receipt the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at 1 800 955 5100 or writing to BBB AUTO LINE 3033 Wilson Boulevard Suite 600 Arlington Virginia 22201 Customer Assistance 247 BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1 800 392 3673 Note Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations modify procedures or to discontinue this process at any time without notice and without obligation UTILIZING THE MEDIATION or ARBITRATION PROGRAM CANADA ONLY This pertains to vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation or arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP The CAMVAP program is a straightforward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings In the CAMVAP program impartial third party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually con
341. off 4 Drive off in the normal manner The brakes will be released automatically Traction Control 189 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION The traction control system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction If your vehicle begins to slide the system applies the brakes to individual wheels and when needed reduces engine power at the same time If the wheels spin when accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces the system reduces engine power in order to increase traction USING TRACTION CONTROL In certain situations for example stuck in snow or mud turning the traction control off may be beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin with full engine power Turn the traction control system off by pressing the inch stability control button located on the center of the CU instrument panel System indicator lights and messages WARNING If a failure has been detected within the traction control system the stability control light will illuminate steadily Verify that the traction control system was not manually disabled using the stability control button If the stability control light still illuminates steadily have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately Operating your vehicle with traction control disabled could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death twi The stability control light temporarily illuminates on engine F2 dli Start up and flashes w
342. oice commands in the following sections 360 MyLincoln Touch Your voice system allows you to change audio sources with a simple voice command For example if you are listening to music on a USB device then want to switch to a satellite radio channel simply press the voice button on the steering wheel controls and say the name of the Sirius station such as the Highway The following voice commands are available at the top level of the voice session no matter which current audio source you are listening to such as a USB device or Sirius satellite radio Note This is only available when your MyFord Touch system language is set to North American English AM 530 17102 FM 87 9 107 92 lt 530 17102 lt 87 9 107 92 Sirius lt 0 223 gt Play genre lt name gt Play playlist lt name gt Play artist lt name gt Play song lt name gt Play album lt name gt Play lt name song or album gt by lt artist name gt Sports games This command is only usable if you have an active subscription to Sirius satellite radio The commands that have around the word means that the word is optional For example if you say Play Metallica this is the same as the voice command Play artist lt name gt AM and FM Touch the AM or FM tab to listen to the radio To change between AM and FM presets just touch the AM or FM tab
343. ol descent in all surface conditions and circumstances such as ice or extremely steep grades Hill descent control is a driver assist system and cannot substitute for good judgment by the driver Failure to do so may result in loss of vehicle control crash or serious injury WARNING Hill descent control does not provide hill hold at zero mph 0 km h When stopped the parking brake must be applied and or the vehicle must be placed in P Park or it may roll away Hill descent control allows the driver to set and maintain vehicle speed while descending steep grades in various surface conditions Hill descent control can maintain vehicle speeds on downhill grades between 3 mph 5 km h and 20 mph 82 km h Above 20 mph 82 km h the system remains armed but descent speed cannot be set or maintained Hill descent control requires a cooling down interval after a period of sustained use The amount of time that the feature can remain active before cooling varies with conditions The system will provide a warning in the message center and a chime will sound when the system is about to disengage for cooling At this time manually apply the brakes as needed to maintain descent speed To enable hill descent control and set the descent speed do the following e 1 Press and release the hill descent button located in the a center of the terrain management control A light in the c control will illuminate and chime will sound when this feature
344. ometers or coolant test strips for measuring coolant concentrations Note Automotive fluids are not interchangeable do not use engine coolant antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified function and vehicle location Adding Engine Coolant WARNING Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you badly Also you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts WARNING Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid container If sprayed on the windshield engine coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield WARNING To reduce the risk of personal injury make sure the engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap The cooling system is under pressure steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly T WARNING Do not add coolant further than the MAX mark Note Do not use stop leak pellets cooling system sealants or additives as they can cause damage to the engine cooling or heating systems This damage would not be covered under your vehicle s warranty Note During normal vehicle operation the engine coolant may change color from orange to pink or light red As long as the engine coolant is clear and uncontaminated this color change does not indicate the engine coolant has degraded nor does it require the engine coolant to be drained the system to be
345. ommends the use of only genuine Ford Motorcraft or Ford authorized remanufactured replacement parts because they are engineered for your vehicle Additives and Chemicals Ford Motor Company recommended additives and chemicals are listed in the owner manual and in the Ford Workshop Manual Additional chemicals or additives not approved by Ford Motor Company are not recommended as part of normal maintenance Please consult your warranty information 446 Scheduled Maintenance Oils Fluids and Flushing In many cases fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic and by itself does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid needs to be changed However discolored fluids that also show signs of overheating and foreign material contamination should be inspected immediately by a qualified expert such as the factory trained technicians at your dealership Your vehicle s oils and fluids should be changed at the specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair Flushing is a viable way to change fluid for many vehicle sub systems during scheduled maintenance It is critical that systems are flushed only with new fluid that is the same as that required to fill and operate the system or using a Ford approved flushing chemical Owner Checks and Services Certain basic maintenance checks and inspections should be performed every month or at six month intervals Check every month Engine oil level Function of all interior
346. on privacy below However parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have such special equipment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada Introduction 13 Note Including to the extent that any law pertaining to Event Data Recorders applies to SYNC or its features please note the following Once 911 Assist if equipped is enabled set ON 911 Assist may through any paired and connected cell phone disclose to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or in certain vehicles the activation of the fuel pump shut off Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of being used to electronically or verbally provide to 911 operators the vehicle location such as latitude and lo
347. ons Default at Illuminated during bulb Enabled Enabled Enabled start up check Button pressed llluminated pg a Enabled Disabled momentarily solid 192 Stability Control Stability Roll Electronic Traction Button EE e fiictions control stability stability control OFF light control control system Button pressed and held for more than Flashes then 5 seconds at illuminated Disabled Disabled Disabled vehicle speed solid under 35 mph 56 km h Vehicle speed exceeds 35 mph olny j eet maad Enabled Disabled after button is solid pressed and held for more than 5 seconds Button pressed Not again after i Enabled Enabled Enabled MN illuminated deactivation Transfer case SWR ie Illuminated Disabled Disabled Disabled 4WD Low ane e S Locked Traction control system could be enabled but with higher entry thresholds compared to full system Electronic stability control entry thresholds are higher compared to full system Lamp light starts blinking for three seconds after entering press and hold state Control switch is not pressed Stability control light turned on when 4WD low locked transfer case mode selected Engine traction control and two wheel spin brake traction control functions are disabled Single wheel spin traction control is always enabled Terrain Response 193 HILL DESCENT CONTROL IF EQUIPPED WARNING Hill descent control cannot contr
348. opriate child restraints WARNING Never place your arm over the airbag module as a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat Never place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses as you could be seriously injured or killed Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING Several airbag system components get hot after inflation Do not touch them after inflation as this may result in serious injury WARNING If the airbag has deployed the airbag will not function again and must be replaced immediately If the airbag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash 44 Supplementary Restraints System The airbags are a supplemental restraint system and are designed to work with the safety belts to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper body injuries Airbags do not inflate slowly there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag Note You will hear a loud bang and see a cloud of harmless powdery residue if an airbag deploys This is normal The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation After airbag depl
349. opyright and is subject to the following terms this End User License Agreement and conditions which are agreed to by you on the one hand and HERE and its licensors including their licensors and suppliers on the other hand For purposes of these terms HERE shall mean a HERE North America LLC with respect to Data for the Americas and or the Asia Pacific region and b HERE Europe B V for Data for Europe the Middle East and or Africa The Data includes certain information and related content provided under license to HERE from third parties and is subject to the applicable supplier terms and copyright notices set forth at the following URL http corporate navteq com supplier_terms html TERMS AND CONDITIONS License Limitations on Use You agree that your license to use this Data is limited to and conditioned on use for solely personal noncommercial purposes and not for service bureau timesharing or other similar purposes Except as otherwise set forth herein you agree not to otherwise reproduce copy modify decompile disassemble or reverse engineer any portion of this Data and may not transfer or distribute it in any form for any purpose except to the extent permitted by mandatory laws 438 Appendices License Limitations on Transfer Your limited license does not allow transfer or resale of the Data except on the condition that you may transfer the Data and all accompanying materials on a permanent basis
350. or more information Manage Phonebook Access features such as automatic phonebook download re download your phonebook add contacts from your phone as well as delete or upload your phonebook Roaming Warning Have the system alert you when in Roaming mode MyLincoln Touch 407 Wireless amp Internet Your system has a Wi Fi feature that creates a wireless network within your vehicle thereby allowing other devices such as personal computers or phones in your vehicle to speak to each other share files or play games Using this Wi Fi feature everyone in your vehicle can also gain access the internet if you have a USB mobile broadband connection inside your vehicle your phone supports personal area networking and if you park outside a wireless hotspot Press the Settings icon Settings Wireless amp Internet o then select from the following Wi Fi Settings Wi Fi Network Client Mode turns the Wi Fi feature on and off in your vehicle Make sure you turn it on for connectivity purposes Choose a Wireless Network allows you to use a previously stored wireless network You can categorize by alphabetical listing priority and signal strength You can also choose to search for a network connect to a network disconnect from a network receive more information prioritize a network or delete a network Gateway Access Point Mode makes SYNC an access point for a phone or a computer when turned on This forms the loca
351. ormation beyond those of P type B C D A E tires These differences are b Pd described below p T145 80D16 is an example of a tire size Note The temporary tire size for your vehicle may be different from this example Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire A T Indicates a type of tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association that is intended for temporary service on cars sport utility vehicles minivans and light trucks B 145 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire C 80 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall D D Indicates a diagonal type tire R Indicates a radial type tire E 16 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter Location of the Tire Label You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important information located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door See the payload description and graphic in the Load Carrying chapter 302 Wheels and Tires INFLATING YOUR TIRES Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly inflated Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat Every
352. ort by using the touchscreen touch Apps Vehicle Health Report EE To run a report by voice command press the voice button on us the steering wheel and when prompted say Vehicle health report Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice When you create a Vehicle Health Report Ford Motor Company may collect your cellular phone number to process your report request and diagnostic information about your vehicle Certain versions or updates to Vehicle Health Report may also collect more vehicle information Ford may use your vehicle information it collects for any purpose If you do not want to disclose your cellular phone number or vehicle information do not run the feature or set up your Vehicle Health Report profile at www SYNCMyRide com See www SYNCMyRide com Vehicle Health Report Terms and Conditions and Privacy Statement for more information 398 MyLincoln Touch SETTINGS A Clock B Display C Sound D Vehicle E Settings F Help Under this menu you can set your clock access and adjust the display sound and vehicle settings as well as access settings for specific modes or the help feature Clock Note You cannot manually set the date Your vehicle s GPS does this for you Note If the battery has been disconnected your vehicle needs to acquire GPS signal to update the clock Once your vehicle acquires the signal it may take a few minutes for the update to display the correct time 1 Press t
353. ote Occasional brake noise is normal If a metal to metal continuous grinding or continuous squeal sound is present the brake linings may be worn out Have them inspected by an authorized dealer If your vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking have your vehicle inspected by an authorized dealer Note Brake dust may accumulate on the wheels even under normal driving conditions Some dust is inevitable as the brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise See the Vehicle Care chapter for wheel cleaning instructions Oro See the Instrument Cluster chapter for information on the eee brake system warning light Wet brakes result in reduced braking efficiency Gently press the brake pedal a few times when driving from a car wash or standing water to dry the brakes Brake Over Accelerator In the event the accelerator pedal becomes stuck or entrapped apply steady and firm pressure to the brake pedal to slow your vehicle and reduce engine power If you experience this condition apply the brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe stop Turn the engine off shift to park P and apply the parking brake Inspect the accelerator pedal and the area around it for any items or debris that may be obstructing its movement If none are found and the condition persists have your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized dealer Anti Lock Brake System This system helps you maintain steering control during eme
354. ou to select a category of music you would like to search for You can then choose to either seek or scan for the stations playing that category Parental Lockout allows you to lock and unlock channels change or reset your PIN or unlock all channels To use this feature you need your initial PIN which is 1234 Artist Title Team Alerts allows you to select Artists Titles and Teams that you would like the system to alert you to when they are playing on other channels Press Edit Alerts to delete or turn off alerts You can also set all alerts to on or off When an alert appears on the screen you can choose to Tune to the channel to Cancel the alert or to Disable Alerts If you are listening to a sporting event you can save your favorite teams so that the system can alert you when they are playing on a satellite radio channel Note Sirius does not support the Alert feature on all channels Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for Alert feature variation Electronic Serial Number ESN is required when you need to activate modify or track your satellite radio account The ESN is on the System Information Screen SR ESN XXXXXXXXXXXX To access your ESN press the bottom left corner of the touchscreen then SIRIUS gt Options Direct Tune Touch this button to manually enter the desired satellite channel number Touch Enter when you are done Browse Touch this button to view a list of all available stations Scroll to see mo
355. ough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase Electric brakes and manual automatic or surge type trailer brakes are safe if you install them properly and adjust them to the manufacturer s specifications The trailer brakes must meet local and federal regulations The rating for the tow vehicle s braking system operation is at the gross vehicle weight rating not the gross combined weight rating Separate functioning brake systems are required for safe control of towed vehicles and trailers weighing more than 1500 pounds 680 kilograms when loaded 230 Towing Trailer Lamps WARNING Never connect any trailer lamp wiring to the vehicle s tail lamp wiring this may damage the electrical system resulting in a fire Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible for assistance in proper trailer tow wiring installation Additional electrical equipment may be required Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles Make sure all running lights brake lights turn signals and hazard lights are working Before Towing a Trailer Practice turning stopping and backing up to get the feel of your vehicle trailer combination before starting on a trip When turning make wider turns so the trailer wheels clear curbs and other obstacles When Towing a Trailer e Do not drive faster than 70 mph 113 km h during the first 500 miles 800 kilometers e Do not make full throttle starts e Check your hitc
356. oulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest e Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip Always use booster seats in conjunction with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt Types of Booster Seats e Backless booster seats If your backless booster seat has a removable shield remove the shield If a vehicle seating position has a low seatback or no head restraint a backless booster seat may place your child s head as measured at the tops of the ears above the top of the seat In this case move the backless booster to another seating position with a higher seatback or head restraint and lap and shoulder belts or consider using a high back booster seat e High back booster seats If with a backless booster seat you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child s head a high back booster seat would be a better choice Child Safety 31 Children and booster seats vary in size and shape Choose a booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips never up across the stomach and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder The following drawings compare the ideal fit center to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder The drawings also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child s hips INS If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat upon w
357. our car from the elements We recommend that you wash and wax the painted surface once or twice a year When washing and waxing park your vehicle in a shaded area out of direct sunlight Always wash your vehicle before applying wax e Use a quality wax that does not contain abrasives e Follow the manufacturer s instructions to apply and remove the wax e Apply a small amount of wax in a back and forth motion not in circles e Do not allow wax to come in contact with any non body low gloss black colored trim The wax discolors or stains the parts over time such as Bumpers Grained door handles Side mouldings Mirror housings Windshield cowl area Do not apply wax to glass areas After waxing your car s paint should feel smooth and be free of streaks and smudges REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match your vehicle s color Take your color code printed on a sticker in the driver s door jamb to an authorized dealer to make sure you get the correct color e Before repairing minor paint damage use a cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover to remove particles such as bird droppings tree sap insect deposits tar spots road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips e Always read the instructions before using the products CLEANING THE ENGINE Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal
358. our new vehicle limited warranty Contact an authorized dealer for details and a copy of the warranty Exterior style e Splash guards e Deflectors Interior style e Ambient lighting eFloor mats e lluminated door sill plates Lifestyle eSUV camping tent eRear seat entertainment eRacks and carriers e Towing accessories e Cargo area protector e Cargo organizers e Cargo organization and management Peace of mind e Remote start e Vehicle security systems eForward bumper mounted e Vehicle cover warning sensors eLocking gas plug e Wheel locks The accessory manufacturer designs develops and therefore warrants Lincoln Licensed Accessories and does not design or test these accessories to Lincoln Motor Company engineering requirements Contact an authorized Lincoln dealer for the manufacturer s limited 332 Accessories warranty details and request a copy of the Lincoln Licensed Accessories product limited warranty from the accessory manufacturer For maximum vehicle performance keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle When adding accessories equipment passengers and luggage to your vehicle do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification label Ask an authorized dealer for specific weight information The Federal Communications Commission FCC and Canadian Rad
359. ow and needs to be refilled Factory Mode Contact Dealer Your vehicle is still in Factory mode This may not allow some features to operate properly See an authorized dealer Transport Mode Contact Dealer Your vehicle is still in Transport mode This may not allow some features to operate properly See an authorized dealer MyKey Messages Action Description MyKey active Drive Safely Displays when MyKey is active Speed Limited to xx MPH km h Displays when starting the vehicle and MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on Near Vehicle Top Speed Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is approaching 80 mph 130 km h Check Speed Drive Safely Displayed when a MyKey is in use and the optional setting is on and the vehicle exceeds a preselected speed Buckle Up to Unmute Audio Displays when a MyKey is in use and Belt Minder is activated Could Not Program Integrated Key Displays when an attempt is made to program a spare key using two existing MyKeys Vehicle at Top Speed of MyKey You have reached the speed limit Setting set for your MyKey Information Displays 117 MyKey Messages Action Description turns on control turns on MyKey Park Aid Cannot be With a MyKey in use park aid is Deactivated always on Off Road Messages Action Description For Off Road Slow to 5MPH Displays when your vehicle speed requirement for off raod mode entry has not be
360. own risk HERE and its licensors and their licensors and suppliers make no guarantees representations or warranties of any kind express or implied arising by law or otherwise including but not limited to content quality accuracy completeness effectiveness reliability fitness for a particular purpose usefulness use or results to be obtained from this Data or that the Data or server will be uninterrupted or error free Disclaimer of Warranty HERE AND ITS LICENSORS INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED OF QUALITY PERFORMANCE MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON INFRINGEMENT Some States Territories and Countries do not allow certain warranty exclusions so to that extent the above exclusion may not apply to you Appendices 439 Disclaimer of Liability HERE AND ITS LICENSORS INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM DEMAND OR ACTION IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS INJURY OR DAMAGES DIRECT OR INDIRECT WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THIS DATA OR FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT REVENUE CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS OR ANY OTHER DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DATA ANY DEFECT IN THIS DATA OR THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR
361. ownload photos from Phonebook gt On History After you connect your Bluetooth enabled phone to SYNC you can access any previously dialed received or missed calls You can also choose to save these to your Favorites or to Quick Dial Note This is a phone dependent feature If your phone does not support downloading call history using Bluetooth SYNC keeps track of calls made with the SYNC system Messaging Send text messages using your touchscreen See Text messaging later in this section Settings Touch this button to access various phone settings such as turning Bluetooth on and off managing your phonebook and more See Phone settings later in this section Text Messaging Note Downloading and sending text messages using Bluetooth are phone dependent features Note Certain features in text messaging are speed dependent and not available when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over 3 mph 5 km h Note SYNC does not download read text messages from your phone You can send and receive text messages using Bluetooth read them aloud and translate text messaging acronyms such as LOL 1 Touch the top left corner of the display to access the Phone menu 2 Select Messaging 3 Choose from the following e Listen speaker icon Dial Send Text View Delete MyLincoln Touch 383 Composing a Text Message Note This is a speed dependent feature It is unavailable when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over 3
362. oyment it is normal to notice a smoke like powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant This may consist of cornstarch talcum powder to lubricate the bag or sodium compounds for example baking soda that result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes but none of the residue is toxic While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries contact with a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions or swelling Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility as a result of the noise associated with a deploying airbag Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures facial and eye injuries or internal injuries particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment Thus it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control Routine maintenance of the airbags is not required RESTRAINT SAFETY SYSTEM The Restraint Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further reduce the risk of airbag related injuries The system is able to analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the appropriate s
363. p them become experts on the operation of your vehicle Ask your dealership about the training and certification their technicians have received Genuine Ford and Motorcraft Replacement Parts Dealerships stock Ford Motorcraft and Ford authorized branded re manufactured replacement parts These parts meet or exceed our specifications Parts installed at your dealership carry a nationwide 24 month or unlimited miles kilometers parts and labor limited warranty If you do not use Ford authorized parts they may not meet our specifications and depending on the part it could affect emissions compliance Convenience Many dealerships have extended evening and Saturday hours to make your service visit more convenient and they offer one stop shopping They can perform any services that are required on your vehicle from general maintenance to collision repairs Note Not all dealers have extended hours or body shops Please contact your dealer for details Scheduled Maintenance 445 Protecting Your Investment Maintenance is an investment that will pay dividends in the form of improved reliability durability and resale value To maintain the proper performance of your vehicle and its emission control systems it is imperative that scheduled maintenance be completed at the designated intervals Your vehicle is equipped with the Intelligent Oil Life Monitor IOLM system which displays a message in the information display at the proper
364. p3 only files with the mp3 extension are played other files are ignored by the system This enables you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety of tasks on your work computer home computer and your in vehicle system In track mode the system displays and plays the structure as if it were only one level deep all mp3 files play regardless of being in a specific folder In folder mode the system only plays the mp3 files in the current folder 338 Audio System AM FM CD PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM A B WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any hand held device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving Note The MyLincoln Touch system controls most of the audio features See the MyLincoln Touch chapter for more information A CD Slot Insert a CD B Eject Press this button to eject a CD C TUNE Turn this control to search through the radio frequency band manually D Seek Reverse and Fast Forward e In radio mode select a frequency band and press one of these buttons The system stops at the first station it fin
365. partments or safe driving abilities e Do not leave playing devices in your vehicle during extreme conditions as it could cause them damage See your device s manual for further information e Do not attempt to service or repair the system See your authorized dealer For your safety some SYNC functions are speed dependent Their use is limited to when your vehicle is traveling at speeds under 3 mph 5 km h Make sure that you review your device s manual before using it with SYNC 352 MyLincoln Touch Speed restricted Features Some features of this system may be too difficult to use while your vehicle is moving so they are restricted from use unless your vehicle is stationary e Screens that are too crowded with information such as Point of Interest reviews and ratings Sirius Travel Link sports scores movie times and ski conditions e Any action that requires you to use a keyboard is restricted such as entering a navigation destination or editing information e All lists are limited so the user can view fewer entries such as phone contacts or recent phone call entries See the following chart for more specific examples Restricted Features Cellular Phone Pairing a Bluetooth phone phonebook contacts from a USB recent phone call entries System Functionality Editing settings while the rear view camera or Active Park Assist are active Wi Fi and Wireless Editing wireless settings Editing the list of wireless
366. pen Genuine Ford replacement collision parts meet our stringent requirements for fit finish structural integrity corrosion protection and dent resistance During vehicle development we validate that these parts deliver the intended level of protection as a whole system A great way to know for sure you are getting this level of protection is to use genuine Ford replacement collision parts Warranty on Replacement Parts Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement parts are the only replacement parts that benefit from a Ford Warranty Damage caused to your vehicle as a result of the failure of non Ford parts may not be covered by the Ford Warranty For additional information see the terms and conditions of the Ford Warranty Introduction 15 SPECIAL NOTICES New Vehicle Limited Warranty For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by your vehicle s New Vehicle Limited Warranty see the warranty information that is provided to you along with your owner s manual Special Instructions For your added safety your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls WARNING Please read the Supplementary Restraints System chapter Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury WARNING Front seat mounted rear facing child or infant seats should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag Using your vehicle with a snowplow Do not use this vehicle for
367. per washer 86 Windshield washer fluid and WIDGIS iusso o eer dieses 85 checking and adding Tto eoa dert trs 269 270 replacing wiper blades 272 Wrecker towing sse 232
368. ponents and no other EULA terms are provided along with the Supplemental Components then the terms of this EULA shall apply If MS Microsoft Corporation their affiliates and or their designated agent make available Supplemental Components and no other EULA terms are 428 Appendices provided then the terms of this EULA shall apply except that the MS Microsoft Corporation or affiliate entity providing the Supplemental Component s shall be the licensor of the Supplemental Component s FORD MOTOR COMPANY MS Microsoft Corporation their affiliates and or their designated agent reserve the right to discontinue without liability any Internet based services provided to you or made available to you through the use of the SOFTWARE e Links to Third Party Sites The MS SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to link to third party sites through the use of the SOFTWARE The third party sites are not under the control of MS Microsoft Corporation their affiliates and or their designated agent Neither MS nor Microsoft Corporation nor their affiliates nor their designated agent are responsible for i the contents of any third party sites any links contained in third party sites or any changes or updates to third party sites or ii webcasting or any other form of transmission received from any third party sites If the SOFTWARE provides links to third party sites those links are provided to you only as a convenience and the inclusion of
369. prevent contact with other vehicles or objects or to detect parked vehicles people animals or infrastructure fences guardrails trees etc It is designed to alert the driver to vehicles in the blind zones Note When a vehicle passes quickly through the blind zone typically fewer than two seconds the system does not trigger Driving Aids 205 Using the Systems BLIS turns on when the engine is started and the vehicle is driven forward above 3 mph 5 km h it remains on while the transmission is in D Drive or N Neutral If shifted out of D Drive or N Neutral the system enters CTA mode Once shifted back into D Drive BLIS turns back on when the vehicle is driven above 3 mph 5 km h Note BLIS does not function in R Reverse or P Park or provide any additional warning when a turn signal is on CTA detects approaching vehicles from up to 45 feet 14 meters away though coverage decreases when the sensors are blocked Reversing slowly helps increase the coverage area and effectiveness WARNING To help avoid personal injury NEVER use the CTA system as a replacement for using the interior and exterior mirrors and looking over your shoulder before backing out of a parking space CTA is not a replacement for careful driving In this first example the left sensor is only partially obstructed zone coverage is nearly maximized 206 Driving Aids Zone coverage also decreases when parking at shallow ang
370. r WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is dangerous A significant decrease in braking performance may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer as soon as possible Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury 102 Instrument Cluster Cruise Control It will illuminate when you switch this feature on Direction Indicator Illuminates when the left or right turn signal or the hazard gt warning flasher is switched on If the indicators stay on or flash faster check for a burned out bulb Door Ajar Displays when the ignition is on and any door is not completely closed Engine Coolant Temperature E Illuminates when the engine coolant temperature is high Stop mM the vehicle as soon as possible switch off the engine and let cool Engine Oil If it illuminates with the engine running or when you are driving this indicates a malfunction Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch the engine off Check the engine oil level Note Do not resume your journey if it illuminates despite the level being correct Have the system checked by your authorized dealer Fasten Safety belt It will illuminate and a chime will sound to remind you to fasten A your safety belt Front Airbag P If it fails to illuminate on startup continues to flash or remain
371. r XXX Ib on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lb 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1 400 Ib and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ib 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ib 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity e Suppose your vehicle has a 1400 Ib 635 kg cargo and luggage capacity You decide to go golfing Is there enough load capacity to carry you 4 of your friends and all the golf bags You and four friends average 220 Ib 99 kg each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 Ib 13 5 kg each The calculation would be 1400 5 x 220 5 x 30 1400 1100 150 150 Ib Yes you have enough load capacity in your
372. r authorized dealer if you choose to dispose of the funnel Do not use aftermarket funnels they will not work and can damage the Easy Fuel system The included funnel has been specially designed to work safely with your vehicle 166 Fuel and Refueling REFUELING WARNING Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severe injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island Turn off your engine when you are refueling Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle this is against the law in some places Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel Do not use personal electronic devices while refueling WARNING Stop refueling after the fuel pump nozzle automatically shuts off for the second time Failure to follow this will fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and could lead to fuel overflowing Note Wait at least 10 seconds before removing the fuel pump nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain into the fuel tank Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build up when filling an ungrounded fuel container Place approved fuel container on the ground DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle including the cargo area Keep the fuel pu
373. r portable music player the information transfers if supported by your device When you are connected to iTunes the tags appear to remind you of the songs you would like to download See HD Radio information later in this chapter Direct Tune Touch this button to manually enter the desired station number Touch Enter when you are done HD Radio Information If Available Note HD Radio broadcasts are not available in all markets HD Radio technology is the digital evolution of analog AM FM radio Your system has a special receiver that allows it to receive digital broadcasts where available in addition to the analog broadcasts it already receives Digital broadcasts provide a better sound quality than analog broadcasts with free crystal clear audio and no static or distortion For 362 MyLincoln Touch more information and a guide to available stations and programming please visit www hdradio com When HD Radio is on and you tune to a station broadcasting HD Radio technology you may notice the following indicators on your screen HD logo is grey when acquiring a digital station and then HD changes to orange when digital audio is playing When this logo is available you may also see Title and Artist fields on screen Multicast indicator appears in FM mode only if the current station is broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts The highlighted numbers signify available digital channels where new or different content
374. r previous Steering Wheel 81 Type Two A Volume up B Seek up or next C Media D Seek down or previous E Volume down Media Press the media button repeatedly to scroll through available audio modes Seek Next or Previous Press the seek button to e tune the radio to the next or previous stored preset e play the next or previous track Press and hold the seek button to e tune the radio to the next station up or down the frequency band e seek through a track 82 Steering Wheel VOICE CONTROL IF EQUIPPED Type One A Phone mode B Voice recognition Press OK to confirm selection See the SYNC or Navigation System chapter Steering Wheel 83 Type Two A Phone mode B Voice recognition Press OK to confirm selection See the SYNC or Navigation System chapter CRUISE CONTROL See the Cruise Control chapter 84 Pedals ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED WARNING Never use the controls when your feet are on the accelerator or brake pedals especially when the vehicle is moving Note Adjust the pedals only when your vehicle is in park P Depending on your vehicle and equipment level the shape and location of your power adjustable pedal control can vary e f your control is vertical then it is to the left of the steering column and on the instrument panel e f your control is horizontal then it is on the left side of the steering column The Vertical Control
375. r the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials For fabric carpets cloth seats safety belts and seats equipped with side airbags e Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner e Apply a layer of high quality foam cleaner designed for automotive interiors such as Motorcraft Carpet and Upholstery Cleaner to the dry stained area s of the item you are cleaning and let it soak in for one minute If grease or tar is present on the material spot clean the area first with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover In Canada use Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner e If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning clean the entire area immediately but do not oversaturate or the ring can set e Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials 286 Vehicle Care Cleaning Black Label Interior If Equipped Note Alcantara microfiber fabric is made of polyester microfiber with micro porous polyurethane Using commercially available fabric cleaners can cause permanent damage Note Do not use commercially available leather and vinyl cleaning products on Alcantara microfiber cloth fabric Note Lincoln Black Label vehicles may have Alcantara microfiber fabric on the seats headliner floor mats and door panels Depending on the type of stain use water lemon juice or pure ethyl alcohol when
376. ra Delay When shifting the transmission out of R Reverse and into any gear other than P Park the camera image remains in the display until your vehicle speed reaches 5 mph 8 km h This occurs when the rear camera delay feature is on or until a radio button is selected Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF The default setting for the rear camera delay is OFF 202 Cruise Control PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal USING CRUISE CONTROL WARNING Do not use cruise control in heavy traffic on winding roads or when the road surface is slippery This could result in loss of vehicle control serious injury or death WARNING When you are going downhill your vehicle speed may increase above the set speed The system will not apply the brakes Change down a gear to assist the system in maintaining the set speed Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control serious injury or death Note Cruise control will disengage if your vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph 16 km h below your set speed while driving uphill Type One Cruise Control 203 Type Two Switching On Cruise Control The cruise controls are located on the steering wheel Press and release ON Setting a Speed 1 Accelerate to the desired speed 2 Press and release SET 3 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal The ind
377. rage battery power and signal strength e The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the United States Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number In the Event of a Crash Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut off which would trigger 911 Assist however SYNC tries to contact emergency services if 911 Assist triggers If a connected phone sustains damage or loses connection to SYNC SYNC searches for and tries to connect to any available previously paired phone and tries to make the call to 911 Before making the call e SYNC provides a short window of time about 10 seconds to cancel the call If you fail to cancel the call SYNC attempts to dial 911 e SYNC says the following or a similar message SYNC will attempt to call 911 to cancel the call press Cancel on your screen or press and hold the phone button on your steering wheel If you do not cancel the call and SYNC makes a successful call a pre recorded message plays for the 911 operator and then the occupant s in your vehicle is able to talk with the operator Be prepared to provide your name phone number and location immediately because not all 911 systems are capable of receiving this information electronically 911 Assist May Not Work If e Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware sustains damage in a crash e The vehicle s battery or SYNC system has no power e The phones s previously paired or conne
378. ransmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack even if the transmission is in park P WARNING To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire be sure to place the transmission in park P set the parking brake and block in both directions the wheel that is diagonally opposite other side and end of the vehicle to the tire being changed WARNING Never get underneath a vehicle that is supported only by a jack If the vehicle slips off the jack you or someone else could be seriously injured WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 318 Wheels and Tires WARNING Always use the jack provided as original equipment with your vehicle If using a jack other than the one provided as original equipment with your vehicle make sure the jack capacity is adequate for the vehicle weight including any vehicle cargo or modifications WARNING Disable the power running boards before jacking lifting or placing any object under the vehicle Never place your hand between the power running board and vehicle as extended power running boards will retract when the doors are closed Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury Note Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked
379. rd com www me ford com If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate to any of the above locations register your vehicle identification number VIN and new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations amp Global Growth Initiatives by emailing expcac ford com If you are in another foreign country contact the nearest authorized dealer In the event your inquiry is unresolved communicate your concern with the dealership s Sales Manager Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager If you require additional assistance or clarification please contact the respective Customer Relationship Center as previously listed Customers in the U S should call 1 800 392 3673 ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER S LITERATURE To order the publications in this portfolio contact Helm Incorporated at HELM INCORPORATED 47911 Halyard Drive Plymouth Michigan 48170 Attention Customer Service Or to order a free publication catalog call toll free 1 800 782 4356 Monday Friday 8 00 a m 6 00 p m EST Helm Incorporated can also be reached by their website www helminc com Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card check or money order 250 Customer Assistance Obtaining a French Owner s Manual A French owner s manual can be obtained from your authorized dealer or by contacting Helm Incorporated using the contact information listed previously in this section REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS U S ONLY If
380. re categories Touch the station you want to listen to Touch Skip if you want to skip this channel Touch Lock if you do not want anyone to listen to this channel Touch Title or Artist to see song and artists on other stations 368 MyLincoln Touch Satellite Radio Voice Commands EB If you are listening to Sirius satellite radio press the voice i button on the steering wheel control When prompted say any of the commands in the following chart If you are not listening to Sirius satellite radio press the voice button and after the tone say Sirius then any of the commands in the following chart SIRIUS Sirius lt 0 223 gt SAT 3 If you have said Sports game see the following Sports game chart If you have said Tune see the following Tune chart MyLincoln Touch 369 SAT 3 SAT 3 preset lt gt Sirius Satellite Radio Information Note Sirius reserves the unrestricted right to change rearrange add or delete programming including canceling moving or adding particular channels and its prices at any time with or without notice to you Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes Note This receiver includes the eCos real time operating system eCos is published under the eCos License Sirius satellite radio is a subscription based satellite radio 4 om service that broadcasts a variety of music sports
381. required You must also have the active SYNC Services Bluetooth enabled cellular phone paired and connected to the system in order to connect to and use SYNC Services See Phone earlier in this chapter for pairing instructions MyLincoln Touch 387 Note This feature does not function properly if you have enabled caller ID blocking on your mobile phone Make sure your mobile phone is not blocking caller ID before using SYNC Services Note The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions Any navigation features are provided only as an aid Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver if you would be placed in an unsafe situation or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of errors changes in roads traffic conditions or driving conditions Note When you connect the service uses GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect your vehicle s current location travel direction and speed to help provide you with the directions traffic reports or business searches you request Further to provide the services you request for continuous improvement the service may collect and record call detai
382. rgency stops by keeping the brakes from locking This lamp momentarily illuminates when you turn the ignition GS on If the light does not illuminate during start up remains on or flashes the anti lock brake system may be disabled Have the system checked by an authorized dealer If the anti lock brake system is disabled normal braking is still effective DO If the brake warning lamp illuminates when you release the EYE parking brake have the system checked by an authorized dealer Brakes 187 HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI LOCK BRAKES When the system is operating the brake pedal will pulse and may travel further Maintain pressure on the brake pedal You may also hear a noise from the system This is normal The anti lock braking system will not eliminate the risks when e You drive too closely to the vehicle in front of you e Your vehicle is hydroplaning e You take corners too fast e The road surface is poor PARKING BRAKE WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the transmission is securely latched in park P To set the parking brake press the parking brake pedal down until the pedal stops The brake warning lamp will illuminate and will remain illuminated until the parking brake is released To release pull the brake release lever located at the lower left side of the instrument panel HILL START ASSIST WARNING The hill start assist feature does not replace the parking brake
383. ributing Hitch Vehicles with Automatic Leveling Suspension WARNING Do not adjust a weight distributing hitch to any position where the rear bumper of the vehicle is higher than it was before attaching the trailer Doing so will defeat the function of the weight distributing hitch which may cause unpredictable handling and could result in serious personal injury Note If you do not move the loaded vehicle for approximately 12 hours the leveling system may bleed down to a lower height This can be especially apparent if you leave a trailer attached to the parked vehicle for long periods You must drive your vehicle in order to re level the suspension When connecting a trailer to a vehicle with automatic leveling suspension using a weight distributing hitch always use the following procedure 1 Load the interior of the vehicle to a weight similar to that which you intend to carry when towing This includes things such as passenger weight and cargo 2 Drive the vehicle for approximately 2 miles 3 kilometers to re level the suspension 3 Park your vehicle without the trailer on a level surface 4 Measure the height to the top of your vehicle s front wheel opening on the fender This is H1 b Attach the trailer to your vehicle without the weight distributing bars connected 6 Make sure you securely attach and lock the trailer tongue to the hitch 7 Install safety chains lighting and trailer brake controls as requir
384. rica U S Virgin Islands Central America the Caribbean and Israel contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY Customer Relationship Center 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park 3 Allen Park Michigan 48101 U S A Telephone 813 594 4857 FAX 313 390 0804 Email expcac ford com For customers in Guam the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands CNMI America Samoa and the U S Virgin Islands please feel free to call our Toll Free Number 800 841 FORD 3673 If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Puerto Rico contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY Customer Relationship Center 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park 3 Allen Park Michigan 48101 Telephone 800 841 FORD 3673 FAX 313 390 0804 Email prcac ford com www ford com pr Customer Assistance 249 If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in the Middle East contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY Customer Relationship Center 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park 3 Allen Park Michigan 48101 Telephone 971 4 3326084 Toll Free Number of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia 800 8971409 Local Telephone Number of Kuwait 248105775 FAX 971 4 3327299 Email menacac fo
385. rious injury Press the release area on the rear edge of the bin door to open the childminder mirror The door will open to full open position The rear view mirror may have to be adjusted to its lower arm position to prevent interference when the childminder mirror is extended down REAR QUARTER WINDOWS WARNING Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children play with the power rear quarter windows They may seriously injure themselves WARNING When closing the power rear quarter windows you should verify that it is free of obstructions and ensure that children and or pets are not in the proximity of the window opening Press and hold the VENT control to open the windows Pull and hold the VENT control to close the windows Note Vehicles without a moonroof will only have the VENT button 98 Windows and Mirrors SUN VISORS Rotate the visor toward the side window and extend it rearward for extra sunlight coverage Lift the cover to switch on the lamp MOONROOF IF EQUIPPED j WARNING Do not let children play with the moonroof or leave children unattended in the vehicle They may seriously hurt themselves A N WARNING When closing the moonroof you should verify that it iN is free of obstructions and ensure that children and or pets are not in the proximity of the moonroof opening The sliding shade can be manually opened or closed when the moonroof is closed Pul
386. rity and benefits Lincoln ESP has to offer while paying over time You are pre approved with no credit checks no hassles To learn more call our Lincoln ESP specialists at 800 367 3377 Lincoln ESP P O Box 8072 Royal Oak MI 48068 0039 Extended Service Plan 335 SERVICE PLANS CANADA ONLY You can get more protection for your vehicle by purchasing a Lincoln Extended Service Plan Lincoln Extended Service Plan is the only service contract backed by Lincoln Motor Company of Canada Limited Depending on the plan you purchase Lincoln Extended Service Plan provides benefits such as e Rental reimbursement e Coverage for certain maintenance and wear items e Protection against repair costs after your New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage expires e Roadside Assistance benefits There are several Lincoln Extended Service Plans available in various time distance and deductible combinations Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving needs including reimbursement for towing and rental When you purchase Lincoln Extended Service Plan you receive added peace of mind protection throughout Canada and the United States provided by a network of participating authorized Lincoln Motor Company dealers Note Repairs performed outside of Canada and the United States are not eligible for Lincoln Extended Service Plan coverage This information is subject to change For more information visit your local Lincoln of Canada dealer or w
387. roads 1 First e Transmission operates in 1st gear only e Provides maximum engine braking e Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever e Will not downshift into 1 First at high speeds allows for 1 First when vehicle reaches slower speeds Forced downshifts e Allowed in D Drive only e Press the accelerator to the floor e Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear Understanding your SelectShift Automatic transmission This vehicle may be equipped with a SelectShift Automatic transmission SST gearshift lever The SST is an automatic transmission with the ability for the driver to change gears up or down without a clutch as desired The SST feature has two modes PRS and M mode M Manual Moving the gearshift lever from drive position D Drive to M Manual gives you the ability to manually change gears The current gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster Transmission 175 Press the buttons on the gearshift lever to manually make shifts e Press on the gearshift lever button to manually upshift the transmission e Press on the gearshift lever button to manually downshift the transmission When manual control is no longer desired return the transmission to the D Drive position The transmission will operate in gears one through six Recommended shift speeds Upshifts when accelerating Shift from 15 mph 24 km h 3 3 25 mph 40 km h 40 mph 64 km h
388. rograms to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration If the service engine soon indicator is on or the bulb does not work the vehicle may need to be serviced See On board Diagnostics OBD II in this chapter Your vehicle may not pass the I M test if the service engine soon indicator is on or not working properly bulb is burned out or if the OBD II system has determined that some of the emission control systems have not been properly checked In this case the vehicle is considered not ready for I M testing If the vehicle s engine or transmission has just been serviced or the battery has recently run down or been replaced the OBD II system may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing To determine if the vehicle is ready for I M testing turn the ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds without cranking the engine If the service engine soon indicator blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing if the service engine soon indicator stays on solid it means that the vehicle is ready for I M testing The OBD II system is designed to check the emission control system during normal driving A complete check may take several days If the vehicle is not ready for I M testing the following driving cycle consisting of mixed city and highway driving may be performed 15 minutes of steady drivin
389. rol parking aid blind spot information system BLIS with cross traffic alert lane departure warning and the forward collision warning system Configurable Settings With an admin key you can configure certain MyKey settings when you first create a MyKey and before you recycle the key or restart the vehicle You can also change the settings afterward with an admin key e A vehicle speed limit can be set Warnings will be shown in the display followed by an audible tone when your vehicle reaches the set speed You cannot override the set speed by fully depressing the accelerator pedal or by setting cruise control e Various vehicle speed minders can be set Once you select a speed it will be shown in the display followed by an audible tone when the preselected vehicle speed is exceeded MyKey 61 Audio system maximum volume of 4596 for some audio systems A message will be shown in the display when you attempt to exceed the limited volume Also the speed sensitive or compensated automatic volume control will be disabled Always on setting When this is selected you will not be able to turn off certain features CREATING A MYKEY Use the information display to create a MyKey I 2 3 Insert the key you want to program into the ignition Switch the ignition on Access the main menu on the information display Press SETUP using the information display buttons until PRESS RESET TO CREATE MYKEY is displayed Press and re
390. roperly i e if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage Maintenance 269 Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives treatments or cleaning agents The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components BRAKE FLUID CHECK Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX lines are within the normal operating range there is no need to add fluid If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range the performance of the system could be compromised seek service from your authorized dealer immediately POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK Your vehicle is equipped with an electric power steering EPS system There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill For additional information on the electric power steering EPS system Refer to Driving Aids FUEL FILTER Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel tank Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed WASHER FLUID CHECK WARNING If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40 F 5 C use washer fluid with antifreeze protection Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specifications See the technical specific
391. rs heat to remove ice mist and fog when you turn the rear window defroster on Climate Control 127 REMOTE START IF EQUIPPED The remote start feature allows you to pre condition the interior of your vehicle The climate control system works to achieve comfort according to your previous settings Note You cannot adjust the system during remote start operation Turn the ignition on to return the system to its previous settings You can now make adjustments normally but you need to turn certain vehicle dependent features back on such as Heated seats Cooled seats Heated steering wheel Heated mirrors Heated rear window You can adjust the default remote start settings using the information display controls See the Information Displays chapter Automatic Settings In hot weather the system is set to 72 F 22 C The cooled seats are set to high if available and selected to AUTO in the information display In moderate weather the system either heats or cools based on previous settings The rear defroster heated mirrors and heated seats do not automatically turn on In cold weather the system is set to 72 F 22 C The heated seats are set to high if available and selected to AUTO in the information display The rear defroster and heated mirrors automatically turn on 128 Seats SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION WARNING Sitting improperly out of position or with the seatback reclined too far c
392. rs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized dealer While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will provide warranty service we recommend you return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training equipment or both so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs This means that depending on the warranty repair needed you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your vehicle to the authorized dealer Repairs will be made using Ford or Motorcraft parts or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by Ford Away from home If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed below to find the nearest authorized dealer In the United States Mailing address Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center P O Box 6248 Dearborn MI 48121 Telephone 1 800 521 4140 TDD for the hearing impaired 1 800 232 5952 Online Additional information and resources are available online at www lincolnowner com e U S dealer locator by Dealer Name City State or Zip Code e Owner Guides e Maintenance Schedules e Recalls e Ford Extended Service Plans e Ford Genuine Accessories e Service specials and promotion
393. rsal garage door opener replaces the common hand held garage door opener with a three button transmitter that is integrated into the driver s sun visor The system includes two primary features a garage door opener and a platform for remote activation of devices with the home As well as being programmed for garage doors the system transmitter can be programmed to operate entry gate operators security systems entry door locks and home or office lighting Additional system information can be found online at www homelink com or by calling the toll free help line on 1 800 355 3515 148 Universal Garage Door Opener If Equipped Programming Note Put a new battery in the hand held transmitter This will ensure quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal 1 With your vehicle parked outside of the garage and your key in the ignition turn the key so that the ignition is in the on position 2 Hold your hand held garage door transmitter 1 3 inches 2 8 centimeters away from the HomeLink button you want to program 3 Using both hands simultaneously press and hold the desired HomeLink button and the hand held transmitter button DO NOT release either one until the HomeLink indicator light flashes slowly and then rapidly When the indicator light flashes rapidly both buttons may be released The rapid flashing indicates successful training 4 Press and hold the HomeLink button you progra
394. s 244 Customer Assistance In Canada Mailing address Lincoln Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited P O Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6K 1C8 Telephone 1 800 387 9333 Online www lincolncanada com Twitter English LincolnMotorCA Twitter French GLincolnQC Instagram LincolnMotorCA Facebook LincolnMotorCA Additional assistance If you have questions or concerns or are unsatisfied with the service you are receiving follow these steps 1 Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling servicing authorized dealer 2 If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved contact the Sales Manager Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager 3 If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company policies please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center In order to help you serve you better please have the following information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Your telephone number home and business e The name of the authorized dealer and city where located e The vehicle s current odometer reading In some states you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state s warranty laws Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt in some states Customer Assistance 245 In the United States a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB A
395. s 1600 kilometers Vary your speed frequently and change up through the gears early Do not labor the engine Do not tow during the first 1000 miles 1600 kilometers ECONOMICAL DRIVING Fuel economy is affected by several things such as how you drive the conditions you drive under and how you maintain your vehicle There are some things to keep in mind that may improve your fuel economy e Accelerate and slow down in a smooth moderate fashion e Drive at steady speeds without stopping e Anticipate stops slowing down may eliminate the need to stop e Combine errands and minimize stop and go driving e Close the windows for high speed driving e Drive at reasonable speeds traveling at 55 mph 88 km h uses 1596 less fuel than traveling at 65 mph 105 km h e Keep the tires properly inflated and use only the recommended size e Use the recommended engine oil e Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance There are also some things you may not want to do because they may reduce your fuel economy e Sudden or hard accelerations e Rev the engine before turning it off e dle for periods longer than one minute e Warm up your vehicle on cold mornings e Use the air conditioner or front defroster e Use the speed control in hilly terrain e Rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving e Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a trailer e Carry unnecessary weight approximately 1 mpg 0 4 km L is lost for ev
396. s above the bottom edge of the rear bumper Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components e Causing internal damage to the components e Affecting driveability emissions and reliability Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime the rear axle submerges in water Water may have contaminated the rear axle lubricant which does not normally require checking or changing unless it is leaking or other axle repair is required 232 Towing TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE If you need to have your vehicle towed contact a professional towing service or if you are a member of a roadside assistance program your roadside assistance service provider We recommend the use of a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your vehicle Do not tow with a slingbelt Ford Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure Vehicle damage may occur if towed incorrectly or by any other means Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow truck operators Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for proper hook up and towing procedures for your vehicle It is acceptable to have your two wheel drive vehicle towed with the front wheels on the ground without dollies and the rear wheels off the ground We recommend towing a four wheel drive vehicle with all wheels off the ground such as using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment Towing 233 TOWING T
397. s PAN on it indicates a malfunction Have the system checked by your authorized dealer A chime will sound when there is a malfunction in the indicator light High Beam Es It will illuminate when the headlamp high beam is switched on It will flash when you use the headlamp flasher Instrument Cluster 103 Hill descent if equipped Illuminates when hill descent is switched on Liftgate ajar It will illuminate when the ignition is on and liftgate is not amt completely closed Low Fuel Level It will illuminate when the fuel level is low or near empty Refuel as soon as possible Low Tire Pressure I It will illuminate when your tire pressure is low If the lamp remains on with the engine running or when driving check your tire pressure as soon as possible The lamp also illuminates momentarily when you switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is functional If it does not illuminate when you switch the ignition on or begins to flash at any time have the system checked by an authorized dealer Refer to Wheels and Tires for more information Low Washer Fluid AEN lt will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low Parking Lamps It will illuminate when you switch the parking lamps on Powertrain Fault Illuminates when a powertrain fault has been detected Contact PA your authorized dealer as soon as possible 104 Instrument Cluster Service Engine Soon The service engine soon indicator light illum
398. s etc The power point can switch to a fault mode when it is overloaded overheated or shorted Unplug your device and turn the ignition off then on for overloading and shorting conditions Let the system cool off then turn the ignition off then on for an overheating condition 154 Auxiliary Power Points The power point can provide power whenever the ignition is on and the indicator light is on The indicator light is located in the top left corner of the power point When the indicator light is e on power point is ready to supply power e off power point power supply is off ignition is not on e blinking power point is in fault mode Storage Compartments 155 CENTER CONSOLE Stow items in the cupholder carefully as items may become loose during hard braking acceleration or collisions including hot drinks which may spill Available console features include A Cupholders B Utility compartment coin holder slots tissue box holder audio input jack and USB port C Power point rear climate controls rear audio controls rear heated seat controls and 110 volt AC power point D Rear cupholders E Side storage OVERHEAD CONSOLE IF EQUIPPED The appearance of the overhead console will vary according to your option package Press near the rear edge of the door to open it 156 Starting and Stopping the Engine GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING Extended idling at high engine speeds can prod
399. s on For auto fold mirrors the Lincoln welcome mat turns on when welcome lighting or lighted entry turns on and the mirrors have been automatically folded in upon locking or using the switch on the door Note Moisture frost and ice build up or other types of contamination on the surface of the light lens can cause non permanent distortion or reduced brightness of the image Do not use abrasive materials to clean the lens Note If you enable auto fold and then you fold the mirrors in manually to the door window glass then the welcome lights will not turn on INTERIOR LAMPS Front Row Map Lamps To turn on the map lamps press the outer edge of the clear lens The front row map lamp lights when e any door is opened 7N ZN e the instrument panel dimmer switch is rotated until the courtesy lamps come on e the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is off 92 Lighting Second Row Map Lamps The second row map lamps are located in the headliner above the second row seats The second row map lamp lights when e any door is opened e the instrument panel dimmer switch is rotated until the courtesy lamps come on and e any of the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is off Press the controls to activate the lamps Rear Cargo Lamp The rear cargo lamp lights when e any door is opened and the switch is in the middle position e the instrument panel dimmer switch is
400. s amd Airbag Indicator in this chapter Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seats The Safety Canopy will not interfere with children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the doors along the side window opening The design and development of the Safety Canopy included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags including the Safety Canopy e ry Supplementary Restraints System 51 CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG INDICATOR WARNING Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of your vehicle including frame bumper front end body structure and tow hooks may affect the performance of the airbag system increasing the risk of injury Do not modify the front end of your vehicle Your vehicle has a collection of crash and occupant sensors which provide information to the restraints control module The restraints control module deploys activates the front safety belt pretensioners driver airbag passenger airbag seat mounted side airbags and the Safety Canopy Based on the type of accident frontal impact side impact or rollover the restraints control module will deploy the appropriate s
401. safety belts if equipped or activates the fuel pump shut off your SYNC equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by dialing 911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth enabled phone You can learn more about the 911 Assist feature visit www SYNCMyRide com www SYNCMyRide ca or www syncmaroute ca e For information on airbag deployment see the Supplementary Restraints System chapter e For information on the fuel pump shut off see the Roadside Emergencies chapter Setting 911 Assist On If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation touch the i Information button to access these features If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation touch the corner of the touchscreen with the green tab Press Apps gt 911 Assist gt On You can also access 911 Assist by e Pressing the Settings icon gt Settings gt Phone gt 911 o Assist or e Pressing the Settings icon gt Help gt 911 Assist To Make Sure that 911 Assist Works Properly e SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the incident and throughout feature activation and use e The 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident e You must pair and connect a Bluetooth enabled and compatible phone to SYNC e A connected Bluetooth enabled phone must have the ability to make and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident MyLincoln Touch 395 e A connected Bluetooth enabled phone must have adequate network cove
402. sh the system in particular the front and rear hinge arms with a high pressure car wash wand The running boards automatically move when the doors are opened to assist entering and exiting the vehicle Automatic Power Deploy The running boards will extend down and out when the doors are opened Automatic Power Stow The running boards will return to the stowed position after a two second delay when the doors are closed Load Carrying 221 Manual Power Deploy To manually operate the running boards refer to the nformation Displays chapter e This feature can manually set the running boards in the deployed OUT position for access to the roof e When running boards are manually set in the deployed position they will return to the stowed position and enter automatic mode when the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph 8 km h Enable and Disable To enable and disable the power running board feature refer to the Information Displays chapter e When this feature is disabled OFF the running boards will move to the stowed position regardless of the position of the doors e When this feature is enabled AUTO the running boards will move back to the correct positions based off of the door positions Bounce Back If an object is in the way of the moving running board it will reverse direction and move to the end of travel 222 Towing TOWING A TRAILER WARNING Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
403. sher Fluid in Canada Replace your wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly e Do not use abrasive materials as they may cause scratches e Do not use fuel kerosene or paint thinner to clean any parts If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion clean the outer surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild abrasive cleaning solution After cleaning rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water Note Do not use sharp objects such as a razor blade to clean the inside of the rear window or to remove decals as it may cause damage to the rear window defroster s heated grid lines Vehicle Care 285 CLEANING THE INTERIOR WARNING Do not use cleaning solvents bleach or dye on the vehicle s safety belts as these actions may weaken the belt webbing WARNING On vehicles equipped with seat mounted airbags do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents Such products could contaminate the side airbag system and affect performance of the side airbag in a collision Note Follow the same procedure for cleaning leather seats when cleaning leather interior See Cleaning Leather Seats Note Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners which can stain and discolo
404. shield to remove it from the arm 3 Install the new wiper blade on the arm and press it into place until a click is heard Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and windshield Refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning chapter To prolong the life of the wiper blades it is highly recommended to scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers The layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the wiper rubber element Changing the Rear Window Wiper Blade To replace the rear wiper blade 1 Pull the wiper arm as far away from the glass as possible Do not use excessive force because it can break the wiper arm Hold it there until the next step 2 Grasp the wiper blade and rotate it away from the wiper arm using moderate force until it disengages from the wiper arm f g Lb p 3 Once the wiper blade is loose slide it away from the wiper arm Maintenance 273 4 To attach the new wiper to the wiper arm align the cross pin and keyway denoted with the arrows and firmly press the wiper blade Boer ve into the wiper arm until an audible se snap is heard Cae If you find this procedure too difficult please see your dealer AIR FILTER CHECK WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running Note F
405. sisting battery 4 Make the final connection of the negative cable to an exposed metal part of the stalled vehicle s engine away from the battery and the carburetor or fuel injection system Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades belts moving parts of both engines or any fuel delivery system parts 242 Roadside Emergencies Jump Starting 1 Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at a moderately increased speed 2 Start the engine of the disabled vehicle 3 Once the disabled vehicle has been started run both engines for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables Removing the Jumper Cables Note In the illustration the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate the assisting boosting battery Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected 1 Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface 2 Remove the jumper cable on the negative terminal of the booster vehicle s battery 3 Remove the jumper cable from positive terminal of the ES booster vehicle s battery 4 Remove the jumper cable from the positive terminal of the disabled vehicle s battery After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables removed allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can relearn its idle conditions Customer Assistance 243 GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED Warranty repai
406. smission Tow Haul if equipped Illuminates when the Tow Haul feature has been activated hM Refer to the Transmission chapter for transmission function and operation If the light flashes steadily have the system serviced immediately damage to the transmission could occur Instrument Cluster 105 4X2 P3 Illuminates momentarily when two wheel drive high is selected 4X4 High L3 Illuminates when four wheel drive high is engaged 4X4 AUTO PUN Displays when using the 4x4 system AUTO AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND INDICATORS Key In Ignition Warning Chime Sounds when the key is left in the ignition in the off or accessory position and the driver s door is opened Headlamps On Warning Chime Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on the ignition is off the key is not in the ignition and the driver s door is opened Parking Brake On Warning Chime Sounds when you have left the parking brake on and drive your vehicle If the warning chime remains on after you have released the parking brake have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately Turn Signal Chime Sounds when the direction indicator has been activated to signal a turn and not turned off after the vehicle is driven more than 1 5 miles 2 4 km 106 Information Displays GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using an
407. snowplowing Your vehicle is not equipped with a snowplowing package Using your vehicle as an ambulance Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance Your vehicle is not equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation Package 16 Introduction MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT Using mobile communications equipment is becoming increasingly important in the conduct of business and personal affairs However you must not compromise your own or others safety when using such equipment Mobile communications can enhance personal safety and security when appropriately used particularly in emergency situations Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications equipment to avoid negating these benefits Mobile communication equipment includes but is not limited to cellular phones pagers portable email devices text messaging devices and portable two way radios WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving EXPORT UNIQUE NON UNITED STATES CANADA VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION
408. sories Contact your authorized dealer Low Battery Features Temporarily Displays to warn of a low 12 volt Turned Off battery condition Turn off all unneeded electrical accessories Blind Spot Information System Action Description Messages Blind Spot Not Available Sensor Displays when the blind spot Blocked information system cross traffic alert system sensors are blocked Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve Blind Spot System Fault Displays when a fault with the blind spot information system has occurred Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Cross Traffic Not Available Sensor Displays when the blind spot Blocked information system cross traffic alert system sensors are blocked Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve Cross Traffic System Fault Displays when a fault with the cross traffic alert system has occurred Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Information Displays 113 Blind Spot Information System Action Description Messages Vehicle Coming From X Displayed when the blind spot information system with cross traffic alert CTA system is operating and senses a vehicle Brake Fluid Level Low Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be inspected immediately Check Brake System Displays when the brake system needs servicing If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible
409. ssed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford authorized service facilities and that the diagnostic information may be used for any purpose See the SYNC chapter for more information 12 Introduction Event Data Recording This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle this data will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems performed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or the brake pedal e How fast the vehicle was travelling e Where the driver was positioning the steering wheel This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur Note EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data or information e g name gender age and crash location is recorded see limitations regarding 911 Assist and Traffic Directions and Informati
410. st use appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury or ejection Utility vehicles vans and trucks handle differently than passenger cars in the various driving conditions that are encountered on streets highways and off road Utility vehicles vans and trucks are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions Four Wheel Drive System If Equipped WARNING Do not become overconfident in the ability of four wheel drive vehicles Although a four wheel drive vehicle may accelerate better than a two wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations it will not stop any faster than two wheel drive vehicles Always drive at a safe speed A vehicle equipped with four wheel drive when selected has the ability to use all four wheels to power itself This increases traction which may enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two wheel drive vehicle cannot Wheels and Tires 293 Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case or power transfer unit Four wheel drive vehicles allow you to select different drive modes as necessary You can find information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures in the Transmission chapter You can find information on transfer case maintenance in the Maintenance chapter You should become thoroughly familiar with this infor
411. stem is comprised of two main features destination mode and map mode To set a destination press the green corner of your touchscreen then Dest when it appears See Setting a destination later in this chapter To view the navigation map and your vehicle s current location touch the green bar in the upper right hand corner of the touchscreen or press Dest gt Map See Map mode later in this chapter Setting a Destination Press the green corner of your touchscreen then Dest when it appears Choose any of the following Destination selections Street Address Previous Destinations City Center Point of Interest Edit Route Cancel Route Enter the necessary information into the highlighted text fields in any order For address destination entry Go appears once you enter all the necessary information Pressing Go makes the address location appear on the map If you choose Previous Destination the last 20 destinations you have selected appear 2 Select Set as Dest to make this your destination You can also choose to set this as a waypoint have the system route to this point on the way to your current destination or save it as a favorite The system considers any Avoid Areas selections in its route calculation 3 Choose from up to three different types of routes and then select Start Route e Fastest Route Uses the fastest moving roads possible e Shortest Route Uses the shortest distance possible e Eco Route Uses
412. stem to open the liftgate after pressing the control Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the system s obstacle detection feature and stops the power operation To close with the cargo area liftgate control button Press and release the cargo area liftgate control button located on the left rear cargo area trim panell This button automatically disables after the liftgate latches Locks 73 WARNING Keep clear of the liftgate when activating the rear switch To open the liftgate window a Press the window release button B Ss oe located inside the liftgate pull ae handle A B Obstacle Detection When closing The liftgate reverses to full open when it detects an obstacle A chime sounds three times as the liftgate begins to reopen Remove the obstacle to close the liftgate Note Entering your vehicle while the liftgate is closing can cause your vehicle to bounce and activate obstacle detection To prevent this let the power liftgate close completely before you enter your vehicle Before driving off check the instrument cluster for a liftgate or door ajar message or warning indicator Failure to do this could result in unintentionally leaving the liftgate open while driving When opening The system stops when it detects an obstacle and a tone sounds three times Remove the obstacle to operate the liftgate Resetting the Power Liftgate The liftgate may not operate properly and you
413. system data for any purpose other than as described absent consent a court order or where required by law enforcement other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada For further privacy information see the sections on 911 Assist Vehicle Health Report and Traffic Directions and Information Privacy Notice for GPS Mapping with MyLincoln Mobile in the United States and Canada MyLincoln Mobile allows for GPS mapping when a vehicle is registered to a MyLincoln Mobile account To remove the vehicle from the account thereby removing GPS mapping ability a Master Reset can be performed in the vehicle See Settings in the MyLincoln Touch chapter Prior to transferring ownership of a vehicle owners may choose to execute a Master Reset or Factory Reset completed via the MyLincoln Mobile website Either method will remove the vehicle from all MyLincoln Mobile accounts It is recommended that new owners conduct a Master Reset upon taking possession of the vehicle to remove it from any existing MyLincoln Mobile accounts The new owner can activate a MyLincoln Mobile account by going to http support lincoln com owner services mylincoln mobile app and following the registration process 354 MyLincoln Touch ACCESSING AND ADJUSTING MODES THROUGH YOUR RIGHT VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY The display is l
414. system will not dial for help which could delay response time potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death after a crash WARNING Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an emergency call if you can do it yourself Dial emergency services immediately to avoid delayed response time which could increase the risk of serious injury or death after a crash If you do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds of the crash the system or phone may be damaged or non functional WARNING Always place your phone in a secure location in your vehicle so it does not become a projectile or damaged in a crash Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage the phone which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly 394 MyLincoln Touch Note The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on prior to the incident Note Before setting this feature on make sure that you read the 911 Assist privacy notice later in this section for important information Note If any user turns 911 Assist on or off that setting applies for all paired phones If 911 Assist is turned off either a voice message plays or a display message or icon comes on or both when your vehicle is started after a previously paired phone connects Note Every phone operates differently While SYNC 911 Assist works with most cellular phones some may have trouble using this feature If a crash deploys an airbag excludes knee airbags and rear inflatable
415. t is seated properly BO ia T m F40 E41 F42 F43 F44 F45 F46 Fuses 257 The fuses are coded as follows Fuse amp Protected circuits location rating Rear seat control multimedia gateway module Passenger window Demand lamps Amplifier Rear electronic automatic temperature control Power mirror driver seat memory switch 2 7 finish panel display Right turn and stop turn signals Left turn and stop turn signals Reverse lamp center high mount stop lamp EC mirror Right front low beam Left front low beam Brake shift interlock start button LED keypad illumination third row power folding seat passive entry touch start Subwoofer amplifier THX amplifier A A A A A A 5A A A A A A A A A 30 15 30 10 0 5 10 10 10 15 15 15 15A 10 10 10A 20A 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 1l 12 18 14 15 16 17 18 9 258 Fuses location one Adjustable pedals power adjustable column Datalink Liftgate release decklid liftglass release motor Push to start switch Passive entry start module Ignition switch key inhibit switch Radio GPS Front park lamps Trailer brake on off Power vent rear windows power inverter BLIS heated seat 75A Fuses 259 location rating Protected circuits 44 48 J o 49 260 Maintenance GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING Turn off the power r
416. t may affect the use of electronic devices while driving WARNING For safety reasons do not connect or adjust the settings on your portable music player while your vehicle is moving WARNING Store the portable music player in a secure location such as the center console or the glove box when your vehicle is in motion Hard objects may become projectiles in a crash or sudden stop which may increase the risk of serious injury The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be safely stored while your vehicle is moving 378 MyLincoln Touch The auxiliary input jack allows you to connect and play music from your portable music player through your vehicle speakers You can use any portable music player designed for use with headphones Your audio extension cable must have male Vs inch 3 5 millimeter connectors at each end 1 Switch off the engine radio and portable music player Set the parking brake and put the transmission in position P 2 Plug the extension cable from the portable music player into the auxiliary input jack 3 Switch the radio on Select either a tuned FM station or a CD 4 Adjust the volume as desired 5 Switch your portable music player on and adjust its volume to half its maximum level 6 Press AUX until LINE or LINE IN appears in the display You should hear music from your device even if it is low 7 Adjust the volume on your portable music player
417. t sensor training Customer action required 1 Make sure tires are at the proper pressure See Inflating your tires in this chapter 2 After inflating your tires to the manufacturer s recommended pressure as shown on the Tire Label located on the edge of driver s door or the B Pillar the vehicle must be driven for at least two minutes over 20 mph 32 km h before the light turns off Repair the damaged road wheel and tire and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system function For a description on how the system functions see When your spare tire is installed in this section If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but the light remains on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible On vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures the system must be retrained following every tire rotation See Tire rotation in this chapter 314 Wheels and Tires Low tire Possible cause Customer action required pressure warning light Flashing warning Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and light tire and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system function For a description on how the system functions see When your spare tire is installed in this section Tire pressure If the tires are properly inflated and monitoring the spare tire is not in use but the system light remains on contact your malfunction authorized dealer as soon as possible When in
418. t your authorized dealer as soon as possible Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle transfer case or power transfer unit failure If you have questions regarding tire replacement contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Wheels and Tires 307 WARNING To reduce the risk of serious injury when mounting replacement tires and wheels you should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated re lubricate and try again When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi 1 38 bar greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall the following precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire 1 Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size 2 Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again 3 Stand at a minimum of 12 feet 3 66 meters away from the tire wheel assembly 4 Use both eye and ear protection For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi 1 38 bar greater than the maximum pressure a Ford dealer or other tire service professional should do the mounting Al
419. te The system does not provide a traffic alert notification e Manual Have the system always provide a traffic alert notification for traffic incidents along the planned route You have a choice to accept or ignore the notification before making the route deviation Traffic Alert Notification allows you to choose have the system display traffic alert notifications MyLincoln Touch 419 Other traffic alert features allows you to turn on certain or all traffic icons on the map such as road work incident accidents and closed roads Scroll down to view all the different types of alerts Turn these features ON or OFF Avoid Areas Avoid Areas allows you to choose areas which you want the system to avoid when calculating a route for you Press Add to program an entry Once you make a selection the system tries to avoid the area s if possible for all routes To delete a selection choose the listing on the screen When the screen changes to Avoid Areas Edit you can press Delete at the bottom right of the screen Map Mode Press the green bar in the upper right area of the touchscreen to view map mode Map mode shows advanced viewing comprised of both 2D city maps as well as 3D landmarks when available 2D city maps show detailed outlines of buildings visible land use and land elements and detailed railway infrastructure for the most essential cities around the globe These maps also contain features such as town blocks bu
420. tenance free 270 driving off road 178 replacement specifications 328 Ambient mood lighting 400 S E i dise mobs 270 i pot Information PIONEER eee que im SYSLEMM sicheres a e Uds 204 AM IEM cisneros 360 PEGE dens esses 30 Antifreeze BAI CS tetur avete 186 SOE Ene tries COGIATID sisi nicis 264 anti lock eee 186 Anti lock brake system anti lock brake system ABS See Brakes iicet hens 186 warning light iiien 186 Anti theft system 76 77 brake warning light 186 arming the system 76 77 fluid checking and adding 269 disarming a triggered fluid refill capacities 324 SYSTEMI i sisse rte tente ese 77 fluid specifications 324 Andie aysteiii lubricant specifications 324 parking necerais 187 Single CD see 338 shift interlock 176 Audio system see Radio 388 nuzhl rue eR MEIN 229 Index 463 C Cruise control ssss 202 Cust Assistance 237 Capacities for refilling fluids 324 Herd peice a ee Cargo management system 218 PIAT esasi tsenar usie T 333 CD 338 Getting roadside assistance 237 eee Cee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee es Getting the service you CD player 336 371 need ssssseeeee nnne 243 OD voice commands 372 Ordering additional owner s Doc literature seen 249 Cell phone use
421. ter and fuel level gauge Digital tachometer fuel level gauge and engine coolant temperature gauge Gauge Detail Oil pressure Oil temperature and Transmission temperature Engine Hours Engine hours and Engine idle hours Oil Life Distance to Empty Digital Speedometer Press OK to change the currently units displayed Trip Fuel Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following trip and fuel options Note Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed information Trip Fuel Trip 1 or Trip 2 Fuel Economy Fuel History e Fuel Economy Shows your instantaneous fuel usage as a bar graph and average mpg e Fuel History Shows your fuel usage based on time The graph is updated each minute with the fuel economy that you achieved during 30 minutes of driving 108 Information Displays Towing Use the arrow buttons to configure different towing setting choices T Trailer brake gain Trailer Sway Control check enabled or uncheck disabled Trailer Brake Mode Elec Over Hydraulic Selected Trailer Options the selected trailer Change Trailer Settings Electrical Wiring Connect Lights Function Correctly Change Trailer Trailers Created Safety Chains Connected Connection Checklist Tongue Jack Raised Mirrors Adjusted TBC gain setting adjusted Trailer disconnected Information Displays 109 Off Road In this mode you can view different off road information Off Road
422. test wheel than the minimum required by law 296 Wheels and Tires Glossary of Tire Terminology Tire label A l bel showing the OE Original Equipment tire sizes recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry Tire Identification Number TIN A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant tire size and date of manufacture Also referred to as DOT code Inflation pressure A measure of the amount of air in a tire Standard load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load at set pressure For example For P metric tires 35 psi 2 4 bar or 36 2 5 bar depending on tire size and for Metric tires 36 psi 2 5 bar Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire capability Extra load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 42 psi 2 9 bar Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire s load carrying capability kPa KiloPascal a metric unit of air pressure PSI Pounds per square inch a standard unit of air pressure Cold tire pressure The tire pressure when the vehicle has been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile 1 6 kilometers Recommended inflation pressure The cold inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certific
423. text Data service issue by Fill out the station information shown for the radio broadcaster issue form at website currently selected listed below frequency HD2 HD7 stations not Pressing Scan disables No action required found when Scan is HD2 HD7 channel This is normal pressed search behavior http www ibiquity com automotive report radio station experiences HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp U S and foreign patents HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp Ford Motor Company and iBiquity Digital Corp are not responsible for the content sent using HD Radio technology Content may be changed added or deleted at any time at the station owner s discretion MyLincoln Touch 365 Radio Voice Commands EB If you are listening to the radio press the voice button on the us steering wheel control When prompted say any of the commands in the following chart If you are not listening to the radio press the voice button and after the tone say Radio then any of the commands in the following chart lt 87 9 107 9 gt lt 87 9 107 9 gt HD lt 630 1710 gt aM AM lt 580 1710 gt SD FMsutoset prese eie SCS If available If you have said Tune see the following Tune chart lt 87 9 107 9 gt lt 87 9 107 9 gt HD lt gt lt 530 1710 gt FM
424. the equipment The term IC before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter 444 Scheduled Maintenance GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION Why Maintain Your Vehicle Carefully following the maintenance schedule helps protect against major repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and may help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or trade it Keep all receipts for completed maintenance with your vehicle We have established regular maintenance intervals for your vehicle based upon rigorous testing It is important that you have your vehicle serviced at the proper times These intervals serve two purposes one is to maintain the reliability of your vehicle and the second is to keep your cost of owning your vehicle down It is your responsibility to have all scheduled maintenance performed and to make sure that the materials used meet the specifications identified in the Capacities and Specifications chapter of this owner s manual Failure to perform scheduled maintenance invalidates warranty coverage on parts affected by the lack of maintenance Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your Dealership Factory Trained Technicians Service technicians participate in extensive factory sponsored certification training to hel
425. the highest adjustment position 2 Press and hold buttons C and D 3 Pull up the head restraint Reinstall Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the head restraint down until it locks Seats 131 Second row outboard seat head restraints The outboard head restraints are non adjustable but you can fold them The non adjustable head restraints consist of A e A trimmed energy absorbing foam ve and structure A e A fold strap B 1 Pull the fold strap to fold the outboard head restraint 2 Pull up on the head restraint to place the head restraint back to the upright position Second row center seat head restraint The center rear head restraint is fixed and non adjustable The head restraint consists of a trimmed foam covering over the upper structure of the seatback Third row head restraints The third row head restraints are non adjustable but you can fold them The non adjustable head restraints A consist of me e A trimmed energy absorbing foam and structure A e A fold strap B x B 1 Pull the fold strap to fold the head restraint 2 Pull up on the head restraint to place the head restraint back to the upright position 132 Seats POWER SEATS WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback WARNING Never adjust the driver seat or seatback when the
426. the off position 2 Remove the license lamp screw from the assembly 3 Pull the lamp down and twist the bulb socket counterclockwise Remove the bulb socket from the lamp 4 Pull out the old bulb and push in the new bulb 5 Install the bulb socket in the lamp assembly by turning it clockwise 6 Install the lamp assembly and secure it with the retaining screw Maintenance 279 Replacing the High Mount Brake Lamp Bulbs ad ad To change the high mount brake lamp bulbs 1 Remove the two screws holding the lamp assembly in place 2 Pull the lamp assembly straight out 3 Disconnect the wire harness 4 Press the four tabs that hold the light assembly on one at a time and pull the black bulb carrier away from the lamp 5 Pull the old bulb out and replace with the new bulb 6 Snap the black bulb carrier into the lamp assembly 7 Connect the wire harness 8 Install the lamp assembly with two screws Replacing Approach Lamp Mirror Turn Signal Bulbs For bulb replacement see your authorized dealer 280 Maintenance BULB SPECIFICATION CHART Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized D O T for North America to ensure lamp performance light brightness and pattern and safe visibility The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time Number
427. the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P Park 4 Open the hood Protect yourself from engine heat 5 Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick See the Under Hood Overview in this chapter for location of dipstick 6 Wipe the dipstick clean Insert the dipstick fully then remove it again If the oil level is between the lower and upper holes or between the MIN and MAX marks depending on application the oil level is acceptable DO NOT ADD OIL If the oil level is below the lower hole or the MIN mark add enough oil to raise the level within the lower and upper holes or within the MIN MAX range Oil levels above the upper hole or the MAX mark may cause engine damage Some oil must be removed from the engine by an authorized dealer 7 Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated 264 Maintenance Adding Engine Oil Note Do not remove the engine oil level dipstick or the filler cap when the engine is running Note Do not add engine oil further than the MAX mark Oil levels above the MAX mark may cause engine damage Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the American Petroleum Institute API An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricants Specification Advisory Council ILSAC comprised of U S and Japanese automobile manufacturers
428. the rear seats Note Remove any snow ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield Note To improve the time to reach comfort in hot weather drive with the windows slightly open for 2 3 minutes after start up or until your vehicle airs out Automatic Climate Control Note Adjusting the settings when your vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is not necessary The system automatically adjusts to heat or cool the cabin to your selected temperature as quickly as possible For the system to function efficiently the instrument panel and side air vents should be fully open Note If you select AUTO during cold outside temperatures the system directs airflow to the windshield and side window vents In addition the fan may run at a slower speed until the engine warms up Note If you select AUTO during hot outside temperatures or when the inside of the vehicle is hot the system automatically uses recirculated air to maximize interior cooling When the interior reaches the selected temperature the system automatically switches to using outside air Heating the Interior Quickly 1 Press the AUTO button 2 Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting Recommended Settings for Heating 1 Press the AUTO button 2 Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting Use 72 F 22 C as a starting point then adjust the setting as necessary 126 Climate Control Cooling the Interior Quickl
429. the warning sounds again F The system detects certain objects while the transmission is in R Reverse A Coverage area of up to 6 feet 2 meters from the rear bumper with a decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper em i a m e and moving toward a stationary object at a speed of 3 mph 5 km h or less e but not moving and a moving object is approaching the rear of the vehicle at a speed of 3 mph 5 km h or less e and moving at a speed of less than 3 mph 5 km h and a moving object is approaching the rear of the vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph 5 km h Parking Aids 197 Front Sensing System The front sensors are active when the gearshift is in any position other than P Park or N Neutral and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph 13 km h A Coverage area of up to 27 inches rm 70 centimeters from the front of 4 the vehicle and about 6 9 inches P 15 23 centimeters to the side of A the front end of the vehicle Refer to the reverse sensing section for lt details on coverage area zz ut The system sounds an audible warning when obstacles are near either bumper in the following manner e Objects detected by the front sensors are indicated by a high pitched tone from the front of the vehicle e Objects detected by the rear sensors are indicated by a lower pitched tone from the rear of the vehicle e The sensing system reports the obstacle which is closest
430. thin three seconds to confirm that all the doors are closed The doors will lock again the horn will sound and the turn signals will illuminate if all the doors and the luggage compartment are closed Note If any door or the luggage compartment is open or if the hood is open on vehicles with an anti theft alarm or remote start the horn sounds twice and the lamps will not flash 68 Locks Activating Intelligent Access If Equipped You must have the intelligent access key within 3 feet 1 meter of the driver s door At the Front Driver Door Press any number on the SecuriCode keyless entry keypad After locking the doors with the lock sensor there is a brief delay before you can unlock your vehicle This delay lets you pull the door handle to make sure that it locked Note Keep the keypad surface clean to avoid issues with operation Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access Keys This feature helps to prevent you from unintentionally locking your intelligent access key inside your vehicle s passenger compartment or rear cargo area When you lock your vehicle using the driver or passenger power door lock control with the door open transmission in P and ignition off after you close the door your vehicle will search for an intelligent access key in the passenger compartment If your vehicle finds a key all of the doors will immediately unlock and the horn will sound indicating that a key is inside You can override the
431. three minutes with the vehicle running and up to 10 minutes with the vehicle off for the system to reset and for function to return to normal Pull the control back to fold the mirrors in or out Loose Mirror If your power folding mirrors are manually folded they may not work properly even after you reposition them You need to reset them if e The mirrors vibrate when you drive e The mirrors feel loose e The mirrors do not stay in the folded or unfolded position e One of the mirrors is not in its normal driving position To reset the power fold feature use the power folding mirror control to fold and unfold the mirrors You may hear a loud noise as you reset the power folding mirrors This sound is normal Repeat this process as needed each time the mirrors are manually folded Heated Exterior Mirror The heated exterior mirrors switch on with the heated rear window See Heated Windows and Mirrors in the Climate Control chapter Memory Mirrors You can save and recall the mirror positions through the memory function See Memory function in the Seats chapter 96 Windows and Mirrors Auto Dimming Feature The driver s side exterior mirror will automatically dim when the interior auto dimming mirror is activated Signal Indicator Mirrors The rear facing portion of the appropriate mirror housing will blink when the turn signal is activated Blind Spot Information System BLISG with Cross Traffic Alert CTA
432. ting specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance Certification Label The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position Special Loading Instructions for Owners of Pick up Trucks and Utility type Vehicles WARNING Loaded vehicles may handle differently than unloaded vehicles Extra precautions such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars Depending upon the type and placement of the load hauling cargo and people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle CARGO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED A storage compartment is located in D L A the floor of the rear cargo area L MES T Lift up on the handle to open the i cover d pe ET s w L To close lower the cover and press down on the handle until the latch clicks Load Carrying 219 Cargo Shelf and Divider If Equipped 4 WARNING Do not load any objects on the shelf that may obstruct your vision or strike occupants of the vehicle in the case of a sudden stop or collision 4 WARNING Do not place people or pets on or under the parcel shelf Note Do not put more than 30 pounds 14 kilograms on the shelf The cargo shelf and divider is located behind the rear seat of your vehicle and has two posit
433. tion the system allows you to sort the resulting lists alphabetically by distance or by cityseekr listings if available Pressing the Search Areas button allows you to search for points of interest nearby near a city or state or near a destination if a route is active Pressing the Search By Name button allows you to directly enter the point of interest name into the system by using the keyboard cityseekr If Available Note cityseekr point of interest information is limited to approximately 912 cities 881 in the United States 20 in Canada and 11 in Mexico cityseekr when available is a service that provides more information about certain points of interest such as restaurants i hotels and attractions When you have selected a point of G s e ek r interest the location and information appear such as address and phone number If cityseekr lists the point of interest more information is available such as a brief description hotel check in and checkout times or restaurant hours Press More Information for a longer review a list of services and facilities the average room or meal price as well as the website link This screen displays either a facility photo if available or point of interest icons such as Hotel om Coffeehouse Food amp Drink MyLincoln Touch 417 Nightlife 9 E Attraction This icon appears when your selection exists in multiple rs categories within the system
434. tion SD card must be in the SD card slot Note A paid subscription is required to access and use these features Go to www siriusxm com travellink for more information Note Visit www siriusxm com traffic and click on Coverage map and details for a complete listing of all traffic areas covered by Sirius Travel Link Note Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible for any errors or inaccuracies in the Sirius Travel Link services or its use in vehicles When you subscribe to Sirius Travel Link it can help you locate the best gas prices find movie listings get current traffic alerts view the current weather map get accurate ski conditions and see scores to current sports games If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation touch the i Information button to access these features If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation touch the corner of the touchscreen with the green tab Traffic On Route and Traffic Nearby Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route nearby your vehicle s current location or near any of your favorite places if programmed Fuel Prices Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your vehicle s location or on an active navigation route MyLincoln Touch 391 Movie Listings Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their show times if available Weather Touch this button to view the nearby weather current weather or the five day forecast for
435. tion chart One shot Destination Street Address When you say either Navigation destination street address or Destination street address the system asks you to say the full address The system displays an example on screen You can then speak the address naturally such as One two three four Main Street Anytown Appendices 425 GENERAL INFORMATION SYNC End User License Agreement EULA e You have acquired a device DEVICE that includes software licensed by FORD MOTOR COMPANY from an affiliate of Microsoft Corporation MS Those installed software products of MS origin as well as associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation MS SOFTWARE are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties The MS SOFTWARE is licensed not sold All rights reserved e The MS SOFTWARE may interface with and or communicate with or may be later upgraded to interface with and or communicate with additional software and or systems provided by FORD MOTOR COMPANY The additional software and systems of FORD MOTOR COMPANY origin as well as associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation FORD SOFTWARE are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties The FORD SOFTWARE is licensed not sold All rights reserved e The MS SOFTWARE and or FORD SOFTWARE may interface with and or communicate with or may
436. tions may cause the service engine soon indicator to illuminate Examples are 1 The vehicle has run out of fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 2 Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 3 The fuel fill inlet may not have been properly closed See Easy Fuel No Cap Fuel System in this chapter 4 Driving through deep water the electrical system may be wet These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry out After three driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present the service engine soon indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started A driving cycle consists of a cold engine start up followed by mixed city or highway driving No additional vehicle service is required If the service engine soon indicator remains on have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity Although some malfunctions detected by the OBD II may not have symptoms that are apparent continued driving with the service engine soon indicator on can result in increased emissions lower fuel economy reduced engine and transmission smoothness and can lead to more costly repairs Fuel and Refueling 171 Readiness for Inspection Maintenance I M Testing Some state provincial and local governments may have Inspection Maintenance I M p
437. tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road this could reduce the operator s ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death If your AdvanceTrac system activates SLOW DOWN The AdvanceTrac with Roll Stability Control system helps you keep control of your vehicle when on a slippery surface The electronic stability control portion of the system helps avoid skids and lateral slides and roll stability control helps avoid a vehicle rollover The traction control system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction See the Traction Control chapter for details on traction control system operation Stability Control 191 A Vehicle without AdvanceTrac with RSC skidding off its intended route B Vehicle with AdvanceTrac with RSC maintaining control on a slippery surface CY USING STABILITY CONTROL AdvanceTrac With RSC The system automatically activates when you start your engine You can turn off the electronic stability control and roll stability control portions of the system below 35 mph 56 km h When the transmission is in reverse R they are disabled You can turn off the traction control portion of the system independently See the Traction Control chapter AdvanceTrac with RSC Features Stability Roll Electronic Traction control stability stability control OFF light control control system Button functi
438. transmission 00000 eee Four Wheel Drive If Equipped Four wheel drive 00 00 0000 eee een Brakes Brakes i344 snp XC 44 Sc wok Verte e E ERS Hints on driving with anti lock brakes Parking Drake cros esu Pr eR RA P PU P UR Pillstart assistens DE Gee Rex ER a EE Traction Control Traction Control Ms bse cles aea eso eN X RN Stability Control Advance Edu eror uum Aare aaah a ende ip we eS Terrain Response Hill descent control lees Parking Aids Sensing syste ress serii ego Rx USO ET S RE CR Rear view camera system llle Cruise Control Using cruise controls sod eee EVENIRE Table of Contents Driving Aids Blind Spot Information System BLIS with Cross Traffic Alert OTA PME T ccr SII ICE PCT TET Auto leveling suspension l l ees Load Carrying Roof racks and load carriers 0 000 000000 ee eee Vehicle loading issu ess has eed oa ee Oa ee eee Cargo management system lese Towing Trailer TOWING 4 deese UL PE HE EGE CHE PER ds Wrecker towing jx ques SE RAN ake Geese puede ead Recreational towing so cessi llle Driving Hints Economical driving pae eee Rw Tee WOE a e aS FIOO MASc iee ure a Ws Ra PE aS dares aa dard Roadside Emergencies Getting roadside assistance 0 0 00000 eee eee Hazard warning flashers i 4033 V SE 50 boa Y ws Fuel cut off SWIUCCh 4 scs tee o eR UR este Pe dH B
439. trap on your safety seat does not reach the appropriate top tether anchor in the vehicle Some of the rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built in tether strap anchors located behind the seats as described below In the third row center seating position the tether anchor is a loop at the bottom of the seat back The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions shown from top view e Second row bench seat e Second row bucket seats 8 LJ Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct tether anchor Once the child safety seat has been installed using either the safety belt the lower anchors of the LATCH system or both you can attach the top tether strap 26 Child Safety If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments and have attached the top tether strap to the proper top tether anchor do not tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated in it Keep the tether strap just snug without lifting the front of the child seat Keeping the child seat just touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash Perform the following steps to install a child safety seat with tether anchors Second row seating pos
440. trol llle 59 MyKey 60 Settings MyKey xx oes eek Re ao E Ry e ERE ORE Ie Edd 60 Creating nu ea ea eed wp ep EU e deen ES E Ceres es 61 Clearing oso ak he R3 PUE dee EUR Head oT pe e 62 System Stabusceu sene bara ax RE GOD Soe NAAR RAE S RO a EO 62 Remote start MyKey 0 cc ee ens 63 Troubleshooting MyKey 0 0 00 ccc ee es 65 2 Table of Contents Locks Locking and unlocking 406586646 8044 ede REI RE SecuriCode keyless entry keypad 0 0 00000 eee eae Security SecuriLock passive anti theft system 0 0000 0005 Anti thieft alarm 2524 V see uec ele cd Bg lence suse deos esa Steering Wheel Adjusting the steering wheel i o2 RE eee Ee a Steering wheel controls 2 00000000 eee Pedals Adjustable pedals i4 as poate Mind o ne ea RUE eee Wipers and Washers Windshield Wipers senteme re OR Ge RIDE NEG Re ERE YR Rain sensing Wipers 20 00 0 ee ees Windshield Washers 22e du Ree EX VAS uU WV Se OS Rear window wiper and washer llle Lighting Lighting Controls 54 0404 6424 22844 eae Se ha E ae eS ERE ERS RS Antolamen ha Bs ee ads Me ae TRETEN ees pan Instrument lighting dimmer 0 0 020 0 0000000 len Daytime running lamps pesse siea aa a ee Adaptive headlamps 4 2 22 lm kd ere cee eee eee ee eed Direction indicators 0 0 eee Interior lamps lt lt e db ee Ba ee aches Y RETINET ARN EE Windows and Mirrors Po
441. tter should operate normally The remote control uses one coin type three volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent Intelligent Access Transmitter 1 Remove the backup key from the transmitter 2 Twist a thin coin under the tab Rj hidden behind the backup key head to remove the battery cover Do not use the backup key to remove the cover or you could damage the intelligent access key 3 Remove the old battery a 4 Insert a new battery with the facing downward Press the battery down to make sure it is fully in the housing 5 Snap the battery cover back onto the transmitter and install the backup key 56 Keys and Remote Control Memory feature This feature allows you to recall the driver seat power mirrors power steering column and adjustable foot pedals memory positions Press the unlock button on the remote control to recall memory positions Programming memory to the remote control To activate this feature 1 Switch on the ignition 2 Move the memory features to the desired positions using the associated controls 3 Press and hold memory button 1 located on the driver seat side for five seconds until you hear two m e chimes 4 Within three seconds press the lock button on the remote control You will hear a confirmation chime To program a second remote control repeat this procedure with memory button 2 and your second remote control Deactivating memory from the remote
442. turn off when e You press the hazard button e You press the panic button if equipped on the remote entry transmitter e Your vehicle runs out of power DRIVER AND PASSENGER AIRBAGS WARNING Never place your arm or any objects over an airbag module Placing your arm over a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries Objects placed on or over the airbag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat Never place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back 46 Supplementary Restraints System The driver and front passenger airbags will deploy during significant frontal and near frontal crashes The driver and passenger front airbag system consists of e Driver and passenger airbag modules e Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness t indicator See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator later in this chapter Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating Adjustment WARNING The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches 25 centimeters between an occupant s chest and the driver airbag module To properly position yourself away from the airbag e
443. tware in any manner that i infringes the intellectual property or proprietary rights rights of publicity or privacy or other rights of any party ii violates any law statute ordinance or regulation including but not limited to laws and regulations related to spamming privacy consumer and child protection obscenity or defamation or iii is harmful threatening abusive harassing tortuous defamatory vulgar obscene libelous or otherwise objectionable and f lease rent out or otherwise permit unauthorized access by third parties to the Telenav Software without advanced written permission of Telenav 4 Disclaimers To the fullest extent permissible pursuant to applicable law in no event will Telenav its licensors and suppliers or agents or employees of any of the foregoing be liable for any decision made or action taken by you or anyone else in reliance on the information provided by the Telenav Software Telenav also does not warrant the accuracy of the map or other data used for the Telenav Software Such data may not always reflect reality due to among other things road closures construction weather new roads and other changing conditions You are responsible for the entire risk arising out of your use of the Telenav Software For example but without limitation you agree not to rely on the Telenav Software for critical navigation in areas where the well being or survival of you or others is dependent on the accuracy of
444. ty belt WARNING Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair 1 Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm 2 Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder 3 Never use a single belt for more than one person Safety Belts 35 WARNING When possible all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position Failure to follow this could seriously increase the risk of injury or death WARNING Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather they could burn a small child Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them WARNING Front and rear seat occupants including pregnant women should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an accident All seating positions in this vehicle have lap and shoulder safety belts All occupants of the vehicle should always properly wear their safety belts even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided The safety belt system consists of Lap and shoulder safety belts Shoulder safety belt with automatic locking mode except driver safety belt Height adjuster at the front outboard seating positions Safety belt pretensioner at the front outboard seating positions e Safety
445. uce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system creating the risk of fire or other damage WARNING Do not park idle or drive your vehicle on dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire WARNING Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas Exhaust fumes can be toxic Always open the garage door before you start the engine WARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes If you disconnect the battery your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics for approximately 5 miles 8 kilometers after you connect it This is because the engine management system must realign itself with the engine You may disregard any unusual driving characteristics during this period The powertrain control system meets all Canadian interference causing equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field or radio noise Do not press the accelerator pedal while starting the engine If you have difficulty starting the engine see Failure to start later in this section KEYLESS STARTING Note The keyless starting system may not function if the key is close to metal objects or electronic devices such as cellular phones Note A valid key must be located inside your vehicle to switch the
446. uipment 152 Auxiliary Power Points AUXILIARY POWER POINTS WARNING Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter socket if equipped Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your warranty and can result in fire or serious injury Note If used when the engine is not running the battery will discharge There may be insufficient power to restart your engine Note Do not insert objects other than an accessory plug into the power point This will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Note Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug Note Do not use the power point over the vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or a fuse may blow Note Do not use the power point for operating a cigarette lighter element Note Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty Note Always keep the power point caps closed when not in use Run the engine for full capacity use of the power point To prevent the battery from being discharged e Do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is not running e Do not leave devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for extended periods Locations Power points may be found By the passenger s ankle near the floor on the front console In the console bin On the rear of the center console On the right rear quarter panel Auxiliary Power Poi
447. unded container WARNING Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene which is a cancer causing agent WARNING When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck Never smoke while refueling Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes WARNING Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle from its full inserted position when refueling Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel e Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling your vehicle e Always turn off the vehicle before refueling e Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury If fuel is swallowed call a physician immediately even if no symptoms are immediately apparent The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours Fuel and Refueling 163 e Avoid inhaling fuel vapors Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation In severe cases excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes If fuel is splashed in the eyes remove contact lenses if worn flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury
448. unning boards if equipped before working under the vehicle jacking or placing any object under the vehicle Never place your hand between the extended running board and the vehicle A moving running board may cause injury Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help maintain its roadworthiness and resale value There is a large network of Ford authorized dealers that are there to help you with their professional servicing expertise We believe that their specially trained technicians are best qualified to service your vehicle properly and expertly They are supported by a wide range of highly specialized tools developed specifically for servicing your vehicle To help you service your vehicle we provide scheduled maintenance information which makes tracking routine service easy If your vehicle requires professional service your authorized dealer can provide the necessary parts and service Check your warranty information to find out which parts and services are covered Use only recommended fuels lubricants fluids and service parts conforming to specifications Motorcraft parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle Precautions e Do not work on a hot engine e Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts e Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space unless you are sure you have enough ventilation e Keep all open flames and other burning material such as cigarettes aw
449. until it reaches the volume level of the FM station or CD Do this by switching back and forth between the AUX and FM or CD controls Troubleshooting Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output The jack only works correctly with devices that have a headphone output with a volume control Do not set the portable music player s volume level higher than is necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio as this causes distortion and reduces sound quality If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels turn the portable music player volume down If the problem persists replace or recharge the batteries in the portable media player Control the portable media player in the same manner when used with headphones as the auxiliary input jack does not provide control such as Play or Pause over the attached portable media player MyLincoln Touch 379 PHONE A Phone B Quick Dial C Phonebook D History E Messaging F Settings Hands free calling is one of the main features of SYNC Once you pair your phone you can access many options using the touchscreen or voice commands While the system supports a variety of features many are dependent on your cellular phone s functionality At a minimum most cellular phones with Bluetooth wireless technology support the following functions e Answering an incoming call Ending a call Using privacy mode Dialing a number Redialing Call waiting noti
450. ve your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire WARNING Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly e Use only the specified fuel listed e Avoid running out of fuel e Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving especially at high speeds e Have the items listed in Scheduled Maintenance Information performed according to the specified schedule The scheduled maintenance items listed in Scheduled Maintenance Information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system If other than Ford Motorcraft amp or Ford authorized parts are used for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting emission control such non Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability Illumination of the service engine soon indicator charging system warning li
451. vehicle at a constant level through a hydraulic pump inside each rear shock Depending on the payload or road surface conditions it will take approximately 2 miles 3 2 km for the leveling to complete If the loaded vehicle is not moved for approximately 12 hours the leveling system may bleed down to a lower height This can be especially apparent if a trailer is left attached to the parked vehicle for long periods of time You must drive your vehicle in order to re level the suspension If a self equalizing hitch is being used your vehicle should be drive approximately 2 miles 3 2 km with the trailer prior to adjusting leveling the hitch Load Carrying 211 ROOF RACKS AND LOAD CARRIERS WARNING When loading the roof rail crossbars it is recommended to evenly distribute the load as well as maintain a low center of gravity Loaded vehicles with higher centers of gravity may handle differently than unloaded vehicles Extra precautions such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle Note The maximum recommended load is 200 pounds 90 kilograms evenly distributed on the crossbars Note Loads should never be placed directly on the roof panel The roof panel is not designed to directly carry a load For proper function of the roof rack system loads must be placed directly on crossbars affixed to the roof rack side rails Your vehicle may be equipped with factory
452. vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 5 x 99 kg 5 x 13 5 kg 635 495 67 5 72 5 kg Suppose your vehicle has a 1400 Ib 635 kg cargo and luggage capacity You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been planning for the past 2 years Measuring the inside of the vehicle with the rear seat folded down you have room for 12 100 Ib 45 kg bags of cement Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement to your home If you and your friend each weigh 220 Ib 99 kg the 218 Load Carrying calculation would be 1400 2 x 220 12 x 100 1400 440 1200 240 Ib No you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 12 x 45 kg 635 198 540 103 kg You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240 Ib 104 kg If you remove 3 100 Ib 45 kg cement bags then the load calculation would be 1400 2 x 220 9 x 100 1400 440 900 60 Ib Now you have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 9 x 45 kg 635 198 405 32 kg The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross Axle Weight Ra
453. venient times and places in an informal environment These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties make decisions and when appropriate render awards to resolve disputes CAMVAP decisions are fast fair and final as the arbitrator s award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada CAMVAP services are available in all Canadian territories and provinces For more information without charge or obligation call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1 800 207 0685 or visit www camvap ca GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U S AND CANADA Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti knock index lower than is recommended for your vehicle contact our Customer Relationship Center 248 Customer Assistance The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage Ford Motor Company or Ford of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper fuel Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into the United States If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Asia Pacific Region Sub Saharan Af
454. verse some distance if there is an obstacle in the way Overriding the Bounce Back Feature WARNING When you override the bounce back feature the window will not reverse if it detects an obstacle Take care when closing the windows to avoid personal injury or damage to your vehicle Pull up the window switch and hold within two seconds of the window reaching the bounce back position The window will travel up with no bounce back protection The window will stop if your release the switch before the window is fully closed 94 Windows and Mirrors lt a A Unlock B Lock Press the control to lock or unlock the rear window controls Accessory Delay You can use the window switches for several minutes after you switch the ignition off or until you open either front door EXTERIOR MIRRORS Power Exterior Mirrors WARNING Do not adjust the mirror while your vehicle is in motion A Left mirror B Off C Right mirror To adjust your mirrors 1 Select the mirror you want to adjust 2 Move the control in the direction you want to tilt the mirror 3 Return the control to the center position to lock mirrors in place Windows and Mirrors 95 Power Folding Mirrors Note Activating the mirrors 10 or more times within one minute or repeated folding and unfolding of the mirrors while holding the control down during full travel may disable the system to protect motors from overheating Wait approximately
455. wallowed call a physician immediately WARNING Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Note Wash hands after handling Note If your battery has a cover shield make sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been cleaned or replaced For longer trouble free operation keep the top of the battery clean and dry Also make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals Note Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft amp maintenance free battery which normally does not require additional water during its life of service Maintenance 271 If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an extended period of time This will minimize the discharge of your battery during storage Because your vehicle s engine is electronically controlled by a computer some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim strateg
456. ways inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 feet 3 66 meters away from the tire wheel assembly Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and handling capability Important Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road tires are replaced on your vehicle The two front tires or two rear tires should generally be replaced as a pair The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels originally installed on your vehicle are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company may affect the operation of your tire pressure monitoring system If the tire pressure monitoring system indicator is flashing the system is malfunctioning Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your tire pressure monitoring system or some component of the system may be damaged 308 Wheels and Tires Safety Practices WARNING If your vehicle is stuck in snow mud or sand do not rapidly spin the tires Spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds WARNING Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety Observe posted speed limits e Avoid fast starts stops and turns e Avoid potho
457. wer windows 0 0000 cece Exterior MITOS oedi erer htt ae be EM bros dde gor Hide Poe US Interior mirrors OUI VISO S cud burs Xs be va be Foe BEd ots eR ee l ileroiuiao o s ati aiaa aea ti Ya ean ane e aa e a de a e EA e A Table of Contents Instrument Cluster Information Displays Message center d s hi ona a ae ia a a aoa An ae e ia a E aia Information messages llle Climate Control Dual automatic temperature control Rear window defroster 00000000 eee Remote Start 0 000 000 0000 000000 eee ee Seats Sitting in the correct position 0 reurs Head restraints 0 0 0 0 cc ee es Power sealg ss s Fak oa pa RA SERRE ERR G DR P ao Memory function esca scrasa lees Reariseats 24 we og atus dtu m v Ree Paw exa we endo dan Universal Garage Door Opener If Equipped HomeLink wireless control system sss Auxiliary Power Points Storage Compartments Center consoles resine daai v Re eS Hee ee Overhead console eee Starting and Stopping the Engine Engine block heater cs sco ep em 100 100 101 105 106 106 111 122 122 126 127 128 128 129 132 133 137 147 148 152 155 155 155 156 4 Table of Contents Fuel and Refueling F uel quality 5 2 3 dae x eee ee ele Se EES RETIENE uester eh eot hy diae EAN teens AR T d Fuel consumption 0 0 0 0 000 cece ee eas Transmission Automatic
458. which indicate that you can scroll in those directions to enter more menus e Press OK to confirm your selection Pressing the up and down arrow buttons in the current source screen allows you to move through that source s presets MyLincoln Touch 355 USING VOICE RECOGNITION This system helps you control many features using voice commands This allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is in front of you The system provides feedback through audible tones prompts questions and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the chosen level of interaction voice settings The system also asks short questions confirmation prompts when it is not sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses to your request When using voice commands words and icons may appear in the lower left status bar indicating the status of the voice session such as Listening Success Failed Paused or Try Again How to Use Voice Commands with Your System EE Press the voice icon After the tone speak your command i clearly What Can I Say To access the available voice commands for the current session do one of the following e During a voice session press the Help icon in the lower left status bar of the screen e Say What can I say for an on screen listing of the possible voice commands associated with your current voice session e Press the voice icon After the tone say Help
459. witch your ignition off however you will need to use an admin key to clear your MyKeys Note When you clear your MyKeys you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to their original admin key status at once To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings use the information display to do the following 1 Press SETUP until you see PRESS RESET TO CLEAR MYKEY in the display 2 Press and release the RESET button You will see HOLD RESET TO CONFIRM CLEAR in the display 3 Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds until you see ALL MYKEYS CLEARED in the display CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM STATUS You can find information about your programmed MyKeys by using the information display MYKEY DISTANCE Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey The only way to delete the accumulated distance is by using an admin key to clear your MyKey If the distance does not accumulate as expected then the intended user is not using the MyKey or an admin key user recently cleared and then recreated a MyKey NUMBER OF MYKEY S Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle Use this feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted NUMBER OF ADMIN KEY S Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your vehicle Use this feature to determine how many unrestricted keys you have for your vehicle and detect if an additional MyKey has been programmed MyKey 63 USING
460. with Industry Canada license exempt RSS standard s Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Note Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment The term IC before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met The typical operating range for your transmitter is approximately 33 feet 10 meters Vehicles with the remote start feature will have a greater range A decrease in operating range could be caused by e weather conditions e nearby radio towers e structures around your vehicle e other vehicles parked next to your vehicle The radio frequency used by your remote control can also be used by other short distance radio transmissions for example amateur radios medical equipment wireless headphones remote controls and alarm systems If the frequencies are jammed you will not be able to use your remote control You can lock and unlock the doors with the key Note Make sure your vehicle is locked before leaving it unattended Note If you are in range the remote control will operate if you press any button unintentionally 54 Keys and Remote Control Intelligent Access The system uses a
461. with the green tab Press Services 1 Select Connect to Services to initiate an outgoing call to SYNC aP using your paired and connected Bluetooth enabled cellular phone 2 Once you connect to the service follow the voice prompts to request the desired service such as Traffic or Directions You can also say What are my choices to receive a list of available services from which to choose 3 a Services to return to the Services main menu or for help say 13 e Dp Receiving Turn by Turn Directions 1 When connected to SYNC Services say Directions or Business Search To find the closest business or type of business to your current location just say Business Search and then Search Near Me If you need further assistance in finding a location you can say Operator at any time within a Directions or Business search to speak with a live operator The system may prompt you to speak with an operator when it has difficulty matching your voice request The live operator can assist you by searching for businesses by name or by category residential addresses by street address or by name or specific street intersections Operator Assist is a feature of your SYNC Services subscription For more information on Operator Assist visit www SYNCMyRide com support 2 Follow the voice prompts to select your Destination After the route download is finished the phone call automatically ends If your vehicle
462. ww Lincoln ca to find the Lincoln Extended Service Plan that is right for you 336 Audio System GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Frequencies and Reception Factors AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications Commission FCC and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission CRTC Those frequencies are AM 530 540 1700 1710 kHz FM 87 9 107 7 107 9 MHz Radio reception factors Distance and The further you travel from an FM station strength the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings bridges tunnels freeway overpasses parking garages dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with the reception Station overload When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in the audio system muting CD and CD Player Information Note CD units play commercially pressed 4 75 inch 12 centimeter audio compact discs only Due to technical incompatibility certain recordable and re recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players Note Do not insert CDs with homemade paper adhesive labels into the CD player as the label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed You should use a permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels on your homemade CDs Ballpoint pens may damage CDs Please contact your authorized dealer for further information
463. y Press the MAX A C button Recommended Settings for Cooling 1 Press the AUTO button 2 Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting Use 72 F 22 C as a starting point then adjust the setting as necessary Side Window Defogging in Cold Weather 1 Press the defrost button 2 Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting Use 72 F 22 C as a starting point then adjust the setting as necessary 3 Direct the instrument panel side air vents toward the side windows 4 Close the instrument panel center vents HEATED WINDOWS AND MIRRORS IF EQUIPPED Heated Rear Window Note The vehicle must be running to use this feature Press the control to clear the rear window of thin ice and fog Press the control again within 15 minutes to switch it off It turns off automatically after approximately 15 minutes or when you switch off the ignition Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the rear window This may cause damage to the heated grid lines Your warranty does not cover this damage Heated Exterior Mirror Note Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to readjust the mirror glass that has frozen in place These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors Note Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum based cleaning products Both mirro
464. y device that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving Various systems on your vehicle can be controlled using the information display controls on the steering wheel Corresponding information is displayed in the information display Information Display Controls e Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through and highlight the options within a menu e Press the right arrow button to enter a sub menu e Press the left arrow button to exit a menu e Press the OK button to choose and confirm a setting or message The arrows in the upper left corner of the display indicate additional content available when lit Main menu From the main menu bar on the left side of the information display you can choose from the following categories e Display Mode e Trip Fuel e Towing e Off Road e Settings Information Displays 107 Scroll up down to highlight one of the categories then press the right arrow key or OK to enter into that category Press the left arrow key as needed to exit back to the main menu Display Mode Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following display options Display Mode Digital tachome
465. y for optimum driveability and performance To begin this process 1 With the vehicle at a complete stop set the parking brake 2 Put the gearshift in P Park turn off all accessories and start the engine 3 Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature 4 Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 5 Turn the A C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 6 Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles 16 km or more to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy Note If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is eventually relearned If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is reconnected CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of the blade to check for roughness Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or water applied with a soft sponge or cloth 4 272 Maintenance CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance To replace the wiper blades 1 Fold back the wiper arm and position the wiper blade at a right angle to the wiper arm 2 To remove the wiper blade press the retaining clip A to disengage the wiper blade then pull the blade down toward the wind
466. y on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the pavement You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly e t often may be less risky to strike small objects such as highway reflectors with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide sideways out of control or roll over Remember your safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern 182 Four Wheel Drive If Equipped If your vehicle gets stuck WARNING Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander Note Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur Note Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears stopping between shifts in a steady pattern Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear Emergency maneuvers e In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made remember to avoid over driving your vehicle i e turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency Excessive steering will result in less vehicle contro
467. yed in the message center for several seconds Refer to Warning lamps and indicators in the Instrument Cluster chapter for hill descent control messages Parking Aids 195 SENSING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED WARNING To help avoid personal injury please read and understand the limitations of the system as contained in this section Sensing is only an aid for some generally large and fixed objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at parking speeds Traffic control systems inclement weather air brakes and external motors and fans may also affect the function of the sensing system this may include reduced performance or a false activation WARNING To help avoid personal injury always use caution when in R Reverse and when using the sensing system WARNING This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects The system is designed to provide a warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging the vehicle The system may not detect smaller objects particularly those close to the ground WARNING Certain add on devices such as large trailer hitches bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal detection zone of the system may create false beeps Note Keep the sensors located on the bumper fascia free from snow ice and large accumulations of dirt If the sensors are covered the system s accuracy can be affected Do not clean the sensors with s
468. you believe that your vehicle has 77 a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or Ford Motor Company To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator 1200 New Jersey Avenue Southeast Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS CANADA ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform Transport Canada using their toll free number 1 800 333 0510 or online at http www tc gc ca eng roadsafety menu htm Fuses 251 CHANGING A FUSE Fuses WARNING Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire If electrical components in your vehicle are not working a fuse may have blown

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Navigator navigator navigator of the seas navigator login navigator of the seas deck plan navigators ministry navigator of the seas royal caribbean navigator credit union navigator 2025 navigator car navigator of the seas reviews navigators insurance company navigator of the seas ship navigator lincoln navigator ai navigator gas navigator academy valrico navigator credit union login navigator salem state navigator academy davenport fl navigator web navigator recorder android navigator updater navigator academy navigator partners navigator bar

Related Contents

  CONDITIONS GENERALES  LITTLE MONSTER SPEACKER  CARGADOR CON CÁMARA ESPÍA F  Planet Eclipse Geo 2 Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file